Sokka x Original Female Character (my OC does not have physical descriptors in case any x reader peeps may want to enjoy this story)
Genre/Warnings: Romance (slow burn), angst, fluff, mild violence, mentions of grief and anxiety
Total Word Count: 68.1 (ongoing)
A century after the Air Nomads were wiped out, Aira has spent years hiding an impossible secret-she's an airbender.
After losing her mother and being forced to suppress her abilities to survive, Aira drifts through the world alone until she crosses paths with the Avatar and his friends on their journey to end the Hundred Year War. Suddenly, she's thrown into a life of danger, healing, and the possibility of belonging for the first time in years.
As Aang eagerly helps her reconnect with her airbending heritage, Aira grows closer to the people around her-especially Sokka, whose sarcasm and loyalty slowly break through her guarded heart. Between Fire Nation threats, lingering grief, and quiet moments beneath the stars, their bond blossoms into a soft slowburn romance.
But as the war closes in and the past continues to haunt her, Aira must decide whether she'll keep hiding who she is-or finally embrace the person she was meant to become.
Aira winces as Katara gently rubs ointment onto the burn stretching across her shoulder and upper back. Even after several days, the injury still aches. Not constantly. Just enough to be annoying. Every time she moves too quickly. Every time she forgets and reaches for something. Every time she rolls over while sleeping. The cool ointment eases some of the sting, but Aira still clenches her jaw as Katara works.
"Sorry," Katara says softly.
"It's okay." Aira glances over her shoulder. "Thank you, Katara. For taking care of me."
Katara looks up from the bandages. The kindness in her expression immediately reminds Aira why everyone gravitates toward her. "I'm happy to, Aira." She carefully wraps another layer of bandages around the burn. "It's healing nicely."
Aira sighs in relief. "Good."
Though if she were being honest, she'd prefer if it simply stopped hurting altogether. If only Katara had some kind of magical healing ability…
"Aira?"
She blinks.
"Huh?"
Katara laughs. "I asked if that was too tight."
"Oh." Aira flexes her shoulder experimentally. "It feels fine."
Katara ties off the final bandage. "There."
Aira carefully pulls her shirt back into place.
"You're officially patched up."
==============================
A short while later, the four teens hike through a forest trail in search of supplies. The path winds through tall trees that cast patches of shade across the ground. Eventually they arrive at a bulletin board standing beside the road. Various notices, posters, and advertisements cover the wooden surface.
Katara smiles. "This should give us a good idea of what's around here."
Sokka immediately digs through his empty ration bag. A few lonely crumbs tumble out. He stares at them mournfully. "See if you can find a menu." He tips the bag upside down over his mouth. Nothing falls out. "I'm starving."
"You're always starving," Aira snorts. Then her own stomach growls. The timing is so awful that everyone immediately looks at her. Aira closes her eyes. "...But seriously." She points at the board. "Do you see a menu, Katara?"
Sokka snickers.
Aang suddenly runs up to the board. His eyes light up. "I bet we'll be able to find something here." He points excitedly at a colorful poster. The image shows a grand Fire Nation palace surrounded by flames and dragons. "The Fire Days Festival!" Aang reads rapidly. "Fire Nation cultural exhibits, jugglers, benders, magicians—" His grin grows wider with every word. "This would be a great place for me to study some real firebenders."
Aira can practically see the excitement radiating off him. Whenever Aang talks about learning a new element, he looks like a kid in a sweets shop.
"You might want to rethink that." Sokka's voice immediately ruins the excitement.
Everyone turns. Sokka stands on the opposite side of the board with his arms crossed. He points toward several posters. Wanted posters. Including one of Aang.
Aang perks up. "Hey, a poster of me!"
"A wanted poster." Sokka looks completely unimpressed. "This is bad."
Aira steps closer. The sketch is surprisingly accurate. Too accurate. It even captures Aang's cheerful expression.
Katara nods. "I think we better keep moving."
"They're right, Aang," Aira says. “If we stay, you could get captured again.” She taps the poster. “Everyone in that town has probably seen this poster.”
Aang frowns. He gestures toward the festival. "This could be my only chance to watch actual firebending masters up close."
Katara hesitates. Aira already knows that look. It's the look Katara gets right before she agrees to something she probably shouldn't. Sure enough—
"...I guess we could check it out."
"What?! You want to walk into a Fire Nation town where they’re all fired up with all their, you know, fire?” Sokka says while flailing his hands around.
“We’ll wear disguises, if it looks like trouble, we’ll leave,” Katara says while walking away, already having made up her mind.
Aang immediately brightens and practically bounces after her. Sokka and Aira remain standing beside the bulletin board, silently watching their friends walk away. The two exchange a long look. Then both simultaneously sigh.
Sokka mutters, "Yeah. Because we always leave before we get into trouble."
Aira nods. "That's definitely something we're known for."
Sokka snorts. "Yeah, we're practically masters at avoiding danger.”
"Especially Aang."
Sokka laughs then the two reluctantly start following. When they reach Appa and Momo, Aang addresses their animal companions.
"You guys stay out of sight while we go to the festival."
Momo immediately launches himself into a nearby bush. The lemur completely disappears. Appa glances at the same bush. Then attempts to copy him. The massive sky bison lowers himself behind it. The bush successfully hides his face. And absolutely nothing else. His giant furry body remains completely visible.
Aira stares and points. "Appa."
The bison snorts.
"You're still visible."
Another snort.
But it must appease Aang. He turns dramatically. "Ready disguises."
Katara pulls up her hood. Sokka does the same. Aira adjusts her black cloak around her shoulders. Then she looks at Aang.
Aang grabs the collar of his bright orange robes and pulls them over his head. Barely. His arrows remain partially visible. His clothes are still bright orange. He somehow looks even more suspicious than before.
His friends all stare blankly as Aang smiles proudly.
"It's like you're a completely different person," Sokka deadpans.
Aang beams and begins walking toward the Fire Nation town, the others following behind closely.
Aira buries her face in her hands. "We're definitely getting captured again, aren't we?" And with a final sigh, Aira follows the others toward the Fire Nation town. And toward what is almost certainly going to become another disaster.
=============================
The sun is just beginning to set as they make it to the town.
Red lanterns sway gently overhead, strung between buildings like glowing beads. Long strands of crimson lights crisscross the streets, bathing everything in warm shades of orange and gold. The deeper the group ventures into town, the louder the celebration becomes. Drums pound in a steady rhythm that seems to vibrate through the ground beneath their feet.
Fireworks burst overhead, scattering brilliant streaks of red, gold, and white across the darkening sky. The explosions briefly illuminate the rooftops before fading into trails of sparkling smoke.
The streets are crowded with people dressed in shades of crimson and maroon. Vendors shout over one another. Children dart through the crowd waving sparklers and laughing. Families gather around food stalls. Musicians perform in the corners of busy intersections.
Aira studies everything carefully. At first, she searches for danger. For soldiers. For uniforms. For signs that someone has noticed Aang. But as the minutes pass, her attention drifts elsewhere. The people around her don't seem dangerous at all. An elderly woman helps her husband adjust his robe. A father carries a sleepy child on his shoulders. Two little girls chase each other through the crowd while their mother struggles to keep up.
They look...
Normal.
The realization unsettles her. Growing up, she'd been taught that the Fire Nation was the enemy. The soldiers she'd encountered certainly supported that belief—men who hunted, imprisoned, and killed without hesitation. Yet these people weren't soldiers. They were just people. Laughing. Eating. Celebrating. Living their lives. Aira glances at a young boy trying—and failing—to light a sparkler while his older sister giggles at him.
Maybe that's what makes war so awful, she thinks. Not that monsters fight monsters. That ordinary people do.
The thought lingers in her mind until Katara suddenly stops walking. Aira nearly bumps into her. Ahead lies the center of the festival. And everyone is wearing masks. Dozens of them. Some resemble dragons. Others depict spirits. Some are painted with elaborate flames while others have bright colors, exaggerated smiles, or fierce expressions.
Needless to say, four teenagers in cloaks stand out immediately.
"I think we need some new disguises," Katara trails off.
"Where are we gonna get masks like that?" Sokka asks.
As if the universe has perfect comedic timing—
"GET YOUR GENUINE FIRE FESTIVAL MASKS HERE!"
The four teens immediately turn. A nearby vendor waves dozens of masks from a wooden cart.
Aang grins. "Well that was easy."
A few moments later they're all standing around comparing their purchases.
Katara chooses a delicate mask with red soft blush marks on the cheeks. Aira picks a simple white mask decorated with three red circles—one on the forehead and one beneath each eye. Aang selects a red mask with an exaggerated frown. Sokka chooses a bright blue mask sporting an enormous grin.
Katara stares at Sokka. Aira stares at Aang. The two girls slowly exchange a look. Then, without saying a word, they simultaneously grab the boys' masks and switch them.
Katara nods toward Aang's new smiling mask. "Much better."
Aira points toward Sokka's grumpy mask. "There. Now they actually match your personalities."
Sokka scoffs, somewhat offended. "What does that mean?"
"It means," Aira says, "I've never seen someone look so annoyed while standing in front of fireworks."
"Because I'm hungry."
"You've been hungry since I met you."
As they continue through the festival, Aang suddenly points ahead. "Hey, there's some food."
"Finally!" Sokka exclaims. He practically teleports toward the nearest food vendor.
Aira immediately follows. Partly because she's hungry. Mostly because if she doesn't keep an eye on Sokka, he'll probably buy the entire stand.
"What do you have?" Sokka asks eagerly.
The vendor proudly presents several small paper pouches. "Flaming Fire Flakes. Best in town."
Sokka immediately buys one. Aira buys one too. The pouch contains crispy roasted flakes coated in bright red spices. Thin curls of steam rise from the snack, carrying a rich smoky aroma. Her stomach growls instantly.
Aira takes a cautious bite. Crunch. Her eyes widen. They're actually really good. Warm. Savory. Smoky. Spicy enough to make her tongue tingle without overwhelming the flavor. A pleasant heat spreads through her chest.
"Mmm."
Sokka apparently skips the cautious part. He dumps an entire handful into his mouth. For approximately two seconds, he looks happy. Then his face turns bright red.
"OW! HOT! HOT! HOT!" He waves his hands frantically while attempting to fan his tongue.
Katara folds her arms. "Flaming Fire Flakes," she says slowly. "Hot."
While Sokka rubs the remaining flakes from his tongue in an attempt to get some relief, Aira casually reaches over and takes the pouch from his hand. He doesn't notice. Too busy suffering. She takes another bite. Very good.
By the time Sokka finally recovers enough to look down, his pouch is gone. His eyes narrow. "Aira."
She immediately looks away. "Yes?"
"Why do you have my fire flakes?"
"They were abandoned."
"They were in my hand!"
"You seemed overwhelmed."
"Aira!"
Katara bursts out laughing. Aang grins beneath his mask. And despite himself, Sokka smiles and shakes his head.
A group of kids runs past them, gaining Aang’s attention.
“Hey, what’s that?”
They all walk up to a small seated crowd watching a puppet show. The small puppet is a man with a brown chin beard, bushy brown eyebrows, and fancy red robes decorated with gold details. A golden crown shaped like flames sits atop his head.
“Don’t worry, loyal citizens,” the puppet proclaims dramatically. “No one can surprise the Fire Lord!”
Aira tilts her head.
Is that what the Fire Lord actually looks like?
She’s never really thought much about the man beyond the destruction he leaves behind. Whenever she imagined him, she pictured something less human—a monster made of smoke and fire, with glowing eyes and sharpened teeth. Instead, the puppet just looks like... a man.
The children around her suddenly gasp as an Earth Kingdom soldier puppet bursts onto the stage.
“Oh no!”
“Look out!”
The crowd collectively holds its breath. Then the Fire Lord puppet opens its mouth and unleashes a stream of fire. The Earth Kingdom soldier erupts into flames.
The children cheer. Aira doesn't. Her stomach twists. The bright orange flames instantly drag her mind back to the abbey. To Zuko's attack. To the moment she was lying on the ground with fire racing across her shoulder.
Her fingers unconsciously brush against the edge of the bandages hidden beneath her clothes. The wound throbs. Not badly. Just enough. She remembers the smell of burning fabric. The sharp burst of pain. The panic. The helplessness. Aira swallows hard and forces her hand away from her shoulder.
Beside her, Sokka notices. His eyes flick briefly toward her.
"You okay?" he asks quietly.
She nods immediately. "Yeah."
It's not very convincing. Sokka studies her for a second longer before letting it go. The crowd erupts into applause as the Earth Kingdom puppet collapses into a pile of ashes. The children laugh and cheer.
Aira feels another pit form in her stomach. The four teens quietly drift away from the puppet show. Nobody seems particularly eager to stay.
Eventually they come across an even larger crowd gathered around a massive wooden stage. A man dressed in elegant white and red robes stands in the center. Unlike everyone else, he wears no mask. Flames swirl around him in perfect circles. He tosses them through the air as if they're weightless. One becomes two. Two becomes four. And so on. The crowd applauds as the fire dances around him.
Aira feels herself tense. The heat reaches her even from this distance. Instinctively, she takes half a step backward. Her burn aches again. Not enough to stop her. Just enough to remind her.
The performer launches a flame high into the air before catching it again with a graceful spin. The audience cheers. Aang, meanwhile, looks completely captivated. His eyes are practically glowing.
"Whoa..."
Without thinking, he starts pushing through the crowd.
"Aang!" Katara whispers.
But he's already moving. The closer he gets to the stage, the wider his smile becomes. They all finally reach the front of the crowd as the performer sweeps his arms outward, dissipating the flames.
Aang gasps, his eyes practically sparkling behind his mask.
"I gotta learn that trick!"
The performer faces the crowd. “For my next trick, I need a volunteer from the audience.”
Aang eagerly volunteers. “Ooh, ooh! Me! Me!” he yells as he jumps up and down.
Aira shakes her head and sighs. Here we go.
“What do you think you’re doing?” Sokka whispers, holding Aang to keep him from bouncing more.
“It’s better if we don’t attract any attention to ourselves,” Katara says.
“How about you little lady?” the performer asks as he stares directly at Katara.
Aira’s eyes widen under the mask. This is the complete opposite of not attracting attention to themselves.
Katara tries to deny the performer, but he persists, asking the crowd to give her some encouragement. The crowd cheers as the performer pulls Katara onto the stage.
“This is called Taming the Dragon,” he announces dramatically. He pulls out a chair and sets it center stage before gently guiding Katara to sit on the stage. “You will be my captured princess,” he says as he ties a red ribbon around her arms and torso to resemble her being tied up.
Flames burst from his fingertips. The crowd cheers. A long stream of fire spirals through the air. The flame twists and bends into the shape of a dragon. A surprisingly convincing dragon.
The fiery creature circles around Katara. Its body coils around the stage. The crowd watches in awe. Aang watches with fascination. Sokka watches with suspicion. Aira watches with increasing discomfort. The heat grows stronger every time the dragon passes. Each burst of flame makes her shoulder ache.
“Don’t worry young maiden, I will tame this fiery beast!” the performer yells.
The performer continues dancing around the stage. The dragon circles Katara again. This time a little too close. Katara visibly flinches. Aira straightens. The performer keeps smiling. The dragon dives lower. Lower. Lower. Something about this suddenly feels less like a performance and more like a guy showing off. Aira doesn't like it. Neither does Aang.
The performer suddenly stumbles dramatically. "Oh no!"
The crowd gasps.
"The dragon has escaped my control!"
Aira immediately narrows her eyes. That's definitely part of the act.
The dragon rears back. Then lunges directly at Katara. Katara gasps. Aira tenses. And before anyone else can react—Aang launches himself onto the stage.
"Aang, don't—"
A powerful gust of air erupts from his hands. The dragon instantly scatters into harmless sparks. Confetti flies everywhere. The performer's hair flies backward. And Aang's mask sails right off his face.
Silence.
Aang freezes. "...Oops."
The crowd erupts in boos. Aang dances goofily while Sokka and Aira work on freeing Katara from her binds.
“Hey! That kid’s the Avatar!” a man in the crowd yells.
For half a second, the entire festival freezes. Then chaos erupts. Aira's stomach drops as Fire Nation soldiers immediately begin shoving through the crowd toward the stage. Their armor glints beneath the lantern light as they level spears at the group.
"There they are!" one of them shouts. "Don't let them escape!"
The crowd erupts into frightened screams. People scatter in every direction. Aang's goofy grin vanishes instantly.
"I think it's time to go," Sokka says.
"Definitely time to go," Aira agrees.
"Follow me!"
The voice comes from somewhere behind them. A man dressed in a dark cloak peeks around the corner of a nearby building.
"I can get you out of here!"
Normally, following a mysterious stranger would be a terrible idea. Unfortunately, being arrested by Fire Nation soldiers sounds worse.
The four teens leap from the stage and sprint after the stranger. Aira nearly collides with a food cart as she follows the others through the crowded streets. People shout in surprise as they push through the festival. Lanterns sway overhead. Drums continue beating somewhere behind them. Fireworks explode in the sky. The celebration has suddenly become a nightmare.
"Over there!" a soldier yells.
Aira risks a glance behind her. Bad idea. At least a dozen soldiers are charging after them. More are pouring into the streets from side alleys.
Her pulse spikes. "They're gaining on us!"
"Keep moving!" Sokka shouts.
The stranger darts down a narrow alley. The group follows. Aira's shoes pound against the stone road. Her shoulder burns with every step. Each swing of her arms sends a sharp ache through her upper back. She grits her teeth and pushes forward. Not now. She can hurt later.
The stranger suddenly skids to a stop. Three soldiers block the alley ahead. Spears ready.
"Well..." the man says.
The soldiers begin advancing.
"Not this way."
The cloaked man calmly pulls a small object from his robes. Before anyone can ask what he's doing, he throws it.
BOOM!
A deafening explosion erupts. Smoke fills the alley. The soldiers are knocked backward with startled cries. Aira jumps.
"Okay," she says breathlessly. "That's actually pretty useful."
The stranger smirks. "This way."
The group turns and sprints in the opposite direction. The streets blur together. Left. Right. Through another crowd. Around a market stand. The sounds of pursuit never disappear. Heavy boots. Shouted orders. Clanking armor. Every time she thinks they've gained distance, she hears the soldiers again.
"We're not losing them!" Katara shouts.
"No kidding!" Sokka replies.
The stranger suddenly points ahead. "Down there!"
The group races toward another alley. Aira rounds the corner—and stops. Dead end. A solid brick wall blocks their path. Silence falls over the group. For one horrible moment nobody moves.
Then the sound returns. Footsteps. Lots of them. Approaching fast. Aira turns. The entrance to the alley is filling with soldiers. Spears. Armor. Firebenders. An entire wall of enemies. Her heart slams against her ribs.
We're trapped.
Aang reaches for his glider. Sokka grabs his club. Katara shifts into a waterbending stance despite only having a small pouch of water. Aira steps beside them. Her injured shoulder throbs. She ignores it. If they're fighting, she's fighting too.
Then a familiar roar echoes overhead. Everyone looks up. A massive shadow sweeps across the moonlight. Appa.
"There he is!" Aang cheers.
Appa dives toward the alley. The soldiers barely have time to react. With a furious roar, Appa slams into the ground. Appa swings his enormous tail. A powerful gust of air erupts down the alley. Soldiers go flying. Helmets spin through the air. Spears clatter against stone. The remaining soldiers retreat immediately.
"That's our cue!" Sokka says.
The group scrambles onto Appa's saddle. Aira practically throws herself onto the sky bison's back. She doesn't care if it isn't graceful. She's alive. That's enough. The stranger climbs aboard as well.
"Yip yip!" Aang shouts.
Appa launches skyward. Below them, more soldiers pour into the streets. A few point towards the sky. Others begin shouting orders. But they're too late. The group is already climbing above the rooftops. The town rapidly shrinks beneath them.
The stranger glances over the edge of the saddle and pulls another explosive from his cloak. Before anyone can respond, he tosses it downward. The explosive arcs through the air and disappears into a stack of crates. A second later—
BOOM!
A shower of fireworks erupts into the sky. The explosions illuminate the entire town. Gasps and cheers rise from below. The soldiers completely lose sight of Appa amidst the dazzling display.
Aang grins. "Nice touch."
For the first time since the chase began, Aira allows herself to breathe.
Then Sokka narrows his eyes at the stranger. "You seem to know a lot about explosives."
The man's smile falters slightly. "I'm familiar." He reaches up and removes his mask. Shaggy brown hair falls around his face. His eyes glow amber in the fading light.
Aira immediately stiffens. Fire Nation. Instinctively, she shifts closer to Sokka. Not enough for anyone else to notice. Except Katara. Who definitely notices. And definitely looks amused.
"You're a Fire Nation soldier," Sokka says.
"I was," the man replies. His expression softens. "My name is Chey."
Aira doesn't say anything. But her hand unconsciously drifts toward the bandages covering her burn. Just in case.
Chey notices. “Don’t worry,” Chey says. “I’m not going to hurt you. I deserted the Fire Nation military. I no longer associate myself with the Fire Nation.”
The forest grows quiet except for the steady beating of Appa's tail against the air. Aira remains tense. She studies Chey carefully. The shape of his jaw. The way he carries himself. Everything about him reminds her of the soldiers she's spent years avoiding. Years running from.
The former soldier looks out across the darkening forest below them. "When I was younger, I believed everything they taught us. That the Fire Nation was bringing prosperity to the world. That we were helping people." His expression darkens. "Then I saw what the war actually looked like."
No one interrupts.
"I watched villages burn. I watched innocent people suffer because commanders wanted promotions." Chey's voice becomes softer. "And eventually I realized that the nation I served only cared about spreading fear and violence.”
Aira wants to believe him. Part of her does. But another part remembers burned skin. Constant fear. Her parents. It's difficult to separate a nation from the pain it's caused.
Aang's expression softens. "So you just walked away?"
"I ran." Chey chuckles humorlessly. "Deserting wasn't exactly encouraged."
========================
Eventually, Appa lands in a small clearing deep within the forest. The massive sky bison lowers himself onto the grass with a tired groan while Momo immediately darts off to investigate nearby trees.
Night has fully settled over the world. The canopy overhead allows only scattered moonlight to reach the forest floor. Crickets chirp from somewhere in the darkness, and the distant rush of a river can barely be heard beyond the trees.
Aang quickly gets a campfire going. Soon, the five travelers are gathered around the flames. The fire crackles softly. Orange light dances across everyone's faces. For a while, nobody says much. The excitement from escaping the festival has finally worn off, leaving behind exhaustion.
Sokka pokes at the fire with a stick. Katara unwraps some food supplies. Aira carefully adjusts her sitting position so her injured shoulder doesn't brush against anything. Across the fire, Chey silently stares into the flames.
“So Chey,” Aang starts, “are you all by yourself out here?”
"Actually, I serve a man." Chey smiles slightly. "More than a man, really." His eyes gleam with admiration. "He’s a myth, but he's real. A living legend. Jeong Jeong the Deserter." Chey says the name like he's introducing royalty.
"He was a Fire Nation General." He pauses. "Or maybe an admiral." Another pause. He scratches the back of his head.
"He was very highly ranked, we get it," Sokka says.
"Oh yeah. Way up there." Chey raises his hand far above his head. The former soldier's expression becomes more serious. "But he couldn't take the madness anymore."
The amusement fades. The crackling fire fills the silence. Chey's eyes lower toward the flames.
"He was the first person to ever leave the army and live… I’m the second but you don’t get to be a legend for that. It’s okay though."
Aira studies him carefully. The idea still feels strange. Fire Nation soldiers leaving the army. Choosing not to fight. It goes against everything she grew up believing. Yet here sits Chey. A living contradiction.
“Jeong Jeong is a firebending genius,” Chey continues. “Some say he’s mad. But he’s not. He’s enlightened.”
Aang sits up straighter. His excitement is impossible to miss now. "You mean there's a firebender out there who’s not with the Fire Lord?" He grins impossibly wide and jumps to his feet. “We’ve gotta go see him! He can train me!”
Aira can't help smiling at the sight. For a brief moment, she understands exactly how he feels. She remembers meeting Aang for the first time—meeting another airbender. The last airbender. How impossible that had seemed. How hopeful. And that’s what Aang must be feeling. Hope. He has no firebending teacher. No guidance. No one willing to help him learn the final element he needs to master. But now that may change.
"We're not going looking for some crazy firebender," Sokka says.
"He isn't crazy," Chey argues. The two stand simultaneously. Chey points at Aang. “Jeong Jeong is a genius. And he’s the perfect person to train the Avatar.”
Aang nods enthusiastically. "Exactly!"
"That's why I followed you into the festival."
Aira blinks. Wait. She straightens. Followed us? Aira's stomach drops. She replays the entire day. The marketplace. The puppet show. The food stands. The crowds. The stage. She hadn't noticed him once. Not once.
That's concerning.
Maybe she isn't as observant as she thought. Maybe she deserved a different Water Tribe mark–the Mark of Completely Missing Things Happening Behind Her.
"Thanks for the help," Sokka says while crossing his arms defiantly. "But we're leaving for the North Pole tomorrow morning."
The conversation threatens to end there. Until Aang speaks again. His voice is quieter this time. More vulnerable.
"Sokka..."
Everyone looks at him. The grin is gone. For a moment he looks every bit like a twelve-year-old boy carrying the weight of the world. Aang stares into the fire.
"This could be my only chance to meet a firebending master who would actually be willing to teach me.”
Nobody argues. Because it's true. The Avatar must master all four elements. And time is running out.
Katara sighs. "It couldn't hurt to at least talk to him."
Sokka throws both hands into the air. "That's exactly what you said about the festival! Why does nobody ever listen to me?"
Aira winces. Honestly? He has a point. The festival had gone terribly. But still… She finds herself looking at Aang. At the hope in his eyes. At how desperately he wants this. And she remembers when Aang agreed to teach her airbending. How much those lessons mean to her. How lost she'd feel without them.
"I think they're right."
Everyone turns toward her.
"Sokka," Aira says carefully, "Aang doesn't have anyone else. He needs a firebending teacher." She glances toward Aang. "And if this Jeong Jeong really is willing to teach him..." She shrugs. "It might be his only chance."
Aang smiles at her. A grateful smile. But Sokka looks unconvinced. Before he can respond—
A sharp spear suddenly appears inches from his face. Everyone freezes. The forest goes silent. Several figures emerge from the darkness. Then several more. Then even more.
Aira's stomach drops. Men step from behind trees. From bushes. From the shadows. Every single one carries a weapon. In seconds, the campfire is completely surrounded. Katara rises immediately, water pouch in hand. Aang slides into an airbending stance. Aira stands beside him. Her pulse races.
One of the men steps forward. His scarred face is illuminated by the firelight.
"Don't move."
The spear remains pointed directly at Sokka. The man narrows his eyes.
"Follow us."
The group exchanges nervous looks. Aira's fingers twitch. Trying to calculate how many opponents there are. Too many. Definitely too many. Then the man glares at Chey.
"Jeong Jeong told you not to look for the Avatar."
Sokka blinks. Then looks between them. Then back again.
"...Hold on." He points. "You know these guys?"
"Oh yeah!" Chey says cheerfully.
Aira stares. How is he so relaxed?
Chey points toward the spear-wielding man. "Lin Ye is an old buddy! Right Lin Ye?” he says with a smile.
The man closes his eyes as if regretting his life choices.
"Shut up. Keep moving."
Eventually, the trees begin to thin, and the dense forest opens up around them. The sound of rushing water grows steadily louder with every step until it drowns out the chirping insects and rustling leaves. Soon, the river comes into view, moonlight shimmering across its surface. Nestled along the riverbank sits a small metal structure, its dark silhouette reflecting faintly in the water.
Lin Ye stops walking and gestures sharply toward the building.
"Go on," he tells Chey. "He sees you only."
"Oh, that's okay," Chey says with a nervous laugh. "We can catch up later."
Aang immediately perks up.
"Is that where Jeong Jeong is?" he asks eagerly. "I need to talk to him right away."
Before anyone can stop him, he starts marching toward the structure. Lin Ye steps directly into his path.
"No. You wait here."
His voice leaves absolutely no room for argument. Then he gives Chey a firm shove between the shoulders.
"Go. Now."
Chey stumbles forward. "Don't worry. Everything will be fine," he says over his shoulder. Then, as he walks away, they hear him muttering under his breath. "He's a great man. A great man. Definitely a great man." The way he keeps repeating it sounds less like confidence and more like someone trying desperately to convince himself.
Aira exchanges a glance with Sokka.
"That doesn't make me feel better about this guy," Sokka mutters.
After Chey disappears into Jeong Jeong's quarters, Lin Ye escorts the four teens to a smaller structure nearby. Inside, a modest fire crackles in a stone pit. Blankets and bedrolls are scattered around the room, and after the chaos of the festival, the place feels surprisingly peaceful. Katara immediately settles beside the fire. Sokka drops onto the ground with a groan. Aira quietly sits down between the two siblings.
Meanwhile, Aang is incapable of sitting still. He paces. Then he bounces on his heels. Then he sits down. Then he stands back up. Then he paces again. Aira's eyes follow him back and forth. Back and forth. Back and forth. Finally she pinches the bridge of her nose.
"Aang."
"Hm?"
"You've walked past me seventeen times."
"I have?"
"Yes."
"Oh."
He continues pacing. Aira stares.
"Aang."
"Yeah?"
"You gotta relax. You're giving me a headache."
"Sorry."
Aang finally drops down beside her. For approximately three seconds. Then his knee starts bouncing.
"I'm just so excited!" he blurts. "What if he agrees to teach me? What if he shows me real firebending forms? What if—"
"What if you sit still for five seconds?" Aira suggests.
Aang laughs sheepishly. Aira smiles despite herself and nudges his shoulder.
"I know you're excited, buddy. But Chey will come get you when he's done."
"I know."
"It's been a long day so try to relax."
Aang sighs dramatically. "Okay." He immediately begins drawing circles in the dirt with his finger.
Aira raises an eyebrow. "This is your version of relaxing?"
"Maybe."
After watching him fidget for another minute, an idea comes to her.
"Do you wanna play Water, Earth, Fire, Air?"
Aang's entire face lights up.
"Do I?!"
He scoots around the fire and plops down directly across from her. The excitement is so immediate that Katara starts giggling. Sokka leans forward with interest.
Aang holds out his fist. Aira mirrors him. The two begin rhythmically pumping their fists.
"Water."
"Earth."
"Fire."
"Air."
On the final word, they reveal their choices.
Aira extends her fingers, wiggling them dramatically. "Fire."
Aang presents a closed fist. "Earth."
His eyes widen. Then he shoots both arms into the air.
"I give up!" Aira throws her hands in the air. “What, can Avatars read minds or something?"
"Nope." He points proudly at himself. "But we are masters of all four elements."
"That's not how this game works."
"It is when you're winning."
Sokka laughs, clearly entertained by Aira's growing frustration.
Aira narrows her eyes at him. "What?"
"Nothing."
"You think you can beat him."
"I didn't say that."
"But you laughed."
"I did not laugh."
"You absolutely laughed."
"That was a dignified chuckle."
Katara snorts. "A dignified chuckle?" she repeats.
Sokka points at her. "Exactly. Thank you."
"I was making fun of you."
Aira crosses her arms. "So you're admitting you're too scared to challenge him?"
"Scared?" Sokka places a hand on his chest as if personally offended. "Please. I'm a warrior."
"A warrior who's making a lot of excuses."
"I'm not making excuses."
"Then prove it."
Katara leans forward with a grin. "Yeah, Sokka. Defend your honor."
"My honor doesn't need defending."
"Sounds like something someone says when they're about to lose."
Sokka squints at Aira. "You're enjoying this way too much."
"I'll tell you what." Aira reaches into her cloak and pulls out the pouch of remaining fire flakes. The roasted flakes rustle as she shakes it lightly. "If you beat him, you can have the rest of these."
Sokka's eyes immediately lock onto the pouch. "You're on."
Before anyone can say another word, Sokka scoots across the floor and drops down opposite Aang.
"Move over."
Aira sighs dramatically and slides aside. The room falls strangely silent. Katara leans forward. Aira clutches the pouch. Aang grins.
Across from him, Sokka cracks his knuckles. Then the two boys raise their fists.
Sokka leaps to his feet. Katara groans. Aira stares in complete disbelief.
"No."
Sokka extends a hand. "My flakes."
"No."
"You promised."
"It was clearly a flawed agreement."
"You promised."
"Aang?" Aira asks desperately.
Aang nods. "You promised."
Aira immediately glares at him. "Why must you be so moral all the time?"
"Avatar duties."
With the deepest sigh she can manage, she hands over the pouch. Sokka accepts it like a victorious war hero receiving a medal. A few moments later, he's happily munching away.
Katara watches him. "I thought you hated those."
"I don't hate them."
"You were screaming in pain and wiping them from your tongue."
"The spice surprised me. But they’re actually quite enjoyable."
Aira watches him eat with growing jealousy. Those were her fire flakes. Well… Technically they belonged to Sokka until she swiped them from his hands. But still. That isn't the point.
Sokka notices her staring. He hesitates. Looks at the pouch. Looks at her. Then reluctantly holds it out.
Aira smiles at him. She immediately reaches in and grabs a small handful.
"Not so much!" Sokka yelps.
Aira freezes. The entire room goes silent. Katara slowly raises an eyebrow. Aang blinks.
“What?” Sokka says defensively. “I’m hungry…” he trails off as he eats more.
“You’re always hungry!” his three friends all say in unison.
Suddenly, the flap of the hut opens. Chey steps inside. One look at his face tells everyone how the conversation went. His shoulders sag. His usual enthusiasm is gone completely.
Aang immediately sits up straighter. "What happened?" he asks. "Can I see Jeong Jeong now?"
Chey lowers himself onto a nearby crate and rests his elbows on his knees. "He won't see you."
The words seem to suck all the air out of the room.
Aang's smile falters. "What?"
Chey shakes his head. "He's very angry that I brought you here. He wants you to leave immediately.”
"Finally," Sokka says, throwing his hands into the air. "Let’s hit the road.”
Katara shoots him a look. "Sokka."
"What? He said to leave. Let’s leave."
Aang barely seems to hear them. "Why won't he see me?"
The disappointment in his voice makes Aira's chest tighten.
Chey sighs. "He says you're not ready."
"Not ready?"
"He says you haven't mastered waterbending or earthbending yet. He could tell by the way you walked into camp."
Aira blinks. That was actually kind of impressive.
Aang presses his lips together. His disappointment lasts all of three seconds. Then determination takes over. "I'm going in anyway."
Before anyone can stop him, he marches out of the hut.
"Aang—" Katara starts.
Too late. The flap swings shut behind him. Silence settles over the room. Aira stares after him. She admires his determination. Really, she does. But she also hopes this legendary firebender doesn't throw him into the river.
"Maybe someone should go with him," she says, getting to her feet.
A hand gently catches her wrist. She looks down.
Sokka shakes his head. "Wait."
"But—"
"This is something Aang needs to do himself."
Aira hesitates. Part of her wants to follow anyway. Eventually she lets out a sigh and sits back down. "Fine."
She folds her legs and begins absentmindedly tracing circles in the dirt with her finger. One circle. Then another. Then a third.
"Now who's having trouble sitting still?" Katara asks with a grin.
Aira snorts. "Ha. Ha. Very funny."
Katara's grin widens. "I learned from the best."
Aira glances toward Sokka. "That explains why the joke wasn't very good."
"Hey!"
Several minutes crawl by. Then the hut flap bursts open. Aang practically bounces inside. His grin is so wide it looks painful.
"He said yes!"
Everyone looks up.
"He'll teach me!"
Katara immediately smiles. “That’s great Aang.”
Aang pumps both fists into the air. "I'm gonna learn firebending!"
Even Aira can't help smiling. "That's amazing, Aang."
Sokka groans dramatically. "Yeah. Fantastic."
Aira reaches over and very lightly smacks his arm. "Be supportive."
"Ow!" Sokka rubs his shoulder. "What was that for?"
"That was for being grumpy."
"That hurt."
Aira stares at him. "Sokka, I barely touched you."
"Easy for you to say. You weren't the one who got hit."
"I thought you were a big, strong warrior."
"I am."
"Then why are you whining?"
"Because," Sokka says with complete seriousness, "you're stronger than you look."
==========================
The following morning is peaceful. The camp is filled with sounds of chirping birds and running water from the stream. While Aang begins his firebending training, Sokka fishes from a large rock right next to camp, and next to him, Katara patches up Aira’s bandages again. She sighs as the ointment cools the healing burn.
“It’s looking better everyday,” Katara chirps.
“Does that mean I can start training again?” Aira asks hopefully.
Without looking at her, Sokka and Katara both speak in unison.
“No.”
“No.”
Aira groans and crosses her arms in a pout.
“Doesn’t Aang like you to meditate as part of your training?” Katara suggests. “You could always do that.” She finishes wrapping Aira’s bandages. “All done!”
“You’re right. Thank you, Katara,” Aira says.
She stays where she’s seated and moves into a lotus position before closing her eyes. Sokka continues to fish, and Katara uses this as a chance to practice her waterbending.
Nearby, Jeong Jeong begins Aang’s firebending training. Aang is standing on a flat rock sticking up from the surface of the riverbed.
“Widen your stance,” Jeong Jeong orders.
Aang stands with his knees hip width apart, slightly bent, and his hands pulled in at his sides.
“Wider!” Jeong Jeong instructs. “Bend your knees. Now, concentrate.”
“Wait, what do I do now?” Aang asks as Jeong Jeong starts to walk away.
“Silence,” Jeong Jeong says. “Talking is not concentrating. Look at your friends. Are they talking?” he asks, gesturing at Aira and Katara. Then he looks at Sokka. “Even that oaf knows to concentrate on what he’s doing!”
“Hey!” Sokka yells defensively.
Aira snickers, causing Sokka to send her a playful glare.
"Laugh all you want," he says.
"I will."
"At least I'm allowed to do things."
Aira freezes.
Sokka immediately realizes his mistake. "Uh..."
"Excuse me?"
"I mean..."
Aira flicks her wrist. A gust of wind shoots across the riverbank.
"Wait—"
Sokka barely has time to react before the blast catches him square in the chest. He pinwheels his arms wildly.
"Aira, don't you da—AAAAH!"
Splash.
Water erupts around him as he disappears beneath the river's surface. Katara bursts out laughing. Even Aang glances away from Jeong Jeong long enough to grin. A moment later, Sokka's head breaks the surface. He spits out a mouthful of water.
“Was that really necessary?" he deadpans.
"Absolutely," Aira replies.
Katara and Aira both giggle at him.
"Come on," Aira says, walking over to the riverbank. "I'll help you up."
She extends her hand. Sokka stares at it. Then a suspicious smile spreads across his face. Aira immediately regrets her decision.
"Sokka, don't—"
He grabs her wrist. "Too late."
With one sharp tug, he yanks her forward.
"SOKKA!"
Splash. Cold water engulfs her. She resurfaces a second later, sputtering and pushing wet hair out of her face.
Sokka is laughing so hard he's practically folding in half. "Worth it," he wheezes.
Katara's jaw drops. "Sokka!"
He immediately points at Aira. "She started it."
"I just changed her bandages!"
Aira wipes water from her eyes and laughs despite herself.
"Yeah," she admits. "I kinda deserved that one."
Aira starts wading towards the riverbank. “Sorry, Katara,” she says sheepishly. “But can you help me change my bandages again, please?” she pouts.
Katara sighs and joins Aira as they both walk back to their hut to get supplies, leaving Sokka in the water by himself.
=========================
After Katara changes Aira's bandages, the waterbender heads back toward the river to continue practicing. Aira remains in the hut to meditate. She settles into a lotus position and closes her eyes.
Inhale.
Exhale.
She focuses on the movement of air entering and leaving her lungs. The breeze drifting through the open doorway brushes against her face. For a while, it works. Her thoughts are quiet. The ache in her shoulder fades into the background. Everything feels still.
Then someone screams. Aira's eyes snap open. Another shout follows. Aira’s stomach immediately drops.
Fire Nation.
The thought hits her before anything else. She scrambles to her feet so quickly she nearly loses her balance. Her heart begins pounding. Without thinking, she sprints from the hut. Branches whip past her as she races toward the river. She hears another yell, this one louder than the last.
And when she finally breaks through the tree line— She freezes.
Sokka is pinning Aang to the ground. Katara is running away. Crying. The scene makes absolutely no sense. For a second Aira's brain refuses to process what she's seeing. Aang looks horrified. Sokka looks furious. Katara looks devastated.
"What happened?!" Aira yells.
Nobody answers. Sokka is too busy shouting. Aang is too stunned to speak. Katara keeps running. Aira doesn't hesitate. She immediately turns and chases after the crying girl.
"Katara!"
The waterbender doesn't stop.
“Katara!”
Finally, several moments later, Katara slows near the riverbank. She collapses onto her knees beside the water. Her shoulders shake. Aira's chest tightens. She approaches slowly. Carefully. The same way she'd approach a wounded animal.
"Katara?"
No response. Aira kneels beside her.
"Are you okay?"
Katara lets out a shaky breath. "No."
The single word nearly breaks apart as it leaves her mouth. Aira's eyes drift downward. Then she sees Katara's hands. And immediately wishes she hadn't. Burns cover both palms. Angry red skin stretches across her fingers. Several spots already look blistered.
Aira winces. Spirits. That looks painful.
"What happened?" she asks softly.
Katara wipes her eyes. "Aang."
Understanding immediately floods through Aira. The firebending lesson. Something went wrong. Very wrong.
Aira gently reaches toward Katara's wrists. "Let me see."
Katara reluctantly holds out her hands. The sight makes Aira's stomach twist. She knows exactly how burns feel. She remembers Zuko's fire. The searing pain. The lingering ache. The way even a shirt brushing against damaged skin could hurt. This looks even worse.
"Here." Aira points toward the river. "The water's cold."
Katara looks up.
"Put your hands in."
The younger girl nods. Slowly she lowers her hands beneath the surface.
Aira immediately stands. "I'll go get the ointment."
She turns—Then hears Katara gasp. Aira freezes.
"What?"
Katara doesn't answer. Aira spins around. And stops. The water surrounding Katara's hands is glowing. Soft blue light swirls through the river. The sight is almost beautiful. Neither girl moves. The glow grows brighter. Then slowly fades away. Katara carefully lifts her hands from the water. The burns are gone. Not reduced. Not improved. But gone.
Aira's jaw practically hits the ground. Katara looks equally shocked. The two girls stare at each other. Then at Katara's hands. Then back at each other. Neither has any explanation.
"You have healing abilities."
Both girls jump. Jeong Jeong stands behind them. His expression is unreadable. He slowly kneels beside the river.
"The great healers of the Water Tribes sometimes have this ability."
Aira looks at Katara with renewed amazement. "Katara, that's incredible."
“I’ve always wished I was blessed like you–free from this burning curse,” Jeong Jeong says mournfully.
“But you’re a great master,” Katara says. “You have powers I’ll never know.”
“Water brings healing and life. But fire brings only destruction and pain,” Jeong Jeong replies. “It forces those of us burdened with its care to walk a razor’s edge between humanity and savagery… eventually we’re torn apart.”
Suddenly, several gusts of fire are shot in their direction. The three of them stand and look to see several river boats heading straight toward them.
“Go get your friends and flee!” Jeong Jeong yells, standing his ground to fight. “Do not come back here or you will all be destroyed. Hurry!”
The second Jeong Jeong orders them to run, Aira doesn't argue. The urgency in his voice tells her everything she needs to know. This isn't a battle they can win.
The two girls sprint through the forest. Roots and rocks blur beneath their feet. Branches scratch against Aira's sleeves. Her lungs burn. The sounds of explosions and shouting echo from behind them.
By the time they reach camp, Sokka is already on his feet.
"Katara! Are you okay?” he asks with concern.
"I'm okay." Katara grabs his arm. "We need to leave. Now."
"Where's Aang?" Aira asks.
Sokka points toward Jeong Jeong's quarters. Katara quickly makes her way towards Aang while Sokka and Aira pack all of their things onto Appa’s saddle. When Katara returns, Aang isn’t with her.
“Was Aang not there?” Aira asks.
“He was. He went to help Jeong Jeong,” Katara replies, pointing down the river.
Aira's eyes widened. Before anyone can stop her, Aira turns.
"Well then we have to help too."
She turns toward the river before she can think twice about it. But Sokka grabs her wrist.
“Aira.”
The firmness in his voice makes her stop. She looks down at his hand, then up at him.
“You can't,” he says.
“What?”
“You can't go out there.”
Aira stares at him in disbelief. “Excuse me?”
“You're still injured.”
“We're talking about Aang.”
“But your shoulder–”
“My shoulder is fine.” Aira lets out a frustrated laugh.
“No, it isn't.”
Katara glances between them, wisely deciding not to get involved.
Aira jerks her arm free. “Stop doing that.”
Sokka blinks. “Doing what?”
“Treating me like I'm made of glass.”
“Aira—”
“No!” she snaps.
The word echoes through the camp. For a moment nobody speaks. Aira's chest rises and falls rapidly. She isn't even sure why she's so angry. Maybe because she's tired of sitting on the sidelines. Maybe because everyone keeps deciding what she can and can't do. Or maybe because Aang is in danger and every second they're arguing feels like a waste.
She points toward the river. “Aang went out there alone. Jeong Jeong is fighting an entire fleet. We should be helping.”
“I know that.”
“Then why are you stopping me?”
Sokka opens his mouth. Closes it. Opens it again. His frustration is written all over his face. Finally he blurts—
“Because if you go out there, you could get hurt worse.” Sokka takes a breath. “And I can't live with that.”
The words hang in the air. His eyes widen. Katara's eyebrows shoot upward. Aira just stares. Sokka looks like he wants to physically grab the sentence and shove it back into his mouth.
“I mean—” He stops. His face turns bright red. “I just—”
Another failed attempt. Katara suddenly becomes very interested in a nearby tree. Aira feels her stomach do a strange little flip.
Sokka drags both hands down his face. “What I'm trying to say,” he mutters, “is that you've already been hurt once because of all this.” His voice softens. “And I don't want that happening again.”
The embarrassment is still there, but now there's something more honest beneath it. Something harder to joke away.
Aira looks at him for a long moment. Then she sighs. The fight drains out of her shoulders.
“Okay.”
Relief immediately washes across Sokka’s face. He gestures toward Appa.
“Come on. We're packed and ready. We need to find Aang and get out of here.”
Katara and Aira both nod. The three teens hurry toward Appa together. They fly toward Aang, finding him in the river in front of several river boats, now set ablaze.
“Aang, c’mon. Let’s go!” Sokka yells.
Aang rushes towards Appa and jumps on his head before grabbing the reins and sending them into the sky.
“Wait,” Aang starts, “where’s Jeong Jeong?”
“He disappeared," Sokka says, looking down at the camp. “They all did.”
The four teens peer down toward Jeong Jeong's camp as Appa climbs higher into the sky. The camp is completely deserted. Not a single person remains. Just an empty clearing swallowed by the forest.
The boy blinks. Aang looks down as though noticing the injury for the first time. A nasty burn stretches across his forearm, the edges still red and irritated.
Katara immediately scoots closer.
“Let me help.”
Aang obediently offers his arm. Katara draws water from a waterskin and guides it over the burn. The liquid wraps around his arm like a ribbon. Then it begins to glow. Soft blue light illuminates Katara's hands. Aira watches in fascination.
The glow almost reminds her of moonlight reflecting on water. As the water passes over the wound, the angry red skin fades away. Within seconds, the burn is gone. Aang turns his arm over. Then over again.
"Wow." He grins. "That's good water."
"When did you learn to do that?" Sokka asks.
Katara shrugs. A proud smile tugs at her lips. "I guess I always knew."
"Oh." Sokka nods thoughtfully. "Well thanks for all the first aid over the years."
Aira immediately recognizes the tone. Sokka is about to be annoying.
"Like when I fell into that greaseberry bramble. Or when I got two fishhooks stuck in my thumb."
Aira blinks. "Two?"
Aang looks equally confused. "How do you get two fishhooks stuck in your thumb?"
Katara points at her brother. "He tried to remove the first fishhook with another fishhook."
Aira stares. Aang stares. Sokka shrugs.
"It made sense at the time."
"It absolutely did not," Katara says.
Aira snorts. Aang starts laughing. Then Aang's smile fades slightly. His eyes drift toward Aira.
"Katara?"
"Yeah?"
"If you can heal wounds now..." He glances at Aira's shoulder. "...can you heal the rest of Aira’s burn?"
The laughter immediately fades. Aira unconsciously reaches toward her shoulder. Even now, days later, the skin still aches.
Katara brightens. "I can try." She looks toward Aira. "Aira?"
Aira immediately nods. "Please."
The airbender carefully turns around. Katara gathers another ribbon of water. The cool liquid settles against Aira's shoulder. Instant relief floods through her. Aira's eyes close. She hadn't realized how much the burn still hurt until that pain finally begins to disappear.
The water glows. Soft. Gentle. The sensation spreads across her shoulder blade and upper back. Like sunlight after a cold morning. Like sinking into a hot spring. Like finally exhaling after holding a breath.
Aira's shoulders slowly relax. The constant ache fades then disappears entirely. Her eyes open. For the first time since Zuko's attack, nothing hurts. Nothing. Aira experimentally rolls her shoulder. Then again. No pain. No stiffness. No burning. Her face immediately lights up.
"Katara!" She twists around excitedly. "It doesn't hurt anymore!"
Katara beams. "It worked."
Aira rotates her arm several more times just because she can. The freedom feels incredible. Then a thought occurs to her. She reaches up and lightly touches the healed skin.
"Wait." She tries craning her neck. "Does that mean there's no mark anymore?"
Katara's smile softens. She hesitates.
Aira immediately notices. "Oh."
Katara lowers her eyes. "I'm sorry. The wound is healed," she gently touches Aira's shoulder. "But burns that deep leave scars."
Aira reaches back again. Fingers brushing over slightly uneven skin. A reminder. A permanent one. For a moment, she's quiet. Then she shrugs.
“But still, thank you, Katara.” Aira smiles and wraps her arms around Katara in a quick hug.
Katara returns the hug immediately. "You're welcome."
Aira leans back. Besides, she thinks, a scar is a small price to pay for still being here. For still being with her friends. For still moving forward.
"I have a feeling this healing thing is going to come in handy."
Katara laughs. "Hopefully not."
The four friends settle into a comfortable silence. Appa glides steadily northward. The sky slowly shifts toward evening. Clouds drift beneath them. The world feels peaceful again.
Aira finds herself glancing sideways. Toward Sokka. He doesn't notice. He's too busy arguing with Momo over the last few fire flakes. A small smile tugs at her lips. Then she remembers what he said earlier about her getting hurt.
"I can't live with that."
She feels heat radiating up her neck, and this time, it’s not from a burn.
Sorry for the delay in getting this chapter out. Life got ahead of me this week. Hope you enjoy! Let me know your thoughts. :)
Chapter Masterlist
The morning is cool and quiet, the forest still heavy with dew from the night before. Shafts of sunlight filter through the trees in scattered beams, illuminating particles of dust in the air. Somewhere nearby, unseen birds chirp lazily to one another while Appa snores loudly back at camp.
Aira walks alongside Aang and Sokka through the woods, absently twiddling the wooden beads of her bracelet between her fingers as they explore the area surrounding their campsite. The earth beneath their shoes is damp and soft, littered with fallen leaves and twisting roots.
A little ways ahead, Aang suddenly stops mid-step. He crouches down beside something sticking out of the ground. He reaches down and picks up a small sword. It has a curved, jagged blade, and the handle is wrapped in blue fabric.
“Hey look, a sword made from a whale’s tooth,” he says.
The moment Sokka hears that, he practically teleports across the clearing.
“Let me see that.”
Aang hands it over, and Sokka’s entire demeanor shifts the second the weapon touches his hands. The usual joking ease leaves his face, replaced by sharp concentration.
Aira notices it immediately. It always surprises her a little how quickly Sokka changes when something matters to him. One second he’s sarcastic and dramatic, the next he’s focused in a way that makes him seem older. More capable.
Sokka studies the blade carefully, thumb brushing over the carved markings near the handle. “This is a Water Tribe weapon,” he says quietly. Something flickers across his face then—hope, cautious and fragile. Aira notices the way his grip tightens slightly around the sword.
“See if you can find anything else,” he says quickly.
Immediately, the group spreads out.
Aang dives enthusiastically into a nearby bush with absolutely no strategy whatsoever. Sokka, meanwhile, moves carefully through the area, eyes scanning the ground with surprising precision. He crouches near disturbed earth, studies broken branches, examines markings most people wouldn’t even notice.
“Did someone lose something?” Katara asks as she emerges from the trees, looking curiously at her friends as they thoroughly search the forest.
“No,” Aang calls distractedly while still wrestling with leaves. “We found something!”
Sokka suddenly kneels beside a rock half-hidden in the dirt. He reaches down and lifts a small arrowhead between his fingers. Aira steps closer. The metal is darkened. Burned. Sokka rubs his thumb across its surface, and ash flakes away onto the forest floor.
“It’s burned,” he murmurs.
His eyes shift toward several deep gouges carved into the bark of a nearby tree. Sword marks. Aira watches as realization slowly pieces itself together behind his eyes. “There was a battle,” Sokka says. He stands and walks toward the tree, fingers brushing over the damaged bark. “Water Tribe warriors ambushed a group of Firebenders.” His voice grows steadier the more he speaks, confidence building with every clue. “The Firebenders fought back…” He gestures toward snapped branches further downhill. “But the warriors drove them down this hill.”
Aira blinks. Honestly… it’s impressive. She’s used to Sokka acting ridiculous half the time—complaining about food, making terrible jokes, arguing with literally anyone who breathes incorrectly—but moments like this remind her there’s something sharper underneath all of that. He notices things. Patterns. Tracks. Behaviors. Things she would’ve walked right past.
Before anyone can say anything, Sokka suddenly takes off downhill. The others hurry after him. Sokka moves quickly through the rocky slope, leaping over fallen logs and large boulders with practiced ease. Aira struggles slightly to keep pace behind him, nearly slipping on loose gravel.
“Spirits,” she mutters under her breath. “Does he have to run like a mountain goat?”
The forest begins thinning as the sound of crashing waves grows louder. Soon they break through the treeline and emerge onto a narrow beach scattered with driftwood and jagged rocks. Sokka abruptly stops moving, and Aira nearly crashes into his back. He stares silently toward the shoreline, shoulders suddenly slumping.
Aang tilts his head. “Then what happened?”
Sokka’s expression tightens. “I don’t know.”
For a brief second, disappointment settles heavily over the group. The trail had been leading somewhere. Aira can practically feel how badly Sokka wants answers.
Then Katara gasps. “Wait! Look!” She points down the shoreline.
Aira follows her gaze—and freezes. Docked against the beach is a worn wooden ship with a blue sail. A Water Tribe sail.
Sokka’s eyes widen instantly. “It’s one of our boats!”
The excitement in his voice hits so suddenly and so forcefully that it startles Aira. He bolts toward the ship without hesitation. The others follow close behind. As they approach, Aira takes in the details—the curved craftsmanship, the weathered sail, the familiar blue markings matching Katara and Sokka’s clothing.
Katara reaches the boat beside her brother, breathless. “Is that Dad’s boat?”
Sokka places a hand against the side of the ship almost reverently. “No,” he says softly. “But it’s from his fleet.” His fingers trail across the wood carefully, like touching proof of something he desperately needed to believe. “Dad was here.”
Katara smiles immediately, relief and excitement lighting up her face.
Aira hangs back slightly, watching the siblings. She suddenly feels oddly nervous. She’s heard a few stories about Hakoda over the past few weeks—a warrior chief sailing across the world fighting the Fire Nation. Brave. Strong. Respected. The kind of father people stay proud of. Her chest tightens unexpectedly at the thought. She quickly pushes it away.
Katara grabs Sokka’s arm excitedly. “We’re close to him.”
Sokka nods, grinning now in a way Aira doesn’t think she’s ever seen before. Not smug or teasing or sarcastic. Just… happy. And somehow that expression changes him entirely. For a moment, Aira can suddenly picture him as a little kid standing beside his father, trying to learn how to track footprints or hold a weapon correctly. The realization makes something warm twist unexpectedly in her chest.
=====================
Later that night, the waves roll gently against the shore, their crashes blending with the crackling of the campfire. Moonlight stretches across the ocean in shimmers. The salty breeze carries the scent of seaweed and smoke through the campsite, cool against Aira’s skin.
Everyone else had long since fallen asleep. Katara is curled beneath her sleeping bag near Appa. Aang is sleeping on his side on one of Appa’s legs, Momo curled into Aang’s back. Even Appa’s heavy breathing has settled into a slow, steady rumble. But Aira can’t sleep. She sits cross-legged near the fire, absentmindedly poking at the burning wood with a stick. Sparks spiral upward into the dark sky before disappearing among the stars. Her mind feels restless. Maybe it was the ocean. Maybe it was the discovery of the Water Tribe ship earlier that day. Maybe it was the look on Sokka’s face when he realized his father had once stood on this very shore.
Across from her, Sokka walks over and sits with his elbows resting on his knees, staring into the flames. He looks different when he’s quiet. Usually he filled every silence he could find—complaining, joking, rambling, arguing with someone about something. But tonight the energy seemed to have drained out of him, leaving behind something softer and more vulnerable.
Aira studies him for a moment before speaking. “Can’t sleep either?”
Sokka nods silently, staring into the fire, the orange light reflecting off his eyes. A comfortable silence settles between them for a moment. The fire pops loudly.
Sokka’s gaze drifts toward the ocean again. “I keep thinking about that boat,” he admits quietly.
Aira’s expression softens. “Your dad’s fleet.”
“Yeah.” He swallows. “It’s weird. For years he’s just been… this idea. This person I’ve talked about so much that sometimes he almost doesn’t feel real anymore.” He stared down at his hands. “But finding that boat makes it feel different.”
The words linger heavily between them. Aira watches the fire curl around a blackened log. She understands that feeling better than she wanted to.
“You miss him a lot,” she says gently.
Sokka laughs under his breath, though there wasn’t much humor in it. “Yeah.” He rubbed the back of his neck. “I mean, I know why he left. The Fire Nation was winning the war. He had to help fight.” His voice lowered slightly. “But that doesn’t mean it wasn’t hard.”
The honesty in his tone catches Aira off guard. Sokka usually carries himself like he has everything figured out. Even when panicking, he turns it into sarcasm or stubbornness before anyone can see too much beneath it. But now there’s no performance. Just exhaustion.
“I used to think,” he continues slowly, “that if I acted strong enough, it wouldn’t bother me anymore.” He gave a weak shrug. “Like if I became ‘the man of the tribe’, then maybe I wouldn’t feel like some weak little kid waiting around for his dad to come home.”
Aira’s chest tightens slightly. Because she knows that instinct too. Pretending you’re fine long enough that maybe one day it would become true.
“But it still hurts,” she says quietly.
Sokka looked at her then. The firelight flickered across his face, softening the usual sharpness in his expression.
“Yeah,” he admitted. “It does.”
The waves crashed against the shore again. Aira drew her knees closer to her chest. “I think…” she started carefully, “missing someone never really goes away. You just get better at carrying it.”
Sokka is silent for a moment. Then he asks quietly, “Your parents?”
Aira nods once. The grief is older now. Less sharp. But it still lives inside her like an ache that flares up when she least expects it. Some days it’s overwhelming. Other days it appears in smaller ways—in memories of her father’s laugh or the scent of her mother’s favorite tea.
“My parents used to tell me that people leave pieces of themselves behind,” Aira murmurs, eyes fixed on the flames. “In the people they love. In the things they teach you. That even when they’re gone, they never really go away.” She swallows lightly. “I didn’t really understand what that meant at the time.”
“And now?”
Aira glances toward Katara and Aang sleeping nearby. “I think I do now.”
Sokka follows her gaze. For a brief moment, neither of them speak. But suddenly, he stiffens beside the fire. Aira notices it instantly. His posture changes first—shoulders tightening, jaw setting, eyes narrowing toward the darkness down the beach. The playful exhaustion from moments ago vanishes completely, replaced by sharp alertness.
Aira follows his gaze. At first she sees nothing but shifting shadows and moonlit waves. Then—a figure. Someone is walking toward them through the dark shoreline. The person moves slowly but deliberately, shoes crunching against wet sand.
Aira and Sokka immediately lock eyes. No words are needed. Both stand at the same time. Sokka grabs his boomerang from beside his sleeping bag while Aira instinctively lowers into a defensive stance, feet shifting lightly against the sand.
“Who’s there?” Sokka shouts, voice hard and commanding enough to wake the dead.
The figure pauses. Then steps closer into the glow of the campfire. Aira studies him carefully. It’s a middle-aged man with long brown hair that frames his face unevenly, strands blowing across his forehead in the wind. He wears blue Water Tribe robes, the garments hanging loosely around bandages wrapped tightly across his torso and left arm. He looks injured. But not dangerous. At least… probably not dangerous.
The man blinks toward Sokka through the firelight. “Sokka?” he asks breathlessly.
Aira frowns slightly. How does he know Sokka?
Beside her, Sokka’s eyes widen. “…Bato?”
The name hits the air like a spark. Behind them, Katara suddenly jerks awake. “Bato?” she repeats groggily before fully sitting upright. Then recognition floods her face. “Bato!” she gasps. Katara bolts across the sand barefoot before Aira can even process what’s happening. Sokka follows immediately after her, practically dropping his weapon as the two siblings crash into the older man in a fierce hug. Bato laughs warmly despite nearly stumbling backward from the force of it.
“It is so good to see you two,” he says with a smile. “Oh. You’ve grown so much”.
Aira watches the reunion quietly, something warm and strange settling in her chest as she sees the siblings light up around him. The exhaustion in Katara’s face disappears completely. Even Sokka looks younger somehow. Less guarded.
Aang introduces himself to Bato with a polite bow, but before Aira can introduce herself, both siblings bombard Bato at once.
“Where’s dad?”
“Is he with you?”
The excitement in their voices makes something ache softly inside Aira’s chest.
Bato’s smile falters just slightly. “No,” he says gently. “Hakoda and the others should be in the eastern Earth Kingdom by now.”
The shift is immediate. Katara’s shoulders droop first. Then Sokka’s expression dims, though he tries to hide it quickly by looking away toward the ocean.
“Oh,” Katara says quietly.
Aira’s stomach tightens a little at the sight. She knows that feeling too well—that painful flicker of hope right before disappointment settles back in.
The beach suddenly howls with a strong gust of wind that sweeps sand around their feet and sends everyone shivering.
Bato chuckles lightly. “This is no place for a reunion. Come on. Let’s get inside.” Without hesitation, he wraps an arm around both Katara and Sokka, guiding them down the shoreline like they’ve done this a thousand times before.
Aira and Aang linger behind for half a second. The image in front of them feels oddly intimate. Aira looks down briefly. She tries not to think about how long it’s been since someone casually wrapped an arm around her shoulders like that. Bato glances back then, seeming to realize the two airbenders aren’t following them. His expression softens immediately and gestures for them to come along.
Aang brightens instantly and hurries forward. Aira follows more quietly. The group walks along the shore before turning into a narrow forest path illuminated by lanterns hanging from trees. Crickets chirp softly in the brush while moonlight filters through the branches overhead.
Eventually the trees open into a large abbey nestled in the forest.
Aira slows slightly as they approach. The structure is beautiful in a quiet sort of way—rectangular stone buildings connected around an open courtyard, a large shrine standing at the center. Women dressed in long white robes move peacefully throughout the courtyard carrying bowls, herbs, and lanterns. The entire place feels calm. Still. Like the world outside can’t touch it.
As they enter through the gates, Bato speaks again. “Your father carried me here after I was injured in battle,” he explains, absently rubbing the bandages around his arm. “The sisters have taken care of me ever since.”
They approach an older woman standing near the shrine, her white robes flowing elegantly around her. “Superior,” he greets warmly. “These are Hakoda’s children. They’ve been traveling with the Avatar.” He rests his hands proudly on Sokka and Katara’s shoulders. “I found them near my boat.”
The woman’s eyes immediately settle on Aang with gentle awe. She bows deeply. “Young Avatar,” she says kindly, “it brings me great joy to be in your presence. Welcome to our abbey.”
Aang straightens quickly and returns the bow with a bright smile. “Thank you! It’s really an honor to be here. If there’s anything–”
“What smells so good, Bato?” Sokka interrupts suddenly, sniffing the air.
“The sisters make ointments and perfumes,” Bato answers.
“Perfume?” Sokka perks up. “Maybe we could dump some on Appa, because he stinks so much.” He points dramatically toward Appa. “Am I right?”
Silence. Complete silence. One of the sisters slowly blinks at him. Another coughs awkwardly into her sleeve. Katara and Bato simply stare at Sokka with bored expressions. And Aira physically has to press her lips together to stop herself from laughing.
“You have your father’s wit,” Bato says plainly.
=========================
The five of them make their way through the abbey halls before arriving at Bato’s room. The moment he slides the door open, Katara and Sokka freeze in the doorway.
The room is filled to the brim with Water Tribe memorabilia.
A large blue-and-white Water Tribe banner hangs proudly along one wall, its fabric worn slightly with age. Animal pelts line both the floor and the adjacent wall, thick and soft-looking beneath the warm firelight. Spears, clubs, and fishing tools rest neatly in the corner beside a carved wooden chest decorated with swirling blue designs. An urn painted with white wave patterns sits carefully near the back wall.
The entire room smells faintly of smoke, leather, saltwater, and herbs.
Home.
Even Aira can feel it.
She isn’t particularly familiar with Water Tribe customs or decor, but this is almost exactly what she imagined it would look like—simple, sturdy, practical. Nothing flashy. Everything is well-used and cared for.
Beside her, Katara practically lights up. “Bato,” she breathes, clasping her hands together as she looks around the room, “it looks like home.”
“Everything’s here,” Sokka says quietly, running his hand across one of the pelts. “Even the pelts.”
Aang glances around the room with far less enthusiasm. “Yeah,” he says slowly. “Nothing’s cozier than dead animal skins.”
Momo suddenly leaps from Aang’s arms and lands directly in front of a large bear pelt mounted along the floor—the head still attached, jaws frozen open. The lemur lets out a horrified screech. He launches himself back onto Aang’s shoulder so fast that Aang nearly falls over.
Aira snorts into her sleeve. “Momo has a point,” she says, eyeing the bear head cautiously. “That thing definitely looks haunted.”
A small fire crackles in the center of the room, heating a pot suspended above it. Warm orange light flickers across the walls while steam curls lazily toward the ceiling. Bato settles onto a cushion beside the fire and gestures for everyone else to sit.
Katara immediately lifts the pot lid. Her eyes widen. “No way,” she gasps. “Stewed sea prunes?”
“Help yourself,” Bato offers warmly.
“Dad could eat a whole barrel of these things,” Sokka says with a laugh.
The siblings eagerly fill bowls for themselves before offering some to Aang and Aira. Aira accepts hers curiously. The broth is thick and brown, steam curling warmly against her face. Small bits of prune float through the soup alongside herbs she doesn’t recognize.
She takes a careful sip. Immediately, salty and briny flavors spread across her tongue. The broth is rich and warming, the kind of food that settles deep in your stomach and makes your entire body relax. The prunes themselves are strange—slightly chewy, slightly firm. Not bad. Different. Comforting.
Across from her, Aang sniffs his bowl cautiously. His face immediately twists in horror. Aang sticks his tongue out dramatically before forcing himself to take a sip anyway. Instant regret floods his face.
Aira bites the inside of her cheek to stop herself from laughing. “You look like you’re being poisoned.”
“I think I am,” Aang whispers hoarsely.
The two airbenders settle onto one of the pelts near the fire while Katara and Sokka sit close beside Bato. Almost immediately, the siblings begin bombarding him with questions.
“Bato, is it true you and dad lassoed an arctic hippo?” Katara asks excitedly.
Bato groans dramatically. “It was your father’s idea. He dragged me into it.”
“Did it work?”
“Well… technically the hippo dragged us.”
Sokka bursts out laughing.
As the stories continue, Aira quietly watches the siblings’ faces glow in the firelight. She’s never seen them like this before. Katara usually carries herself like she has the weight of the world sitting on her shoulders. Sokka constantly acts like he has something to prove.
But here? They look younger. Lighter. Every story about Hakoda seems to pull another memory out of them. Another piece of home. Aira stares down into her soup for a moment. She tries to imagine someone telling stories about her mother or father like this. Warm stories. Funny stories. Stories that keep someone alive after they’re gone. A strange ache settles in her chest.
Aang suddenly perks up beside her. “Hey, me and Aira ride animals too!” he says brightly. “One time there was this giant eel and I—”
“So who came up with the Great Blubber Fiasco?” Sokka interrupts immediately.
Aang’s mouth snaps shut. Aira visibly winces.
Ouch.
Bato laughs loudly. “You knew about that?”
“Everyone knows about that,” Katara says proudly.
Aang frowns. “What’s the Great Blubber Fiasco?”
Aira actually leans forward a little, curious now too.
But Sokka waves dismissively. “It’s a long story, Aang,” he says without even looking at him. “Some other time.”
Aang’s shoulders slump. The excitement drains from his face so quickly that Aira’s stomach twists a little. She understands why Sokka and Katara are acting this way. They haven’t been this connected to home in years. But still… Aang looks painfully left out.
Aira gently nudges his shoulder with hers. “We’ll hear the story eventually,” she murmurs quietly. Aang gives a small shrug, though the disappointment still lingers on his face.
As the night stretches on, bowls of sea prune stew are emptied and refilled while Bato continues telling stories about Hakoda and the Southern Water Tribe warriors. Sokka hangs onto every word. Katara asks endless questions. Even Aira finds herself getting drawn into the stories despite not knowing any of the people being discussed. For a little while, the war almost feels far away. Then Bato says something that changes the entire atmosphere in the room.
“I’m expecting a message from your father any day now.”
Sokka and Katara immediately freeze.
“Really?” Katara blurts out.
“Your father said he’d send word once they reached the rendezvous point,” Bato explains. “If you wait here until the message arrives, you can come with me and see him again.”
The room goes silent.
Sokka looks completely stunned. “It’s been over two years since we’ve seen Dad,” he says, almost breathless with disbelief. “Katara!”
Katara smiles softly, eyes distant. “I do really miss him,” she admits quietly. “It would be great to see dad.”
Aira’s gaze instinctively shifts toward Aang. His smile has faded. Something uneasy curls in her stomach. Because for Katara and Sokka, this place feels like home calling them back. But for Aang? Aira glances between the siblings’ excitement and Aang’s silence. And suddenly, for the first time all evening, the room doesn’t feel quite as warm anymore.
Aang glances down at the floor. Then he quietly stands. “I think I’m gonna get some air,” he says.
Nobody seems to notice except Aira. Aang slips out of the room unnoticed. Aira hesitates. Then she carefully sets her bowl down and rises to her feet.
“I’ll be back,” she murmurs softly.
Katara barely looks up. “Okay.”
Aira leaves the room and steps into the quiet abbey courtyard. The night air feels cool against her skin after the warmth of the firelit room. Lanterns sway gently beneath the covered walkways while distant waves crash faintly against the shore below the cliffs.
She spots Aang immediately. He’s walking quickly through the courtyard toward the abbey entrance, hands shoved into his sleeves.
“Aang,” she calls softly.
He slows but doesn’t fully stop. Aira catches up beside him. For a moment neither of them speaks. The silence stretches awkwardly between them.
Finally, Aira glances at him carefully. “You wanna talk about it?”
Aang exhales through his nose. “I’m okay.”
“You don’t seem okay.”
That earns the faintest flicker of frustration across his face. “I said I’m fine.”
Aira falls quiet. The breeze shifts softly around them.
Aang immediately sighs, guilt replacing irritation. “Sorry,” he mutters. “I just…” His voice trails off.
Aira waits patiently.
Aang stares out toward the dark woods surrounding the abbey. “They miss their dad,” he says quietly. “And now they might actually get to see him again.”
Aira nods slowly. “That’s a good thing.”
“I know,” he says quickly. “I know it’s a good thing.”
But his expression twists anyway. “They should be happy.”
Something heavy settles in Aira’s chest because she finally understands. If Sokka and Katara leave to reunite with their father… That leaves Aang alone again. The thought clearly terrifies him.
Aira looks down briefly. Because if they leave… Then she loses them too. The realization hits her harder than she expects. Not long ago, she spent years convincing herself she didn’t need anyone. Traveling alone had become normal. Easier, even. No attachments meant nothing could be taken away from her. But somewhere along the way, these people stopped feeling temporary.
Katara’s warmth.
Aang’s optimism.
Sokka’s loud mouth and stubborn heart.
They’ve quietly woven themselves into her life so naturally that the idea of the group splitting apart suddenly feels… wrong, painful even.
Aang kicks lightly at the dirt beneath his feet. “We’re a family now” he says softly. “I don’t wanna lose them already.”
Aira’s chest tightens painfully at the word family. Because he means it. And spirits help her, but part of her does too. She wants to comfort him. Tell him everything will work out somehow. But she doesn’t know if that’s true.
So instead she says quietly, “You won’t lose them.”
Aang looks at her. “But what if I do?”
The vulnerability in his voice catches her off guard. For a second he sounds younger than twelve. Just a kid. A lonely kid carrying the weight of the entire world. Aira opens her mouth, searching for the right words. But before she can speak, Aang shakes his head slightly.
“I just…” He exhales heavily. “I kinda want to be alone for a little bit.”
Aira pauses. Then nods. “Okay.”
Aang offers her a small, apologetic smile before turning and walking farther into the courtyard. Aira watches him go until he disappears around the stone corridor. The silence afterward feels strangely heavy. For a moment, she considers going back to Bato’s room. But she can still hear Sokka and Katara laughing faintly from inside. And suddenly she doesn’t think she can handle hearing that right now.
So instead, Aira quietly slips out of the abbey. The woods surrounding the cliffs are calm at night. Moonlight filters softly through the trees while the distant ocean hums below. Crickets chirp steadily beneath the rustling leaves overhead.
Aira walks aimlessly until she finds a small clearing tucked between the roots of an enormous tree. She lowers herself onto the grass slowly, crossing her legs. Meditation usually helps. Usually.
She closes her eyes and inhales deeply through her nose. The cool night air fills her lungs.
In.
Out.
In.
Out.
She listens to the wind moving through the branches. Feels the earth beneath her. Her mother once told her that the world speaks most clearly when the mind is quiet enough to hear it. But tonight, Aira’s mind refuses to be quiet. Instead, thoughts keep circling endlessly. What if Sokka and Katara leave? What happens to the group then? Would Aang keep traveling alone? Would she?
Her stomach twists. The thought of returning to that endless loneliness again suddenly feels unbearable. And that realization scares her more than she wants to admit. Because attachment leads to loss. She learned that years ago. Her father. Her mother. Her home. Everything. Aira presses her hands against her knees harder. So why does she keep letting herself care anyway?
A breeze stirs around her, lifting strands of hair from her face. Her thoughts drift unwillingly toward Sokka. Toward the way he lights up when talking about his father. Toward Katara’s smile tonight. Toward the warmth of sitting around that fire listening to stories together. Something inside her aches softly. Because she wants that too. She wants a family. She wants people who choose to stay.
Aira slowly opens her eyes and stares up through the trees at the stars overhead. For years, survival was enough. Now? Now she isn’t so sure anymore.
=====================
Eventually, Aira finishes her meditation and decides to head back to the abbey. The walk back is quiet. The forest hums with the sounds of insects and rustling leaves, and for a little while she lets herself focus on that instead of the knot of worry sitting in her chest.
She slips through the abbey entrance and makes her way toward Bato's room. Voices spill out into the hallway before she even reaches the doorway. Sokka is laughing. Katara is talking over him. Bato's deeper voice rumbles between them.
Aira pauses for a moment. The sound should make her feel relieved. Instead, it makes her chest ache. They're so happy. And if the message arrives… They'll leave. The thought comes uninvited. She immediately pushes it away.
Don't be ridiculous.
Of course they would want to see their father. She would too. Still, the idea leaves a hollow feeling in her stomach.
Aira quietly enters the room. The others are gathered around the fire exactly where she left them. Sokka is enthusiastically reenacting some story with exaggerated arm movements. Katara is laughing so hard she nearly spills her bowl. Neither of them notices Aira sit down against the wall. Bato does, offering her a small smile before turning back to the story. Aira smiles back. Then she glances toward the doorway. No sign of Aang. Her stomach twists.
I hope he's okay.
She knows he told her he wanted to be alone. Still. She can't help worrying. Aang always carries so much more than he lets people see.
The room grows warmer as time passes. More stories are exchanged. More sea prunes disappear from the pot. Then finally—
"Hey, everyone."
Aira immediately looks up. Aang strolls through the doorway with both hands behind his head. His smile is a little too wide.
"Sorry I was gone so long."
Katara glances over. "Oh, hey, Aang." She smiles warmly. "I didn't even notice you left."
Aira watches Aang's face. The smile twitches. Only for a second. Then it's back.
"Yep! But now I'm back." He walks into the room. "Sure could go for some of those delicious sea prunes."
Aira raises an eyebrow. Aang hated the sea prunes. He'd made that very clear earlier. Yet now he practically lunges for the pot. He scoops himself an overflowing bowl and shoves a spoonful into his mouth. The moment he starts chewing, his face scrunches. His eyes water. Aira has to bite the inside of her cheek to keep from laughing. Aang forces himself to swallow.
"Mmmm." His voice cracks. "So good." Another spoonful. Another grimace. Another forced swallow. "Delicious."
Katara slowly lowers her bowl. Bato exchanges a glance with Sokka. The room falls awkwardly silent. Aira watches Aang struggle through a third spoonful before finally speaking.
"Aang."
"Mhm?"
"You know you don't actually have to eat those."
He freezes. Sea prune halfway to his mouth. For a moment he looks caught. Then he quickly shoves it into his mouth anyway.
"Mmph." He swallows. “I like them now.”
Aira stares. Aang stares back. Neither says anything. Finally she sighs. "You're a terrible liar."
That earns a few chuckles from around the room. Aang groans and sinks lower into his seat. The tension eases slightly. But Aira still notices the way his smile doesn't quite reach his eyes. And when everyone else resumes talking, she catches him staring into the fire. Quiet. Distant. Like part of him is somewhere else entirely.
=========================
The following morning arrives peacefully. Golden sunlight spills across the abbey courtyard, painting the stone paths in warm shades of amber. Birds chirp from nearby trees, and a gentle breeze carries the scent of flowers and incense through the air. Appa lounges near the edge of the courtyard, lazily chewing his breakfast.
Aang stands nearby with his hands on his hips. "Aira!"
She looks up from where she's helping gather supplies.
"I've got today's lesson."
Aira immediately brightens.
"Come on." He leads her toward a massive pile of hay stacked beside one of the storage buildings. Appa lifts his head. His tail swishes hopefully. Aang gestures dramatically.
"Your mission is simple." He points toward the hay. Then toward Appa. "Move hay."
Aira nods. "Move hay."
"Exactly."
Aang demonstrates the movement. His feet spread apart. His knees bend slightly. His arms sweep outward in a fluid circle. The air responds instantly. A small bundle of hay lifts effortlessly from the pile. With another graceful motion, Aang guides it through the air and deposits it neatly in front of Appa. The sky bison happily begins eating.
Aang beams. "See?" Then steps aside. "Your turn."
Aira takes position. She carefully mirrors his stance. Feet apart. Knees bent. Shoulders relaxed.
The praise sends a small spark of pride through her chest. Not long ago she could barely produce a gust of wind intentionally. Now she's actually learning. Slowly. Messily. But learning.
She takes a deep breath. Focuses. Moves. Air gathers beneath part of the hay pile. The bundle lifts. For a glorious second, everything works perfectly. Aira grins. Then the hay sails directly onto Appa's head.
Thump.
Silence. Appa blinks. A massive mound of hay completely engulfs his face.
Aira's smile immediately vanishes. "Oh no."
Appa lets out a deeply offended grunt. Then violently shakes himself. Hay explodes everywhere. The courtyard becomes a blizzard of straw. Aira throws her hands over her face. When the dust settles, hay hangs from her hair. From Aang's robes. From Appa's horns.
Aira groans. "I was so close."
Aang doubles over laughing. "You really were!"
"That's not helping."
Eventually he catches his breath. "Seriously though." His voice softens. "Your form was almost perfect."
Aira glances up. "Really?"
"Really." Aang smiles. "The hay landed on Appa instead of flying backwards."
She gives him a flat look. "Thank you for that incredibly high standard."
"You're welcome."
He grins. Then effortlessly airbends the remaining hay off Appa. The sky bison snorts in approval. Moments later another small pile lands neatly in front of him. Appa immediately begins munching. As Aang lowers his hands, something slips from his sleeve. A crumpled piece of paper flutters to the ground.
Before either of them can react, the Superior picks it up. "Aha." Her eyes narrow. "I caught you."
Aang freezes. Instantly. Every trace of amusement disappears from his face.
"You should be ashamed of yourself."
Aira blinks. Aang looks like he's about to be sentenced to life imprisonment.
The Superior holds up the paper. "Littering in the courtyard."
Relief washes over his face. "Oh."
She hands it back.
Aang accepts it quickly. "I-I'm sorry. I'll take care of it."
The Superior gives a dignified nod before walking away. Aira watches him. Interesting. Very interesting. Aang immediately crumples the paper tighter and stuffs it into his robes. Too quickly. Way too quickly.
"What is that?"
"Nothing." His answer comes so fast it nearly overlaps her question.
Aira pauses.
Aang crosses his arms. "It's nothing." Another pause. "Why would it be something?"
Aira stares. Aang stares back. The silence stretches. Finally she blinks. "Uhhh..." She points at him. "You know that makes it sound more like something."
Aang laughs nervously. "Nope."
"Definitely something."
"Nope."
"Suspicious."
"Not suspicious." Aang immediately turns and begins walking away.
Aira watches him go. "...that's the most suspicious thing you've ever done."
Right then, Bato approaches with Katara and Sokka. The siblings look unusually excited. Bato smiles.
"I'm heading down to the beach to inspect the Water Tribe ship."
Sokka practically bounces. "Come on! You have to see this thing."
Katara nods eagerly. "You too, Aira."
Aira glances once more at Aang. He's already halfway across the courtyard, one hand pressed protectively against whatever is hidden inside his robes.
Definitely something.
But whatever it is, she decides she'll let him tell her when he's ready. So she turns and follows the others toward the shore.
===========================
The group of five eventually make their way down to the shoreline. The morning air is crisp, carrying the scent of saltwater and seaweed. Gentle waves lap against the sand while gulls circle overhead. The Water Tribe ship sits where it has been left, weathered by wind and spray but still sturdy. Bato approaches the vessel with a look that immediately softens his features. He reaches out and runs his hand along the wooden railing.
"This ship is sentimental to me," Bato says quietly. "It was built by my father." His fingers linger against the wood.
Aira watches him thoughtfully. She understands that feeling. Not about ships specifically—but about objects carrying pieces of people who are gone. For years, the only thing she had left of her old life had been memories and the wooden carved bracelet given to her by Mei Lee, her mom’s best friend. The thought makes her chest ache.
Nearby, Katara gently trails her fingertips along the railing while Sokka inspects the ship's construction more closely. His eyes dart over every detail with genuine fascination. Aira smiles to herself. For all his complaints and sarcasm, Sokka really loves learning about things.
Suddenly, she feels a tiny gust of wind behind her. Aira turns. Aang is standing a few paces away with his hands clasped behind his back. Whistling. Poorly. His eyes are fixed on absolutely nothing. He looks like someone trying incredibly hard to appear casual. Aira slowly raises an eyebrow. Aang immediately looks away. Definitely suspicious. She narrows her eyes at him. Aang whistles louder.
Before she can question him, Sokka speaks. "Is this the boat he took you ice dodging in?"
Bato's face lights up. "Yep, and it’s got the scar to prove it,” Bato chuckles. Then he turns toward Sokka. "What about you? You must have some good stories from your first ice dodging trip."
The atmosphere changes immediately. Aira notices it before anyone says a word. Sokka's smile fades. Katara's shoulders droop. Even the sound of the waves seems quieter. Bato's own expression falters as he realizes his mistake.
"He never got to go," Katara says softly. The words hang heavily in the air. "Dad left before he was old enough."
Aira glances at Sokka. He's staring at the sand now. Not meeting anyone's eyes. Trying very hard to look unaffected. But she notices the way his jaw tightens. The way his gaze remains fixed on the ground. As though if he looks anywhere else, everyone might see how much it hurts.
Bato's face immediately fills with regret. "Oh." He lowers his hand. “Oh I forgot, you were too young,”
Sokka shrugs. It's an attempt at nonchalance. Not a very convincing one. "It's fine." It clearly isn't.
Aira feels a tug in her chest. Last night around the campfire, Sokka had finally admitted how much he missed his father. How much he wanted to see him. Now she understands a little better. It isn't just missing Hakoda. It's all the moments he missed too. All the lessons. All the traditions. All the memories that were supposed to happen.
Aang steps closer. "What's ice dodging?" he asks.
The question pulls everyone's attention away from the uncomfortable silence. Aira finds herself curious too. She's spent the last day learning bits and pieces about Water Tribe culture, and every new detail fascinates her.
Bato's smile slowly returns. "It's a rite of passage for young Water Tribe members. When you turn 14, your dad takes you–”
Bato turns toward Sokka again. For a moment he simply studies him. The disappointment. The longing. The years that have passed. Then his expression brightens.
"You know what?"
Sokka looks up.
Bato places a hand firmly on his shoulder. "You're about to find out."
For a second, Sokka just stares. "Wait."
A grin begins spreading across Bato's face. The grin spreads to Sokka's face too. Slowly at first. Then all at once.
"Seriously?"
"Seriously."
Sokka looks as though someone has just handed him the moon. His eyes practically glow. Aira can't help smiling. The excitement radiating off him is contagious.
"Come on," Bato says. "Let's get this ship ready."
Sokka immediately rushes toward the deck. "Did you hear that? I'm going ice dodging!"
Aira laughs as Sokka scrambles aboard the ship with the enthusiasm of a child. Her heart swells at his excitement, noticing the sadness leave his eyes, replaced by something brighter. Something more youthful.
==========================
The group sails the boat into the water and slightly away from the shore as Bato explains the task at hand. The salty breeze fills the sail above them, causing the vessel to rock gently beneath their feet.
Aira grips the side of the boat a little tighter than necessary. She doesn't particularly enjoy boats. Flying? Wonderful. Walking? Familiar. Boats? Boats have an unfortunate tendency to sink.
“Ice dodging is a ceremonial test of wisdom, bravery, and trust,” Bato explains. His voice carries easily over the wind. “Back home, it was done by weaving a boat through a field of icebergs.”
“How are we supposed to ice dodge without ice?” Sokka asks.
Bato points toward the horizon. “By dodging those.”
Everyone follows his finger. Dozens of jagged stone pillars jut out from the ocean ahead of them. Some are small. Some are enormous. Sharp rocks rise from the water like the teeth of some gigantic sea monster waiting to swallow them whole.
Aira's stomach drops. We are absolutely going to crash. The more she stares at them, the worse they look. Some lean at odd angles. Others are hidden partially beneath the waves. Narrow channels twist between them in seemingly impossible directions. One wrong turn and—Yep. Definitely crashing. She subtly scoots closer to the center of the boat. Just in case.
“Sokka,” Bato says, “you steer and call the shots. Lead wisely.”
Sokka immediately straightens. His posture changes almost instantly. Aira notices this every time someone gives him responsibility. The joking, sarcastic teenager disappears and something else emerges—someone more focused. More deliberate.
Bato nods approvingly before turning toward Katara. “Katara, you'll secure the mainsail. The winds can be brutal, so be brave.”
Then Bato turns to Aang. “Aang, you control the jib. Without your steady hand, we all go down. Your position is about trust.”
The word trust hangs in the air. Aang immediately stiffens. Aira notices it at once. His shoulders tighten. His smile falters. For the briefest moment, something uncomfortable flashes across his face. Then it's gone.
“I know that,” Aang says quickly. Too quickly. “Why wouldn't I know that? I'm the Avatar. I know about trust.” He crosses his arms defensively.
Aira blinks. ...Okay. That was weird. Again. Lately, everything Aang says seems to have some strange nervous energy attached to it. Ever since Bato told Katara and Sokka about the message from their father, Aang has seemed off balance. Distracted. Like he's carrying around a secret.
Aira leans slightly toward him. “You know, most people who understand trust don't usually announce it like that.”
Aang immediately points at her. “See? That's exactly something a person who doesn't trust me would say.”
Aira stares. “What?”
“Nothing.”
Aira's eyes narrow slightly. Something is definitely up. The question is whether it's worth pushing.
Bato's gaze settles on Aira. "And you, Aira."
Aira straightens slightly. "Yes?"
Bato points toward the bow of the boat. "You're the lookout."
She blinks. "The lookout?"
"From the front of the ship you'll spot hazards before anyone else. Hidden rocks. Sharp turns. Dangerous currents."
Aira glances toward the jagged stone pillars jutting from the sea. There seem to be an awful lot of hazards. Wonderful.
Bato smiles. "A lookout must trust what they see. If you hesitate, the crew hesitates. If you stay silent, the ship suffers for it."
Aira shifts awkwardly. That sounds like a lot of responsibility.
Bato seems to notice her uncertainty. "You strike me as someone who spends a great deal of time observing."
Aira's eyebrows lift. "Is that a polite way of saying I don't talk much?"
A small chuckle escapes Bato. "Maybe. A lookout's role is about confidence. Seeing something and speaking up. Not doubting yourself."
For a moment, Aira falls quiet. That hits a little too close to home. How many times had she stayed silent? How many times had she avoided drawing attention to herself? How many times had she seen danger coming and simply slipped away instead of facing it?
Bato nods toward the bow. "Trust your instincts. Trust your eyes. The crew will be relying on you."
Aira looks toward the front of the ship. The ocean stretches endlessly ahead. Wind dances through her hair. A small knot forms in her stomach.
"I'll do my best."
Bato walks away and sits facing the group of teenagers. “For this to be done right, I cannot help. You pass or fail on your own.”
Aira gulps and carefully makes her way toward the bow of the boat. The farther she moves from the others, the more exposed she feels. From here, she has a clear view of the dangerous waters ahead.
Unfortunately, that means she also has a clear view of just how many ways this could go horribly wrong. Jagged stone pillars rise from the ocean in every direction. Some are tall and narrow like spears. Others are broad and uneven, their dark surfaces slick with seawater. Waves crash against them constantly, sending white spray into the air.
Aira's stomach twists. Spirits. Who looked at this and thought, Let's sail directly through it?
The boat rocks beneath her feet as another gust catches the sail. Her pulse pounds loudly in her ears. For a brief moment, she considers suggesting they turn around. Then she glances back toward Sokka. He's already focused on the course ahead, eyes constantly scanning the rocks and the water. Every trace of his usual sarcasm has disappeared. He's completely locked in.
And suddenly Aira remembers how excited he'd been when Bato first mentioned the ceremony. How much this means to him. The nervousness in her stomach doesn't disappear. But she straightens her shoulders anyway.
I can do this.
I won't let them down.
I won't let him down.
The wind whips her hair behind her as the boat cuts through the water. The first cluster of rocks approaches rapidly.
Immediately, Sokka springs into action. "Aang, ease up on the jib!"
"Got it!"
"Katara, steady!"
Katara nods and adjusts her grip.
Then Sokka looks toward the bow. "Aira, how are we looking?"
Aira quickly surveys the water ahead. Her eyes dart from rock to rock. "Two rocks dead ahead!"
"Got it!"
Sokka points immediately. "Aang, less sail! Katara, give him room!"
Aang pulls on the rope as instructed, his movements quick but slightly tense. The sail shifts overhead with a loud snap. Sokka plants both feet and throws his weight against the steering oar. The boat turns sharply.
Aira nearly loses her footing. "Whoa!" She catches herself against the railing just before falling.
The vessel glides past the rocks with only a few feet to spare. Close enough that Aira can see tiny barnacles clinging to the stone. Way too close. The boat clears the obstacle. Everyone exhales.
Then Aira looks up again. "Oh no."
"What?" Katara asks.
Aira points. Three massive stone pillars loom ahead. Much larger than the previous ones. And they're approaching fast.
Sokka opens his mouth. Pauses. Then realizes he has no time to explain. Sokka grunts and yanks the steering oar with all his strength. The boat swings hard to port. Everyone leans with the motion. The rocks rush past on either side.
For one terrifying second, Aira is absolutely convinced they're going to collide.
Then—They slip through. The stone pillars disappear behind them. The boat emerges safely into open water. For a moment there's stunned silence.
Then Sokka pumps his fist into the air. "Great job!"
A huge grin spreads across his face. The pride there is impossible to miss. Aira finds herself smiling too. Maybe this isn't so bad—Then she turns around. The smile immediately disappears.
"Oh, you've got to be kidding me."
Ahead of them stretches an almost solid wall of stone. A maze of jagged rock formations rises directly from the water, leaving almost no visible path through.
Aira points forward. "Uhh, guys?"
Their eyes follow her finger. Katara immediately pales. "There's no way through!”
Bato folds his arms. The concern on his face is unmistakable. Even he looks uncertain. But Sokka doesn't. Instead, his eyes narrow. Thinking. Calculating. Aira watches him carefully. It's almost fascinating. He isn't panicking. He isn't hesitating. He's searching for a solution. Then suddenly his expression brightens.
"We can make it."
Aira glances back toward the wall of stone. Then back to Sokka. Then back to the wall. Then back to Sokka.
"...Can we?"
"Absolutely."
His confidence is either inspiring or deeply concerning. Aira hasn't decided which.
Then Sokka turns toward Katara. "Katara, I want as much water as you can get between us and those rocks. Now!"
Everyone moves at once. Aira plants her feet firmly against the deck. Aang raises his arms. She mirrors him. Not as smoothly as Aang. But better than before. She can feel it responding. Flowing around her arms. Aang sweeps his hands forward. Aira follows. Powerful gusts surge into the sail. The canvas snaps loudly. The boat lurches forward.
Beside them, Katara bends a massive wave beneath the vessel. Water rises from the ocean. The wave swells higher, lifting the boat with it.
Aira's eyes widen. "We're actually doing this."
The boat begins climbing. Up the wave. Toward the wall of stone. Every instinct in Aira screams that this is a terrible idea.
Then suddenly the entire boat rises above the rocks. Aira gasps. The ocean stretches endlessly around them. The wind roars in her ears. Below, the jagged rocks pass harmlessly beneath the hull.
The boat clears the wall. Katara lowers the wave. The vessel splashes safely back into the water. For several seconds, nobody speaks.
Then Aira slowly turns toward Sokka. "...That was completely insane."
Sokka beams. "It worked, didn't it?"
Aang laughs. Katara shakes her head. Bato simply smiles.
And though she'd never admit it out loud, Aira feels a small burst of self-pride. Not just because they succeeded. But because when Sokka needed her, she was there. And together, they made it through.
=========================
The group slowly makes their way back to the shore.
Aira's legs wobble slightly as she steps off the boat and onto solid ground. After spending the last hour weaving through jagged rocks and bouncing across rough waves, the earth beneath her feet feels strangely still.
Together, the four teens line up side-by-side on the beach. The afternoon sun reflects off the ocean behind them. Waves roll gently onto the shore, far calmer than they had been during the ceremony.
Bato stands before them holding a small wooden bowl filled with blue paint. For a moment his expression becomes solemn. Ceremonial. Proud.
"The spirits of the Water bear witness to these marks," he says.
Sokka immediately straightens. Katara mirrors him. Even Aira finds herself standing a little taller.
Bato dips two fingers into the paint. "For Sokka, the mark of the wise." He carefully paints a small arch with a dot beneath it onto Sokka's forehead. "The same mark your father earned."
For a second, Sokka simply freezes. Then a grin slowly spreads across his face. Not his usual cocky grin. Something softer. Younger. Prouder.
"For Katara," Bato continues before Sokka can keep talking, "the mark of the brave." He paints a crescent moon onto Katara's forehead. "Your courage inspires us."
Katara smiles shyly. The praise clearly means a lot to her. Aira thinks it's fitting. Katara is brave. Not because she isn't afraid. Because she keeps moving forward anyway.
Bato turns toward her next. Aira feels her stomach tighten. "Uh..." She glances around. "You know I'm not actually from the Water Tribe, right?"
Bato chuckles. "I'm aware." Bato smiles warmly. "For Aira..." He studies her thoughtfully. Then dips his fingers back into the paint. "The mark of the watchful." He gently paints a small eye surrounded by curved lines resembling flowing wind. "Your keen eye protects your fellow warriors from danger."
Aira unconsciously touches the symbol. Warm paint smears against her fingertips. Watchful. The word settles somewhere deep inside her. For years she'd survived by watching. Watching patrol routes. Watching crowds. Watching for danger. Watching for signs she needed to run. She never thought of it as something admirable. Only necessary. Yet somehow Bato makes it sound like a strength. She finds herself smiling.
Then he turns to Aang. "And for Aang..." "The mark of the trusted." He paints a small arch onto Aang's forehead.
Aang doesn't smile. Doesn't react at all. At first Aira assumes he's still upset from earlier. But then she notices his hands. They're trembling. Something twists in her stomach. His expression grows distant. Painful. Like he's looking at something nobody else can see.
Bato steps back. "You are both now honorary members of the Water Tribe."
Aira smiles. Her eyes meet Katara's. Then Sokka's. Both of them are grinning at her. And for a moment she feels warm. Accepted. Wanted. Part of something. Part of them. But the feeling vanishes almost immediately.
Because Aang suddenly takes a step backward. "I can't."
Everyone freezes.
"What?" Katara asks.
Aang wipes the painted symbol from his forehead. "No." His voice sounds small. "You can't trust me."
Aira's heart sinks. The realization hits almost instantly. The way he'd been acting. The forced smiles. The strange tension. Aang reaches into his robes. Slowly. Carefully. He pulls out a crumpled piece of paper. And hands it to Katara. "I should've given this to Bato yesterday."
Silence. Katara unfolds it. Her eyes widen. Sokka grabs it. Reads it. Then reads it again.
Aira watches his face change. Confusion. Recognition. Disbelief. Then anger. Raw and immediate.
"This is the map to our father! You had it the whole time?"
Aira flinches. She's never heard his voice sound like that. Not toward Aang.
Sokka snaps. "You had it the whole time?"
Aira feels herself shrinking. Because she understands both of them. She understands Aang's fear. And she understands Sokka's hurt. Which somehow makes everything worse.
Sokka shakes his head. Disgusted. Frustrated. Heartbroken. "You can go to the North Pole on your own." His voice cracks slightly. "I'm going to find Dad."
Bato immediately steps forward. "Sokka—"
"No." Sokka turns toward Katara. "Katara. Are you with me?"
Katara freezes. Aira can practically see the battle happening behind her eyes. She looks at Aang. Then at Sokka. Then back at Aang. Aang looks terrified. The most terrified Aira has ever seen him.
Finally Katara closes her eyes. Her voice breaks. "I'm with you, Sokka."
Aang's face crumples. And Aira feels her own stomach drop.
Then Sokka looks at her. "Aira?"
The question lands like a stone. Everything goes silent. This is it. The choice. The one she's been afraid of ever since hearing about Hakoda. The one she hoped she'd never have to make. Her eyes drift toward Sokka. She remembers sitting around the campfire with him. Talking about his father. Listening to him admit how much he missed him. She remembers laughing over stale bread. Arguing over bean curd puffs. His stupid jokes. His determination. His stubbornness.
Then she looks at Katara. Tea shops. Shared secrets. Late-night conversations. The easy comfort of having another girl around.
Then she looks at Aang. Her fellow airbender. Her teacher. Her brother in everything except blood. The last living connection she has to the people she lost.
He looks so small standing there. So alone. And suddenly she knows. Not because she wants to choose. Because she can't leave him. Not now. Not like this.
Aira swallows hard. "I'm sorry."
Sokka's expression falls. Only slightly. But she sees it. And it hurts. Then Sokka nods. Once. Short. Stiff. "Yeah." His voice is flat. "I get it."
Katara looks between them sadly. Bato gives both airbenders a sympathetic look. Then the three of them turn and begin walking. Aira watches until they disappear into the trees. The beach suddenly feels much emptier.
Beside her, Aang sniffs quietly. Trying—and failing—not to cry. "You don't have to stay with me." His voice cracks. "They're your family."
Aira turns toward him. "They are."
Aang stares at the sand. "I don't expect you to give that up because you feel bad for me."
Aira steps closer and places a hand on his shoulder. "They're my family." She smiles softly. "But so are you."
Finally Aang looks up. His eyes are red.
"We're the last two airbenders," she says quietly. "We need to stick together."
Aang's lip trembles. "But how can you trust me after what I did?"
Aira thinks for a moment. Then shrugs. "You made a mistake."
Aang looks unconvinced.
"Aang, you're twelve."
"I'm actually one hundred and twelve."
"You know what I mean."
A weak laugh escapes him. Good. That's better.
“You may be the Avatar, but you’re still human. And humans make mistakes. It’s how we learn and grow into better versions of ourselves.”
Then suddenly he steps forward and wraps his arms around her. Aira hugs him back immediately. Holding him tightly. The way she'd wanted someone to hold her after she'd lost everything.
He buries his face into her shoulder and cries. Aira closes her eyes. Her own chest aching. For him. For Katara. For Sokka. For all of them. She doesn't know when they'll see each other again. A week. A month. Maybe longer. Maybe never. But as she looks out toward the empty path where the Water Tribe siblings disappeared, she holds onto a single thought.
At least they have each other.
===============================
After Aang finally calms down, the two airbenders decide to return to the abbey and gather their things. There isn't much else they can do. The journey to the North Pole still waits for them. Even if it suddenly feels a lot lonelier.
The walk back through the forest is quiet. Not the comfortable kind of quiet Aira usually enjoys. This one feels heavy. Every footstep crunching against fallen leaves seems louder than normal. Neither of them knows what to say.
Aira keeps her eyes on the path ahead. Truthfully, she hurts. More than she wants to admit. She understands why Sokka and Katara left. She really does. Hakoda is their father. Their family. They've spent years wondering where he is, worrying about him, missing him. If someone told Aira her parents were still alive somewhere, she would cross the world to find them too.
So she understands. But that doesn't stop it from hurting. Her chest tightens. Because she is their family too. At least she thought she was. The thought makes her immediately feel guilty. That's not fair. Of course they chose their father. But still… She misses them already. The realization stings.
Aira shoves her hands into her sleeves and exhales slowly. This is what happens. Every time. Every single time. People leave. Sometimes death takes them. Like her parents. Sometimes betrayal takes them. Like Jet. Sometimes life simply pulls them in a different direction. But the result is always the same. One day they're there. The next day they're gone.
The forest seems quieter because of it. She glances sideways at Aang. He isn't crying anymore. But he still looks small somehow. Smaller than usual. His shoulders are slumped. His eyes remain fixed on the ground. Every now and then his jaw clenches. He's angry. Not at Katara. Not at Sokka. But at himself.
Aira recognizes the feeling immediately. The endless replaying of mistakes. The constant if only. If only I had done this. If only I had said that. If only I had been better. She knows that cycle. Knows how dangerous it can become.
"You okay?" she finally asks softly.
Aang lets out a humorless laugh. "No."
Fair enough. Aira nods. "Yeah." Silence settles between them again.
After a few moments Aang speaks. "I ruined everything."
"No you didn't."
"I did."
Aira sighs. "You can't undo what happened."
"That doesn't make it better."
"No." She looks ahead. "It doesn't."
For a while neither speaks. Eventually the abbey comes into view through the trees. The white stone walls somehow seem less welcoming than before. The place feels emptier now. They retrieve their belongings and load them onto Appa's saddle in near silence.
Aira rolls up her sleeping bag. Aang secures his glider staff. Nobody jokes. Nobody talks. Even Appa seems quieter. When everything is packed, they climb aboard. Appa rises to his feet with a grunt and begins lumbering down the trail leading away from the abbey.
Aira glances back one final time. Something catches her eye. Further down the path. Three figures. Her breath catches. Sokka. Katara. Bato. They're walking away. Heading toward Hakoda. Heading toward the reunion they've dreamed about for years. The sight hits harder than she expects.
For a brief moment she imagines calling out to them. Running after them. Giving Katara one last hug. Telling Sokka—Telling Sokka what? She doesn't know. So she remains silent. Watching them disappear further down the trail. Away from her. Away from Aang. Away from the family they'd built together.
"I'm an idiot." The words come out barely above a whisper.
Aira looks at him.
Aang grips Appa's reins tighter. "I had one job." His voice cracks. "One job."
"Aang—"
"I was selfish." He laughs bitterly. "I didn't want them to leave."
Neither did I. The thought appears before she can stop it. Aira swallows.
"We all do selfish things sometimes."
Aang shakes his head. "This was different." He turns Appa toward the beach. Toward the Northern Water Tribe. Toward a future that suddenly feels uncertain.
"I was scared."
Aira doesn't respond. Because she understands. Fear makes people do strange things. Fear had dictated most of her life.
Suddenly hurried footsteps approach. Both airbenders turn. Superior is practically rushing down the path toward them. Her robes billow around her legs.
"Avatar! You must leave immediately!"
Aang groans. "Okay, I get it." He tugs Appa's reins. "Everybody wants me gone."
Superior blinks. Then continues. "A group of people came to the abbey looking for you."
Aang freezes. The frustration immediately vanishes. "What?"
"A fierce-looking woman with a horrible monster. And a young man with a scar."
Aang's eyes widen. "Zuko."
Aira immediately straightens. The name sends a chill through her. Suddenly she isn't thinking about Katara and Sokka anymore. She's thinking about Fire Nation ships. Soldiers. Running. Hiding.
Superior nods. "The beast was using the scent of a necklace to follow you,"
Aang frowns. "A necklace?" Then realization slams into him. His eyes widen in horror. "Katara!"
Aira feels her blood run cold. The necklace. The one Katara lost. The one Zuko had found.
"Oh no."
Aang immediately jerks Appa's reins. "Aira, we have to go."
She doesn't need convincing. Katara and Sokka might be angry. They might be hurt. They might not want to see either of them right now. But none of that matters. Not if Zuko finds them first.
"Then what are we waiting for?"
And the two airbenders race down the trail after their family.
==========================
Meanwhile, Sokka and Katara walk alongside Bato, following the map toward their father's rendezvous point. The forest is quiet around them. Too quiet. Only the crunch of leaves beneath their boots and the occasional rustle of branches disturb the silence.
Sokka keeps his eyes fixed on the path ahead. He should be excited. He is excited. Isn't he? For years he'd imagined this moment. Countless nights spent staring at the ceiling of his tent, wondering where his father was. Wondering if he was safe. Wondering if he ever thought about home. Now he finally has a chance to see him again. So why does his stomach feel twisted into knots?
Beside him, Katara seems unusually quiet too. Every now and then she glances at the map before looking away again. Neither sibling says what they're thinking. They don't need to. The absence walking beside them is loud enough.
Aang.
Aira.
The image of the two airbenders standing on the beach keeps replaying in Sokka's head. Aang looked devastated. That part made sense. The kid practically blamed himself for everything. But Aira…
Sokka frowns. He remembers the way she'd stood there between them all. Caught in the middle. The way she'd looked from him to Aang and back again. Like no matter what choice she made, she was going to lose something. And then she'd chosen Aang. Not because she was angry. Not because she didn't care. Because Aang needed her.
The realization makes Sokka's chest tighten. He kicks a pebble off the trail.
Maybe I shouldn't have left like that.
The thought comes uninvited.
Maybe I should've listened.
Maybe I should've cooled off first.
But every time he remembers the map crumpled in Aang's hands, the anger resurfaces. Aang lied. He hid something important. Something that belonged to Katara and him. And yet… The anger doesn't feel as sharp anymore. Just heavy.
Suddenly, a distant howl echoes through the trees. The sound carries through the forest, mournful and lonely.
Katara glances toward the woods. "That wolf sounds so sad."
Bato shakes his head. "No." The older warrior listens carefully. "It's been separated from its pack." Bato's expression softens. “I understand that pain. It’s how I felt when the Water Tribe warriors had to leave me behind,” Bato says. “They were my family, and being apart from them was more painful than my wounds.” His hand unconsciously brushes the bandages beneath his robes.
Silence settles over the trail. Sokka lowers his gaze. Family. The word hits harder than expected. Immediately he's back on the docks of the Southern Water Tribe watching his father's fleet disappear into the distance. Watching the ships become smaller and smaller until they vanished beyond the horizon. He remembers trying to stand tall. Trying not to cry. Trying to be strong because that's what warriors did. But mostly he remembers feeling alone. His chest tightens.
Then another memory surfaces. Aang hanging upside down from Appa's horn. Laughing so hard he nearly falls off. Or Aira attempting to meditate beside Appa only for Momo to land directly on her head. Or Aira laughing so hard at one of Sokka's jokes that she accidentally snorts water through her nose.
The memory nearly makes him smile. Nearly. Then he remembers the beach. Aang standing there looking terrified. Aira trying not to cry. The way neither of them stopped him. The way neither of them blamed him. The way they simply watched him leave. Something twists painfully in his chest.
They're family too.
The realization lands with startling clarity. Not just traveling companions. Not just friends. Family. Aang. Aira. Appa. Momo. The whole ridiculous group.
Sokka wonders how they're doing right now. Aang's probably beating himself up. Aira's probably trying to comfort him. And both of them are probably convinced Katara and Sokka are gone for good.
"Sokka?" Katara's voice pulls him back to reality.
He stops walking. The others stop too. Sokka stares at the forest floor. Then exhales.
"We need to go back. I want to see Dad." His voice is firm. More certain than it's been all day. He looks toward the horizon. "But helping Aang and Aira is where we're needed most right now."
Katara studies him. Then a smile slowly spreads across her face. “You’re right.”
Bato watches both siblings quietly. Pride fills his expression. “Your father will understand, and I know he’s proud of you,” Bato says.
“Thanks, Bato,” Sokka smiles.
Bato reaches into his robes and pulls out the map. He presses it into Sokka’s hands. “Take this in case you want to find us. I’ll leave a message at the rendezvous point.”
Bato opens his arms. The siblings immediately step forward. The three Water Tribe members embrace tightly. When they finally pull apart, Bato gives each of them one last smile. With that, Bato continues down the trail toward Hakoda and the warriors.
Katara and Sokka watch until he disappears among the trees. Then they exchange a glance. A shared grin spreads across both of their faces.
"We should hurry," Katara says.
Then, without another word, the siblings turn around and begin jogging back down the trail. Back toward Appa and Momo. Back toward the Aira and Aang. Back toward the family waiting for them.
=============================
Several minutes later, Sokka and Katara make their way down the forest trail toward the abbey. Their pace is brisk, almost eager. The sooner they find Aang and Aira, the better.
Sokka can already imagine the look on Aang's face when they tell him they're coming back. The kid will probably cry again. The thought almost makes him smile. Almost.
Aira will probably just cross her arms and say, "Took you long enough." Then she'll secretly be relieved. At least that's what Sokka hopes.
The knot in his stomach has finally started to loosen. Things aren't fixed yet. Aang still owes them an apology. But they can work through that. That's what families do.
The trail bends around a cluster of trees.
Katara glances toward the abbey in the distance. "I hope they haven't left yet."
"They haven’t." Sokka sounds more confident than he feels. "They're probably still packing."
Suddenly a strange noise echoes through the forest. A deep rumbling growl. Branches crack. Birds burst from the treetops. Sokka immediately freezes. Every instinct screams danger. His arm shoots out in front of Katara. She stops instantly.
The noise grows louder. Closer. Whatever it is, it's moving fast. Very fast.
Sokka narrows his eyes. "What is that?"
The ground begins to vibrate beneath their feet. Katara takes a cautious step backward. Then the creature explodes down the trail towards them. Both siblings stumble back in shock. The beast is enormous. Its long tongue hangs from its mouth. Its claws tear grooves through the earth as it charges toward them.
"What is that?!" Katara gasps.
Sokka has absolutely no idea. And that terrifies him. Perched atop the creature sits a woman neither of them recognizes. Her expression is smug. Beside her—
Sokka's stomach drops. "No."
Zuko. And behind him sits Uncle Iroh. The beast skids to a halt before them. For a brief moment nobody moves. Nobody speaks. The woman studies them. Then her eyes land on Katara.
"So this is your girlfriend."
Sokka blinks. What?
"No wonder she left you."
Katara's eyes narrow. Sokka's face twists in confusion.
The woman continues. "She's way too pretty for you."
Normally this would start an entirely different argument. Katara would probably be yelling. Sokka would definitely be yelling. But neither of them can spare the energy. Not when Zuko is just a few paces away.
The prince slowly dismounts the creature. His boots crunch against the dirt. Every step feels deliberate. Threatening. He stalks toward them.
"Where is he?" His voice is low. Dangerous. "Where's the Avatar?"
Sokka immediately shifts into a defensive stance. Katara mirrors him.
"We split up." Sokka shrugs. "He's long gone."
Zuko stops walking. His golden eye narrows. "How stupid do you think I am?"
Sokka doesn't even hesitate. "Pretty stupid… Run!"
Both siblings immediately spin around and sprint. The forest blurs around them. For one brief second Sokka thinks they might actually make it. Then he hears a wet snapping sound. A blur shoots past him. Something strikes his back. His entire body seizes. His legs stop working. His arms go numb. The world tilts sideways.
Sokka crashes face-first into the ground. Beside him Katara falls too. The air explodes from his lungs. He tries to move. Nothing happens. His fingers won't obey. His legs won't obey. He can't feel anything. Panic floods his chest. What— What happened?
Katara lands nearby. "Sokka?" Her voice trembles. "I can't move."
"Me neither."
They both lie helplessly on the forest floor. The creature casually retracts its tongue. Like catching prey is the most natural thing in the world.
Zuko folds his arms. "What are we supposed to do now?"
Sokka glares at him from the ground. Or at least he tries to. The creature suddenly lowers its head. Its massive nostrils flare. It begins sniffing Katara. Then Sokka. Back and forth.
The woman watches carefully. "It's looking for a different scent. Perhaps something the Avatar touched."
Sokka's heart drops. No. No no no. The map. The map Aang held. The map he'd carried all day.
The creature suddenly snorts. Its head jerks toward Sokka's belt. Toward the folded parchment tucked into his clothing.
Zuko immediately snatches the map. The creature inhales deeply. Then lets out an eager growl. Its body turns toward the coastline. Toward the abbey. Toward Aang and Aira.
Sokka's stomach plummets. No. Please no.
Zuko grabs him by the back of his tunic. Effortlessly lifting him from the ground.
"Hey!" Sokka shouts. Or tries to. The paralysis turns it into little more than a strained grunt.
Katara receives similar treatment moments later. The siblings are unceremoniously dumped onto the creature's back. The woman climbs aboard. Zuko follows. The creature immediately lunges forward.
The forest becomes a blur. Trees rush past at terrifying speed. Sokka struggles against the paralysis. Nothing. He can't move. Can't fight. Can't warn anyone. The realization fills him with dread. The beast is following Aang's scent. Following the map. Following the trail straight to him. Straight to Aira. Katara meets his eyes. The fear in hers mirrors his own. Sokka swallows hard.
Please be gone already.
The thought repeats over and over.
Please have left.
Please be in the sky.
Please be anywhere but the abbey.
The creature races onward. And all Sokka and Katara can do is watch helplessly as it carries them toward their friends.
==============================
Eventually the creature carries them all to the abbey. It bursts into the courtyard but then starts walking in circles. It looks up and sees Aang flying through the air on his glider with Aira on his back. Aang flies straight towards them, effectively knocking the creature back as it tries to attack with its tongue. This movement causes everyone to fall off the creature’s back. Katara and Sokka both land on their stomachs with a thud, still unable to move.
Aira jumps from Aang's back before they both land on the ground. Her boots hit the stone courtyard hard. Pain shoots through her knees, but she ignores it. The creature lets out a shrill roar and lunges toward them. Appa immediately charges. The sky bison slams his massive body into the beast, sending it crashing through part of the abbey wall. Stone explodes outward in a shower of dust and debris.
For a brief moment, Aira thinks they might actually have the advantage. Then Zuko steps forward. Fire blossoms around his fist. Aira's stomach drops. Zuko thrusts his arm forward and launches a blast of fire.
"Aang!"
Aang sweeps his staff through the air. Wind erupts from the glider and disperses the flames before they can reach them.
The two boys immediately engage. Fire. Air. Fire. Air.
Aang glances toward the ground. Sokka and Katara lie completely motionless where they fell. His face tightens.
"I got this!" he shouts. "Go help them!"
Aira hesitates. Every instinct screams at her not to leave him alone with Zuko. But then she sees Katara's unmoving body. Sees Sokka sprawled face-first against the stone. Fear shoots through her chest. She nods. Then runs. The closer she gets, the worse it looks. Katara's eyes are open. Sokka's eyes are open. Neither of them move. Not even a little. Aira's heart nearly stops. For one horrible second she thinks they're dead.
"K-Katara?"
No response. Aira drops to her knees beside her.
"Katara!"
Katara's eyes shift toward her. Relief crashes through Aira so hard it almost makes her dizzy.
"I'm okay," Katara says weakly.
Aira lets out a shaky breath. Spirits. They're alive. She quickly slides an arm beneath Katara's shoulders.
"Come on."
Katara can barely help. Aira drags her across the courtyard. Every muscle in her arms strains. The fight behind them continues. Explosions. Crashing stone. The roar of the creature.
Aira finally manages to prop Katara against a section of wall. Then she immediately turns around. Sokka. She rushes toward him. Sokka is considerably heavier. Of course he is.
"Why do you have to be so heavy?" she mutters.
He just grunts in response. She grabs him beneath the arms. Pulls. Nothing. Pulls again. This time he slides several inches. Aira grunts.
"Spirits..."
Her shoulders burn. Her back aches. She drags him across the courtyard one exhausting step at a time. By the time she reaches Katara she's breathing heavily. She gently lowers him beside his sister.
"There."
Aira bends over with her hands on her knees. "I really need to get stronger."
She crouches beside them. "Are you guys okay?"
"We're okay," Sokka says. His jaw clenches. "But that animal paralyzed us."
Aira immediately looks toward the creature. The giant beast is still battling Appa. "How long does it last?"
"We don't know," Katara says.
A loud crash echoes through the courtyard. Everyone turns. Aang smashes through a pile of rubble. Aira's heart lurches.
"Aang!"
Dust fills the air. Zuko stalks toward him. Slow. Determined. Terrifying. Aang tries to push himself up. Zuko raises a flaming fist. Aira doesn't think. She moves. She sprints across the courtyard. Wind gathers around her feet. Her palms. Her arms. She thrusts both hands forward.
A powerful blast of air slams into Zuko's side. The prince is launched several feet before hitting the ground. He skids through the dirt. For a moment Aira feels victorious. Then Zuko stands. Slowly. Angrily. His eyes lock onto hers. The look makes ice crawl down her spine.
Oh. That's not good.
Zuko charges. Fire explodes from his fists. Aira dodges left. Heat rushes past her face. She counters with another air blast. Zuko dives aside. The attack misses. He closes the distance frighteningly fast. Too fast. His fist shoots toward her head. Aira ducks. His knuckles pass inches above her hair. She grabs his arm. Just like Jet taught her. Use their momentum. Redirect. Don't resist. Move.
For a split second she thinks it works. She lifts her leg. Aiming for his stomach. Then Zuko twists free. Effortlessly. His hand snaps around her ankle. Before she can react—
He yanks, and the world flips. Aira crashes onto her back. Her head slams against the ground, and stars explode across her vision. Everything spins. The sky. The courtyard. The fire.
No. Get up. Get up. GET UP.
Her vision finally clears. Just in time to see a fireball hurtling toward her. Her breath catches. She rolls. But not fast enough. Flames scrape across her shoulder and upper back. Pain erupts through her body. Aira screams. The smell of burnt fabric fills the air. Tears instantly spring to her eyes.
A powerful gust suddenly erupts overhead. Zuko is thrown backward. Aang lands between them. Breathing hard. Eyes fierce. The two boys immediately re-engage. Air and fire collide once more.
Aira tries to stand. Her legs wobble. The burn throbs with every heartbeat. Anger mixes with the pain. She lost. Again. Not because she didn't try. Not because she froze. Because Zuko was simply better. Stronger. More experienced.
The realization stings almost as much as the burn itself. If Aang hadn't intervened—No. She doesn't finish that thought.
A gentle hand settles on her uninjured shoulder. Aira flinches violently.
"It's okay," a calm voice says. Superior kneels beside her with concern in her eyes. "Can you stand?"
Aira swallows. Then nods. "Y-yeah."
Superior helps the young girl stand before guiding her toward the wall where Sokka and Katara sit. Every step sends a sharp sting through her shoulder. The fabric of her tunic has been singed away in places, exposing angry red skin underneath. She tries not to show how much it hurts. The last thing she wants is for anyone else to worry about her.
The siblings immediately notice her condition.
Katara's eyes widen. "Aira!"
Sokka's face hardens with concern. "What happened to your shoulder?"
Aira glances down at the burn. "It's fine."
"It doesn't look fine."
"It's a small burn."
"Aira—"
"I'm okay," she insists, perhaps a little too quickly.
The truth is she's furious. Furious that Zuko beat her so easily. Furious that she froze for half a second. Furious that Aang had to save her. Most of all, she's angry because she wanted to protect her friends. Instead, she became someone who needed protecting.
Her jaw tightens.
Sokka notices. "You don't have to pretend it doesn't hurt."
Aira lets out a quiet huff. "It hurts."
"That's more believable."
Despite being paralyzed, Sokka somehow still manages to sound smug.
Aira rolls her eyes. "Don't make me drag you across another courtyard."
"I'd like to see you try."
"You weigh as much as Appa."
"I do not."
"You're right. Appa's lighter."
Katara snorts. For a brief moment, the tension eases. Then another loud crash shakes the courtyard. Everyone turns. The giant beast barrels through part of the abbey. Chunks of stone tumble from a nearby wall. Aang narrowly avoids being crushed by falling debris. Aira's stomach twists.
Come on, Aang.
Before she can dwell on it, one of the sisters rushes toward them carrying a small clay jar.
"I believe this may help."
The nun uncorks the container and places it beneath Katara's nose. Katara takes a hesitant sniff. Immediately her entire body jerks. Her fingers twitch. Then her arms. Then her legs.
The sister moves the jar beneath Sokka’s nose. He inhales and his whole body jolts. He springs upright so suddenly that everyone jumps.
Another roar echoes through the courtyard. The three teens look up. The creature is still tearing through the abbey, it’s nose twitching as it moves.
Sokka's eyes narrow. The strategist in him immediately goes to work. "That thing sees with its nose… Let's give it something to look at."
“The perfume?” Superior asks.
Sokka nods. "Exactly."
Aira blinks. "Oh." A slow smile spreads across her face. "Oh, that's actually brilliant."
"Of course it is." Sokka folds his arms.
Katara groans, “Please don’t inflate his ego even more than it already is.
The sisters quickly get to work. Several nuns push large urns of perfume into the center of the courtyard. The sweet scent immediately fills the air. Flowers. Citrus. Herbs. Spices. Dozens of fragrances all blending together.
The creature's nose twitches nervously. It already looks uncomfortable. Katara sweeps her arms upward. The perfume erupts from the barrels in shimmering streams. The fragrant mist swirls through the courtyard.
The beast freezes. Its nostrils flare. Once. Twice. Then panic sets in. The creature begins huffing wildly. Its head jerks from side to side. It stumbles backward. Whines. Roars. Sniffs again. The animal completely loses its bearings. It lets out a frantic screech. Then starts lashing out blindly. Its tongue shoots across the courtyard.
The sticky appendage slams directly into the woman that was riding it before. The bounty hunter barely has time to yelp before collapsing to the ground. A second later the tongue snaps in another direction. This time it strikes Zuko squarely in the chest. The prince freezes. His eyes widen in horror. Then he topples over sideways like a felled tree.
Aira can't help it. She bursts out laughing.
Sokka immediately joins her. "That was incredibly satisfying."
"Agreed."
Even Katara struggles to suppress a smile.
The creature lets out one final distressed cry. Then it bolts. Straight through the damaged abbey wall. Stone explodes outward as the beast disappears into the forest.
The courtyard falls silent. Everyone stares after it. Aang lands nearby and stares at the paralyzed Zuko.
"Good work guys,” Aang smiles.
For the first time since everything fell apart at the ceremony, the four friends are standing together again. And for Aira, that's enough to make the ache in her shoulder feel a little less painful.
===========================
After helping the sisters clear away fallen stone and broken beams from the abbey, the four teens decide it is best to leave before Zuko regains feeling in his limbs. The last thing any of them want is another battle.
The sisters insist on treating Aira's burn before they depart. She sits quietly while several of the women carefully apply a cooling ointment to the angry red skin on her shoulder and upper back. The medicine immediately eases some of the throbbing pain.
"It should heal nicely," one of the sisters assures her as fresh bandages are wrapped around her shoulder.
Katara kneels beside her, watching the process closely. "I can take care of it on the road."
The sister smiles. "I'm sure you can."
Aira glances at Katara. "You sound very confident."
"I am." Katara folds her arms proudly. "I've patched up this idiot enough times." She gestures toward Sokka.
"Hey," Sokka protests.
Aira snorts.
The sister finishes tying the bandages. "There. Just don't overexert yourself."
Aira immediately looks away.
Katara notices. "So she's definitely going to overexert herself."
"Definitely," Aang agrees.
A short while later, Appa soars into the evening sky. The abbey grows smaller and smaller beneath them. The ocean reflects the setting sun like molten gold. Orange and crimson clouds stretch across the horizon, painting the sky in brilliant colors.
For a while, nobody speaks. The wind whistles through their hair. The steady rhythm of Appa's flight fills the silence. Aira finds herself staring at the horizon. The past two days feel like a blur. The fight with Zuko. Almost losing Sokka and Katara. Thinking they were leaving. Thinking she'd never see them again.
Her chest tightens slightly at the memory. She hadn't realized how much the siblings meant to her until she'd watched them walk away. Thankfully, she doesn't have to imagine that anymore. They're here. Still here.
"So..." Aang finally says from Appa's head. His voice is careful. Almost nervous. "Where do we go now?"
Everyone knows what he's really asking. Aira sees him glance over his shoulder. Waiting. Bracing himself. Sokka and Katara exchange a look. Then Katara smiles.
"We're getting you to the North Pole."
Aang visibly relaxes. "Really?"
"Yeah," Sokka says. "We've already lost enough time as it is."
Aang stares at them. For once, he seems completely speechless. "Don't you want to see your father?"
The question hangs in the air.
Sokka's expression softens. "Of course we do." He looks toward Aang. Then toward Aira. "But you guys are our family too."
Aira's breath catches slightly.
"And right now," Sokka continues, "you need us more."
Katara nods. "And we need you."
For a moment, nobody says anything. Aira finds herself smiling. A real smile. Not the polite kind. Not the guarded kind. But the kind she hasn't worn much since her parents died.
Aang suddenly perks up. His eyes sparkle. “I wish I could give you a little piece of home, Katara, something to remind you–”
“I’ll be okay,” Katara reassures.
“Still, just a little trinket.” Aang says with a smile and a glint in his eyes. “Maybe something like… this?” He says as he holds up a necklace. It’s a black choker with a beautiful pendant attached to it. The pendant is blue with Water Tribe markings carved into it.
“Aang!” Katara gasps. “How did you get that?”
“Zuko asked me to be sure I got to you,” he says playfully.
“Oh, that’s so sweet of Zuko,” Katara plays along. “Would you give him a kiss for me when you see him?”
Before he can answer, Katara leans forward and plants a quick kiss on his cheek. Aang freezes. Completely freezes. His face immediately turns bright red and his entire body locks up.
Sokka looks horrified. Aira immediately bites her lip. Neither of them last more than two seconds. They burst out laughing.
Aang groans. "Guys."
"Oh, this is priceless," Sokka says.
"I think he stopped breathing."
"I did not!"
"You definitely did."
As the laughter dies down, Sokka's attention shifts toward Aira. His expression grows more serious. "How's your shoulder?"
Aira immediately answers. "It's fine."
Sokka raises an eyebrow. Katara raises an eyebrow. Aang raises an eyebrow. Three skeptical faces stare at her.
"It's fine," she repeats.
To prove it, she rolls her shoulder. Instant regret. Pain shoots through her arm. Aira immediately winces.
Sokka points at her. "See?"
"I hate that you saw that."
"It was impossible not to."
Katara sighs. "You need to take it easy."
"I'm taking it easy."
"No."
"You literally just tried to prove your injury didn't hurt."
Aira opens her mouth. Then closes it. Fair. "But my training—"
"We'll continue once you're healed," Aang says.
"But—"
"No buts," Sokka interrupts. "Your wound needs to heal."
Aira looks toward Katara.
Katara nods. "No buts."
She looks back toward Aang.
He nods too. "No buts."
Aira stares at all three of them. Three against one. Not fair. Absolutely not fair. She lets out the longest sigh she can manage.
"Fine."
Aira carefully leans back against the saddle, making sure not to put pressure on her bandaged shoulder. The conversation gradually shifts to lighter topics. Appa flies onward through the fading sunset.
The burn still hurts.
The future is still uncertain.
The Fire Nation is still hunting them.
But Aira isn’t alone, she’s with family. And somehow, that makes everything a little easier to bear.
Aira and her friends sit along the edge of a shallow riverbed just outside of Makapu Village. The afternoon sun glitters against the moving water, casting rippling reflections across the rocks beneath their feet. Nearby, Appa snores softly in the grass, one giant paw twitching in his sleep after hours of flying. Momo lounges on top of his head, tail flicking lazily.
The four teens sit in a loose circle with their lunch spread between them—which unfortunately consists of nothing more than stale bread that had gone hard nearly a week ago. Sokka tears off a chunk with visible effort, nearly hurting his jaw in the process. “I still can’t believe you made us suck on frozen frogs!” he exclaims dramatically, dragging both hands down his face as if reliving a traumatic memory.
“And I can’t believe you’re still talking about it,” Katara sighs, shooting her brother an exhausted glare.
Sokka points accusingly at her with his bread. “Katara, I had frog legs kicking around in my mouth. That changes a person.”
Aira snorts quietly beside him. “I’m just glad you’re feeling better,” she says. “You snore extra loud when you’re sick.” She nudges his shoulder with hers. “Now I can actually get some sleep.”
“I do not snore,” Sokka says instantly, voice cracking halfway through the sentence.
“Yes you do,” Aira, Katara, and Aang all answer in perfect unison.
Sokka freezes mid-bite.
His eyes slowly narrow as he stares around at the three of them in betrayal. Sokka’s pout deepens before a mischievous look suddenly creeps across his face. His eyes slide toward Aira. “At least I don’t fart in my sleep.”
Aira chokes on her bread. “I do not fart in my sleep!”
“Oh really?” Sokka leans back smugly. “And how exactly would you know? You’re asleep.” He gestures vaguely toward her. “Besides, is it really that unbelievable? You are an airbender.”
Aang bursts into laughter at that.
Aira’s jaw drops in offense. She rips off a piece of bread and hurls it at his face. The bread bounces harmlessly off Sokka’s forehead before falling into the dirt beside him.
“Hey!” he protests, throwing his hands up dramatically. Then, without hesitation, he picks the bread up off the ground and shoves it into his mouth.
The others stare at him in horror. “What?” Sokka says through a mouthful of crumbs, giving them all a very unfortunate view of half-chewed bread. “You can’t waste food.”
Katara physically recoils. “That touched the ground.”
“So do potatoes. You still eat those.”
Suddenly, splashing interrupts their conversation. A massive green Se Tu fish leaps from the river in a spray of glittering water before crashing back beneath the surface. Sokka’s eyes widen instantly. “Speaking of food…” The fish breaches again, this time facing directly toward the group. Its large eyes seem almost judgmental. Sokka points at it accusingly. “He’s taunting me.” The fish splashes again. “Oh, you are so going to be dinner.” Sokka scrambles for his fishing pole only to discover the line is missing. “What—where’s my fishing line?”
Aang rubs the back of his neck sheepishly. “Uh… I used it.” Aang quickly reaches into his robes and carefully pulls out a woven necklace. The fishing line has been braided intricately together with a small pink flower threaded into the center.
Katara’s eyes light up immediately. “Aang… it’s beautiful.”
Aang’s ears turn pink. “You said you missed your old necklace, so I thought maybe I could—y’know—make you another one.”
“Wow,” Aira says genuinely, leaning closer to admire it. “That’s actually really impressive.” She smiles at Aang. “Any chance you could make me one too?”
“Sure!” Aang brightens immediately. “As soon as we get more fishing line.”
Sokka clutches the broken pole to his chest in mourning.
Katara slips the necklace on carefully before looking toward Aang. “How do I look?”
Aang stares at her like his soul just left his body. Aira watches his face carefully—the blush spreading across his cheeks, the way he tugs awkwardly at his collar, the completely lovestruck expression he’s failing horribly to hide.
Oh spirits. He has it bad.
“Smoochie smoothie,” Sokka sings obnoxiously. “Someone’s in looove.”
Aang nearly combusts.
“Stop teasing him, Sokka,” Katara scolds. “Aang’s just a good friend.” She smiles fondly and scratches Momo under the chin. “A sweet little guy. Just like Momo.”
Aira physically winces. Ouch. Poor Aang.
Before anyone can continue embarrassing him further, loud growling echoes from deeper in the forest. The group instantly springs to their feet. They race through the trees and burst into a clearing where a massive platypus bear towers over a lone traveler. Its claws carve deep gouges into the dirt as it snarls. Yet strangely… the man doesn’t look afraid at all. In fact, he looks completely relaxed. The beast swipes at him and he casually sidesteps the attack with a calm smile on his face.
The four teens all shout at once:
“Make noise! He’ll run off!”
“No, play dead!”
“Run downhill then climb a tree!”
“No, punch him in the bill!”
“And then run in zig-zags!”
The man remains oddly serene. “No need,” he says calmly. “Everything’s going to be fine.”
Aang quickly jumps in front of him protectively as the platypus bear growls. Then Appa charges into the clearing behind it and unleashes an earth-shaking roar. The platypus bear freezes. Its eyes widen in primal terror. And then—quite literally—it lays an egg before bolting into the forest. Sokka immediately rushes forward and scoops up the egg. “Mmmm. Lunch.” He sniffs it suspiciously before looking at the traveler. “Lucky for you we came along.”
“Thanks,” the man replies pleasantly, “but everything was already under control. Aunt Wu predicted I’d have a safe journey.”
“Aunt who?” Sokka asks.
“No, Aunt Wu,” the man clarifies patiently. “She’s the fortune-teller from my village.”
Katara perks up immediately. “Wow… that explains why you were so calm.”
“But she was wrong. You didn’t have a safe journey, you were almost killed,” Sokka argues.
“But I wasn't,” he replies with a smile on his face. “Alright, have a good one.” He then hands Aang an umbrella before he walks off, stating Aunt Wu told him to give it to any travellers he meets.
Katara suggests that they go see Aunt Wu, and learn their fortunes. “It could be fun.”
“Oh come on,” Sokka says, sounding cynical. “Fortune-telling is nonsense”.
Promptly, it begins to pour rain, meaning Aunt Wu’s prediction about needing an umbrella was right on the money. But Sokka continues to deny being able to tell the future. The egg he’s holding comically slips out of his hands and cracks as it lands on his head, egg liquid oozing all over him. Sokka wipes the egg off his forehead with deep offense. “That proves nothing.”
The group begins making their way toward Makapu Village. Aira walks between Aang and Katara while Sokka trudges behind them miserably, covered in egg. After several moments of silence, Aira quietly asks, “…Do I really fart in my sleep?” Katara and Aang immediately lean behind her to make eye contact. Then both start giggling. Aira’s shoulders slowly sag, feeling slightly embarrassed. Maybe I should lay off the lotus root…
===============================
Finally, the group arrives at Makapu Village. Towering in the distance is Mt. Makapu, the massive volcano looming over the village like a sleeping giant. Aira finds herself staring at it longer than the others. Something about it feels unsettling. The group enters Aunt Wu's Fortune-Telling Shop. The waiting room is warm and cozy. Candles flicker along the walls and cushions are scattered across the floor. The smell of incense and tea fills the air.
Aira hesitates near the doorway. Fortune telling. She honestly doesn’t know what to think about it. For most of her life, the future was never something she allowed herself to imagine. Survival always came first. Find shelter. Find food. Avoid Fire Nation patrols. Keep moving. Dreaming about the future felt dangerous somehow. Still… now that she’s traveling with people again—real friends—it suddenly feels less impossible to imagine having one.
A girl with large pigtails and blunt bangs rushes over excitedly. “I’m Meng!” she says brightly. Then she sees Aang. And immediately forgets everyone else exists. Aang scratches his nose absentmindedly, completely oblivious. Aira notices Meng staring at him and bites back a smile.
“Can I get you some tea or Aunt Wu’s famous bean curd puffs?” Meng asks dreamily while staring directly at Aang.
Sokka happily accepts her offer but Meng completely ignores him, and Sokka’s jaw drops in offense.
The four teens settle onto cushions, Aira sitting between Aang and Sokka.
“I can’t believe we're here in the house of nonsense,” Sokka says, looking annoyed.
Katara sighs. “Try to keep an open mind, Sokka. There are things in this world that just can’t be explained. Wouldn’t it be nice to have some insight into your future?”
“It would be nice to have some bean curd puffs,” he retorts.
Aang glances toward Aira. “What about you, Aira? Are you excited to have your fortune read?”
Aira shrugs lightly. “I guess.” She picks absentmindedly at a loose thread on her sleeve. “I don’t know if I believe someone can predict an entire future… but maybe people just like hearing there’s something waiting for them.” Her own words surprise her a little. Because maybe part of her wants to hear that too.
Eventually, Meng returns to the waiting room carrying a large steaming tray piled high with golden bean curd puffs. The sweet smell instantly fills the room, warm and buttery with a hint of honey. Sokka practically levitates. Meng walks directly past everyone else and gently places the tray onto Aang’s lap with a dreamy smile. “Here you go,” she says softly.
Aang blinks. “Oh. Uh… thanks?”
Meng lingers for a second too long before hurrying away again, smoothing down her hair as she disappears behind a curtain.
Sokka immediately lunges forward and snatches the tray from Aang’s hands like a starving hyena. He shoves two into his mouth at once before letting out a groan of approval.
Aira watches in disgust and mild fascination as crumbs rain down the front of his tunic. “You know,” she says slowly, “most people chew before inhaling their food.”
Sokka points at her dramatically with a half-eaten puff. “That’s quitter talk.” Despite his gluttony, he reluctantly offers the tray toward the others. Katara declines with a wave of her hand while Aang politely shakes his head, still distracted by whatever thoughts are bouncing around inside his head.
Aunt Wu suddenly enters the waiting room, her layered robes swaying softly around her ankles. The candles lining the room flicker as she passes. “Welcome, young travelers,” she says warmly, smiling at the group. “Now then… who’s next? Don’t be shy.” Katara bashfully volunteers and leaves the waiting room with Aunt Wu.
Silence settles for about three seconds before Aang breaks it. “So…” Aang says, drawing the word out far too innocently, “what do you think they’re talking about in there?”
“Boring stuff, I’m sure. Love, who she’s gonna marry, how many babies she’s gonna have,” Sokka responds with a bored expression whilst slurping on some tea.
“Yeahh, dumb stuff like that,” Aang responds whilst biting his nails. He then abruptly stands. “Well! I’m gonna go find a bathroom.” And before anyone can respond, he speed-walks out of the room.
Aira slowly narrows her eyes as she watches him leave. “…Bathroom,” she repeats skeptically. Sokka shrugs, too busy stuffing another puff into his mouth to care. Aira’s attention drifts back toward the tray in his lap. Up close, the bean curd puffs smell incredible—sweet, warm, soft. Her stomach betrays her with a quiet growl. “…Can I have one?” she asks.
Sokka immediately clutches the tray to his chest. “No.”
“What do you mean no?”
“They’re too tasty to share.”
“You literally offered them earlier!”
“And you rejected my generous proposal.” He takes another bite. “That opportunity has passed.”
Aira stares at him flatly. Then she lunges. Sokka yelps and jerks the tray out of reach. Aira leans halfway across him trying to grab one while he stretches his arms out dramatically like his life depends on protecting the pastries.
“You’re being unbelievably selfish!”
“And you’re being unbelievably aggressive!”
Aira huffs and sits back with an annoyed look. “Fine.”
Sokka smirks smugly and lifts another puff toward his mouth. And in one swift motion, Aira snatches it directly from his hand.
“Hey!”
She grins triumphantly. “Finders keepers.”
Sokka immediately dives toward her to retrieve it. His hand successfully catches her wrist before she can eat the puff and his other hand grabs the puff-but he squeezes too hard. The pastry explodes. Bean curd filling shoots everywhere. A glob lands in Sokka’s hair. Another splats against the wall. A third somehow hits Momo directly in the face. The lemur screeches in outrage.
Sokka looks personally victimized. “Aira!” he cries. “Look what you did!”
“What I did?” she laughs incredulously. “This wouldn’t have happened if you had just shared!”
“I offered to share!”
“You revoked the offer!”
“Haven't you heard of no take-backsies?!"
Aira opens her mouth to argue again when the curtain rustles and Aang walks back into the room. Only now he looks suspiciously cheerful. Very suspiciously cheerful. There’s a slight bounce in his step and a dreamy look in his eyes. Aira immediately raises an eyebrow. Yeah. He was absolutely eavesdropping.
Aang stops dead as he surveys the room. Bean curd on the walls. Bean curd on Momo. Bean curd dripping off Sokka’s sleeve. “…Uhhh,” he says slowly. “What happened here?”
Sokka and Aira instantly point at each other.
“She started it!”
“He started it!”
Aang’s eyes widen as he looks between them like he’s watching two angry turtle-ducks hiss at each other. “…I was gone for two minutes.”
Before either of them can defend themselves further, Aunt Wu and Katara return from the back room. Katara is smiling so hard it looks painful. Aunt Wu simply smiles before turning toward the group again. “Who’s next?”
“Okay, let’s get this over with,” Sokka sighs dramatically as he stands.
Aunt Wu studies him for less than three seconds. “Your future is full of struggle and anguish.” She pauses. “Most of it self-inflicted.”
The room goes silent. Aira snorts loudly. Sokka sputters in offense. “What?! You didn’t even read my palms or anything!”
“I didn’t need to,” Aunt Wu replies calmly. “It’s written all over your face.”
Katara covers her mouth trying not to laugh. Aunt Wu then turns toward Aira instead. “And what about you, dear? Care to hear your fortune?” Aira hesitates. Truthfully, she still isn’t sure what she thinks about all of this. Part of her expects vague nonsense dressed up to sound meaningful. But another part of her… Another part of her is curious. Curious about whether her future could truly be anything other than surviving one day at a time. Slowly, she nods. Aunt Wu leads her through a curtain into a smaller room in the back of the shop. The space is quiet and dimly lit. Candles flicker softly along the walls, filling the air with the smell of jasmine and smoke. Two cushions sit across from one another with a low wooden table between them.
Aira settles onto one cushion while Aunt Wu lowers herself gracefully onto the other. For a moment, neither of them speaks. Then Aunt Wu reaches beneath the table and pulls out a deck of worn cards. Each one is painted with intricate illustrations faded slightly with age. “These cards represent different aspects of life,” Aunt Wu explains gently as she begins shuffling. “Together, they reveal patterns. Possibilities. The shape your path may take.”
Aira watches the cards move between her fingers. The old woman’s movements are calm and practiced, almost hypnotic. Finally, Aunt Wu places three cards face down onto the table. She flips over the first. A figure stands at the edge of a cliff beneath an open sky, carrying only a small bag. “The Fool,” Aunt Wu says softly. “New beginnings.” Her finger traces the edge of the card. “You will leave behind what is familiar. But do not fear that change.” She lifts her gaze toward Aira. “Your journey will shape you into someone stronger than you realize.”
Aira’s stomach tightens slightly but she says nothing. Aunt Wu flips the second card. An old man stands alone holding a lantern against the darkness. “The Hermit,” she continues. “Introspection. Solitude. Truth discovered within oneself.”
Aira’s chest feels strangely heavy. “Well,” she mutters dryly, “that one sounds accurate.”
Aunt Wu smiles faintly. “Yes. But this card is not simply about being alone.” Her eyes sharpen slightly. “It is about isolation becoming comfort. Safety. A habit.”
Aira stills. The words land harder than she expects. Because she knows exactly what Aunt Wu means. Keep moving. Don’t stay too long. Don’t get attached. It’s been her life for years.
“The Hermit beside The Fool tells me your path is both outward and inward,” Aunt Wu continues. “You are searching for more than shelter, child.”
Aira looks down at the table quietly. Finally, Aunt Wu turns over the last card. A man and woman stand together beneath the sun, hands intertwined. “The Lovers,” Aunt Wu says.
Aira immediately feels awkward. Oh spirits.
Aunt Wu notices the look on her face and chuckles softly. “People misunderstand this card. It is not merely romance.” Her finger taps lightly against the image. “It represents connection. Choice. Vulnerability.”
Her gaze settles directly onto Aira. “You will meet people who refuse to let you remain distant.”
Images immediately flash through Aira’s mind—Katara fussing over her injuries. Aang smiling at her excitedly whenever they talk about airbending. Sokka grinning smugly while arguing with her over bean curd puffs. Her chest tightens unexpectedly.
“You will have a choice,” Aunt Wu continues softly. “To keep moving… or to stay long enough to let yourself be known.”
Aira swallows hard. Because staying has always felt dangerous. If you stay, you lose people. That’s what life taught her.
“If you choose connection,” Aunt Wu says, “it will not always be easy. These bonds will frustrate you. Challenge you. They will force you to confront parts of yourself you would rather avoid.” Aira falters slightly. Aunt Wu notices immediately. But then the old woman smiles gently. “And yet,” she says, “they will also become unbreakable. Because true connection is not built once. It is chosen again and again.”
Silence settles over the room. Aira stares at the cards. At first, all of this seemed vague. Predictable. The kind of thing anyone could relate to. But now… Now it feels uncomfortably specific. Because for the past four years, her life has not been a journey of freedom. It has been survival. Hide your bending. Hide your grief. Keep moving. Don’t let anyone close enough to leave a scar when they’re gone. Yet somehow, without her noticing, these people have started slipping past her defenses anyway. And maybe… Maybe a small part of her doesn’t want to run from that anymore.
==============================
After Aunt Wu reads everyone’s fortune, the four teens step back out into the village street, the warm scent of incense and tea still clinging to their clothes. The late afternoon sun hangs low above Makapu Village. Villagers weave around them carrying baskets of produce and bundles of fabric, all seemingly lighter somehow, as though a few reassuring words from Aunt Wu could smooth away the uncertainty of life.
Katara walks with an almost dreamy expression, her hands clasped behind her back as she replays her fortune in her mind. Beside her, Aang can barely keep the grin off his face. Every few seconds his eyes drift toward Katara before quickly darting away again whenever she notices.
Sokka, meanwhile, looks like he’s moments away from exploding.
“Well,” he says loudly, throwing his hands into the air, “now you got to see for yourselves that fortune-telling is just one big, stupid hoax.”
Katara rolls her eyes, though there’s still amusement lingering on her face. “You’re only saying that because Aunt Wu told you you’re going to make yourself unhappy your whole life.”
“That woman is crazy,” Sokka scoffs. “My life is going to be calm, and happy, and joyful.” To emphasize his point, he aggressively kicks a loose rock in the road. The rock ricochets off a wooden signpost with a loud crack before flying straight back into his forehead. “Ow—!” Sokka collapses onto his back in the dirt with a groan. “That doesn’t prove anything,” Sokka grumbles from the ground, rubbing his head. He lifts a finger into the air like a scholar making an important point.
Aira can’t stop the laugh that slips out of her. It’s soft at first, then fuller when Sokka shoots her an offended glare from the dirt. “You done?” he mutters.
“Maybe,” she says through a grin. She reaches down and offers him her hand. Sokka stares at it for half a second before taking it. His grip is warm and firm as she helps pull him back to his feet.
“Thanks,” he mutters quietly, dusting himself off. Their group continues down the road toward the center of town, where a large crowd has gathered in the square. Dozens of villagers stand shoulder to shoulder, all staring upward expectantly. Aira tilts her head. “What are they doing?”
A random villager says they are waiting for Aunt Wu to read the clouds to predict the fate of their village and determine if Mt. Makapu will remain dormant this year or if it will erupt. "We used to have a tradition once a year of going up the mountain to check the volcano ourselves, but ever since Aunt Wu moved to the village 20 years ago, we have a tradition of not doing that,” he says with a smile.
“I can't believe you would trust your lives to that crazy old woman’s superstition!” Sokka yells incredulously. A few villagers nearby frown at him disapprovingly. Aira shifts awkwardly beside him. Up until now, Sokka’s ranting about fortune-telling had mostly been annoying. But this? This actually felt dangerous. She glances toward Mt. Makapu again. The mountain’s silhouette looks darker now against the evening sky. Maybe Sokka has a point.
“She’s coming,” Katara says suddenly.
The crowd parts almost instantly as Aunt Wu walks through the village square. Villagers smile and bow their heads as she passes, some whispering hopeful questions under their breath. Aunt Wu ascends a small platform in the center of town and opens an enormous cloud-reading book. The pages flap softly in the breeze as she studies the sky with intense concentration. The entire square falls silent. Aira watches the villagers carefully instead of Aunt Wu. They look so certain. So trusting. As though fear itself disappears the moment someone promises everything will be alright.
After several moments, Aunt Wu lifts her chin proudly. “Good crops this year. Nice, big harvest,” she announces. Some of the villagers cheer. "Gonna be a great year for twins.” A pair of twin boys high five excitedly. “And finally…” Aunt Wu raises her arms dramatically toward the volcano. “The village will NOT be destroyed by the volcano this year!”
The crowd erupts into celebration. People hug one another. Children laugh and run through the square. Someone nearby starts crying tears of relief. Aira watches the celebration uneasily. Beside her, Sokka looks horrified. After the cloud reading ceremony is over, Katara wanders back to Aunt Wu’s shop for another fortune telling reading. Meanwhile, Aira walks through town with Sokka and Aang. Sokka continues to complain about Aunt Wu, stating he’s going to prove to the townspeople that her predictions are absurd. Aang tries to tell Sokka to let it go, saying that the townspeople seem happy, but Sokka doesn’t seem to care. He marches through town like a man preparing for battle.
For a moment, Aira debates simply letting him go. That would be easier. It was always easier not to involve herself. But instead, she follows after him. “Sokka,” she calls.
He stops near a produce stand and turns toward her. “What?”
Aira slows as she reaches him. “Why does this matter to you so much?”
Sokka blinks, clearly caught off guard by the question. “What do you mean?”
“I mean…” Aira gestures vaguely toward the celebrating villagers. “You’ve been arguing about this all day. Most people would’ve given up by now.”
Sokka exhales sharply through his nose. “Because none of these people are thinking clearly,” he says. “They’re using phoney predictions to make real decisions.” His voice isn’t teasing anymore. It’s firm. Frustrated. “Didn’t you see that guy getting attacked by the platypus bear earlier? He almost died because he trusted some fortune instead of common sense.”
Aira leans against the nearby fence quietly. “But he didn’t die,” she points out gently.
“That’s because we showed up.” Sokka runs a hand through his hair in agitation. “Look, I know everyone thinks I’m overreacting or being annoying or whatever, but somebody has to say something. These people are treating Aunt Wu like she’s never wrong. And someday that’s gonna get somebody hurt.” His eyes drift toward the volcano looming beyond the village.
“Or killed.”
The words settle heavily between them. Aira studies him silently. Usually when Sokka argued, it came wrapped in jokes and exaggerated confidence. But underneath all that noise was something steadier—something stubborn and deeply sincere. He cared. Even when it made people dislike him. Even when nobody agreed with him. Aira can’t relate to that. Her whole life has been shaped by the opposite instinct: stay quiet, stay hidden, don’t give people reasons to turn against you. Avoid conflict. Avoid attention. Leave before anyone can force you out. But Sokka doesn’t run from tension. He walks directly into it. And somehow… he doesn’t break.
“You really think you can change their minds?” she asks softly.
Sokka shrugs, though determination hardens his expression. “Probably not.”
“Then why keep trying?”
“Because it matters.”
The answer comes so quickly, so simply, that it catches her off guard. Sokka looks back toward the villagers gathered in the square. “If nobody challenges bad ideas just because it’s uncomfortable, then people get hurt. Maybe not right away. But eventually.”
Aira feels something shift uneasily in her chest. Because she realizes he isn’t just talking about the villagers anymore. For years, she’s survived by staying quiet. By hiding who she is. By convincing herself that avoiding problems was the same thing as solving them. But Sokka stands his ground even when people mock him for it. And for reasons she can’t fully explain yet, she finds that strangely admirable. Maybe even inspiring.
===========================
Later that evening, after the excitement surrounding Aunt Wu’s cloud reading finally dies down, Aira and Katara wander into a small tea shop near the edge of the village. The shop is warm and dimly lit, lanterns hanging from wooden beams overhead while steam curls lazily through the air from boiling kettles. The scent of jasmine, ginger, and toasted rice fills the room, comforting after the chilly mountain breeze outside.
They settle into cushions beside a low table near the window. Outside, the sky has deepened into dusky shades of blue and violet, with Mt. Makapu looming in the distance. Aira wraps her hands around her cup of oolong tea, savoring the warmth against her cold fingers. Across from her, Katara gently stirs honey into her jasmine tea, though her distracted smile makes it obvious her mind is somewhere else entirely.
“She said he’s going to be a powerful bender,” Katara says for what is probably the third time. “And tall too.”
Aira smiles into the rim of her cup. “I noticed you conveniently keep mentioning the tall part.”
Katara’s cheeks pink slightly. “I do not.”
“You absolutely do.”
Katara laughs softly and nudges Aira’s foot beneath the table. “Okay, maybe a little.”
A comfortable silence settles between them for a moment as a server brings over a plate of steamed buns. The fresh scent instantly makes Aira’s stomach rumble.
Katara notices and grins. “You’re worse than Sokka.”
“That’s offensive,” Aira says immediately before grabbing a bun. “I at least chew with my mouth closed.”
Katara snorts into her tea.
Aira tears her bun apart slowly, watching steam rise from the filling. Then, more quietly, she asks, “So… how do you feel about it?”
Katara looks up. “About what?”
“The fortune.”
Katara’s expression softens almost immediately. “I don’t know,” she admits. “It’s silly, probably. But… it’s nice thinking about it.”
“Thinking about your mysterious tall bending husband?” Aira teases.
Katara rolls her eyes, though her smile remains. “Not just that.” She traces the rim of her teacup thoughtfully. “I guess… it’s comforting imagining a future at all sometimes.” The honesty in her voice makes Aira pause. Katara glances toward the window, toward the distant silhouette of the volcano and the darkening sky beyond it. “With the war and everything…” she continues softly, “sometimes it feels like we’re all just trying to survive the next day. So hearing someone talk about years from now—about love and family and happiness—it makes things feel…” She searches for the word. “Possible.”
Aira’s chest tightens faintly. Possible. For years, her future had only existed in pieces: where to sleep, what to eat, where to hide, who to avoid. She’d stopped imagining anything beyond survival a long time ago.
Katara studies her curiously over the rim of her cup. “What about you?”
Aira blinks. “What about me?”
“Aren’t you curious?” Katara asks. “About romance, I mean.”
Aira nearly chokes on her tea. “What?”
Katara laughs immediately. “Oh spirits, your face!”
“My face is fine.”
“It turned bright red.”
“It absolutely did not.”
Katara gives her a look.
“…Maybe a little,” Aira mutters.
Katara smiles knowingly and leans forward slightly. “Come on. There’s gotta be someone you’ve thought about at some point.”
Aira immediately opens her mouth to deny it—but before she can, her mind betrays her.
Sokka flashes across her thoughts almost instantly. His stupid smirk. The way he argues like every conversation is a battle he intends to win. The determined look on his face earlier when he talked about protecting the village, even while everyone dismissed him. And annoyingly enough, the quiet little “thanks” he gave her when she helped him up off the ground.
Aira physically recoils from the thought. Absolutely not. “Nope,” she says far too quickly.
Katara offers a warm smile after a moment. “You know,” she says gently, “it doesn’t always happen all at once.”
Aira lifts her head slightly. “What?”
“Feelings.” Katara shrugs lightly. “Sometimes you don’t notice them until one day you realize someone became important to you without you meaning for it to happen.”
Aira’s stomach flips strangely. “That sounds terrifying,” she says honestly.
Katara bursts into laughter again. “It kind of is.”
Aira smiles despite herself. Outside, evening settles fully over Makapu Village. The lantern light inside the tea shop glows soft and golden around them while distant laughter drifts through the streets. For the first time in a long while, Aira allows herself to sit still without thinking about where she’ll run next. And maybe that means something too.
=========================
After finishing the last of their tea and steamed buns, Aira and Katara make their way back through the winding streets of Makapu Village. Katara walks a little quicker than before, practically buzzing with excitement.
“You’re going back again?” Aira asks, amused.
Katara smooths down her hair defensively. “I just want one more reading.”
“One more?” Aira snorts softly. “Katara, you’ve been there like six times today.”
“Three,” Katara corrects immediately.
Aira raises an eyebrow.
“…Okay, maybe four.”
“You’re addicted.”
“I am not.”
“You absolutely are.”
Katara opens her mouth to argue, but they arrive at Aunt Wu’s shop before she can defend herself further. The two girls step inside the waiting room, only to find Meng standing awkwardly in the doorway leading deeper into the building.
“Oh,” Meng says nervously upon seeing Katara. “You’re back.”
Katara smiles brightly. “Just for one quick reading!”
Meng winces. From somewhere in the back of the shop, Aunt Wu’s tired voice echoes out, “No.”
Katara blinks. “No?” she repeats.
“No more readings tonight!” Aunt Wu calls again. Aira immediately bites the inside of her cheek to stop herself from laughing.
Katara places her hands on her hips indignantly. “Can you believe she won’t let me in?” Aira absolutely can. Honestly, she’s a little surprised Aunt Wu lasted this long. Just then, Aang and Sokka walk up the path toward the shop. Aang looks relaxed as usual, while Sokka appears deeply irritated about something—which, for him, isn’t particularly unusual.
Katara immediately gestures dramatically toward the shop. “Can you believe she won’t let me in?” she complains. “And after all the business I’ve given her!”
Aang scratches the back of his head awkwardly. “…But she doesn’t even charge.”
“I know,” Katara says quickly, “but still.”
Sokka groans loudly before either of them can continue. “Look, we have other things to worry about!”
His serious tone immediately catches Aira’s attention.“What happened?” she asks.
Sokka points toward the distant volcano looming above the village.“Aunt Wu was wrong about the volcano."
Aira’s stomach tightens slightly. “What do you mean?”
“The volcano’s active,” Sokka says. “Me and Aang climbed to the top of it. It’s chock full of burning lava.”
Katara folds her arms stubbornly. “Sokka, you’ve been trying to convince us Aunt Wu’s wrong all day.”
“Because she is!”
Before Katara can argue further, a violent rumble suddenly shakes the earth beneath them. The ground lurches hard enough that Aira nearly loses her footing. Villagers gasp nearby as rooftops rattle and dust tumbles from windowsills. Far above the village, Mt. Makapu roars ominously. A massive plume of black smoke bursts from the crater and spirals into the sky. Everyone freezes. Aira stares at the volcano as dread curls tightly in her chest. Oh no. Sokka was right.
The shaking stops after several long seconds, leaving an eerie silence behind. Then chaos erupts. “We need to evacuate the village,” Aira says immediately.
Sokka nods sharply. “Now.” The four teens sprint toward the town square as another rumble echoes faintly from the mountain. But when they arrive, the villagers are… calm. Far too calm. Some continue shopping. Others chat casually beside food stands. A few glance toward the volcano before shrugging and returning to their business. Aira stares at them in disbelief. How are they not panicking right now?
Sokka looks moments away from combusting. “Everyone!” he shouts. “That volcano is going to blow any second! Aunt Wu was wrong!”
The villagers seem disinterested and almost annoyed, knowing Sokka has been belittling Aunt Wu’s practice this whole time. Katara attempts to reason with the villagers, but they’re too stubborn and naive to listen to them. “I heard Aunt Wu’s prediction with my own ears,” one of the villagers says smugly.
Aira steps forward urgently. “Please listen to us! The volcano just shook the entire village!”
“And it stopped, didn’t it?” someone replies smugly. Aira feels frustration beginning to rise in her chest. Even with smoke pouring from the mountain, these people still refuse to believe it. Another deep rumble vibrates through the ground. Still, the villagers hesitate. Some begin walking away entirely. Aira exchanges a worried glance with the others. At this rate, people are going to die.
Then suddenly, Aang snaps his fingers. “I have an idea.” The others turn toward him. “If the villagers trust Aunt Wu more than the volcano itself…” Aang says slowly, “then we make Aunt Wu tell them.”
Sokka blinks. “What?”
Aang grins. “We use her cloud-reading book.” Aira tilts her head curiously as Aang explains his plan. The more he talks, the more impressed she becomes. It’s clever. A little ridiculous, maybe—but clever. Soon, Aang and Momo sneak into Aunt Wu’s shop while the others keep watch outside. Aira paces anxiously near the doorway as distant rumbles continue echoing from the volcano.
“Hurry up…” she mutters under her breath.
Finally, Aang bursts back outside holding the cloud-reading book triumphantly over his head. “Got it!”
A few minutes later, Aang and Katara soar into the sky atop Appa while Sokka and Aira remain in the village below. Together, the two benders manipulate the clouds overhead, twisting them carefully into a massive ominous skull shape. The effect is genuinely terrifying. Even Aira shivers a little looking at it. Meanwhile, Sokka practically drags Aunt Wu outside. “Aunt Wu! Look at the clouds!” he insists.
Aunt Wu looks deeply offended at first. “Young man, I already did my cloud reading for the—” Then she looks up. Her eyes widen instantly. “Oh my…” The color drains from her face. “The volcano!” she gasps loudly. “The signs have changed!”
Villagers immediately gather around her in alarm.
“What?”
“What does it mean?”
“Are we in danger?”
Aira exchanges a glance with Sokka. It worked. Relief flashes briefly across Sokka’s face before determination replaces it. "There’s still time,” he says quickly. “But everyone needs to start digging a trench outside the village immediately. It will divert the lava into the river nearby.”
Soon the entire town erupts into frantic activity. Aang leads the earthbenders toward the edge of town while everyone else grabs shovels and tools. The air grows hotter by the minute. Ash begins drifting from the sky like gray snow. Aira digs desperately beside Sokka, sweat dripping down her face as the earth trembles beneath them again and again. The smell of sulfur burns her nose. Somewhere behind them, children cry while villagers rush to evacuate carts and supplies.
“Dig faster!” Sokka shouts. “Come on!”
Another violent tremor nearly knocks everyone off balance. Aira grips her shovel tighter and keeps digging. The trench deepens rapidly as earthbenders force massive chunks of rock aside, but when lava finally begins cascading down the mountainside, her stomach drops. It’s moving fast. Far too fast. Flames consume the village gates as molten rock barrels toward them like a glowing river of destruction. The trench fills instantly. But the lava keeps coming.
“It’s too much!” Katara yells over the roaring eruption. “It’s gonna overflow!”
The ground shakes violently again. Aira stumbles backward, panic flooding her chest as another wave of lava surges toward the trench. Everyone begins retreating. Everyone except Aang.
“Aang!” Aira shouts fearfully. “We have to go!”
But Aang doesn’t move. The young Avatar plants his feet firmly against the trembling earth. Wind begins swirling violently around him. He raises his arms, gathering massive currents of air into a spiraling force. Then—WHOOOM. Aang slams the air forward in an enormous blast. The force crashes into the lava flow, pushing the molten rock backward and redirecting it away from the village in a blazing explosion of steam and ash. The sheer power of it leaves everyone stunned. Aira stares upward at him in awe as wind tears through his robes and the entire battlefield roars around him. For a moment, he doesn’t look like a kid at all. He looks like the Avatar.
Beside her, Sokka lets out a low whistle. “Man,” he says breathlessly, “sometimes I forget what powerful a bender that kid is.”
Katara freezes beside them. A strange realization slowly crosses her face as she watches Aang standing against the glow of the volcano. “I suppose he is…” she murmurs quietly.
Aira glances sideways at Katara immediately. And suddenly, her mind flashes back to Aunt Wu’s prediction: A powerful bender. Aira looks back at Aang hovering dramatically against the fiery backdrop. Then at Katara’s expression. A slow grin spreads across Aira’s face.
Katara notices instantly. “Don’t,” she warns.
Aira raises both hands innocently. “I didn’t say anything.”
“You were about to.”
“I absolutely was.”
Sokka looks over to the two girls, completely oblivious to their conversation. “What are you two going on about?”
The girls reply in unison.
“Nothing.”
“Nothing.”
Sokka shakes his head in confusion, muttering under his breath, “Women.”
======================================
The following morning, the village square buzzes with celebration. Villagers move between market stalls carrying baskets of fruit and fresh bread, children dart through the crowd laughing, and strings of paper lanterns sway gently in the breeze as if the town itself is trying to shake off the memory of yesterday’s panic. It’s strange, Aira thinks, how quickly people return to normal after nearly losing everything.
Aang steps forward and sheepishly hands Aunt Wu her cloud reading book back. “We kind of borrowed your book."
The old woman accepts it carefully, brushing dust from the cover with surprising tenderness. Her sharp eyes narrow slightly as she flips through the pages. “So you messed with the clouds, did you?” she asks. She then lets out a hearty laugh. “Very clever,” she says with a smile.
“No offense,” Sokka says loudly, stepping forward before anyone can stop him, “but I really hope yesterday taught everybody a lesson about relying too much on fortune-telling.”
A villager tilts his head thoughtfully. “But Aunt Wu predicted the village wouldn’t be destroyed,” he says with an easy shrug. “And it wasn’t. She was right after all.”
Sokka stares at them in absolute horror. Aira watches the exact moment his soul leaves his body. He points shakily at the villager. “I hate you,” he says flatly through clenched teeth.
Katara immediately grabs one of his arms while Aira grabs the other before he can launch himself into another argument.
“It’s okay, Sokka,” Katara says softly. “Everything is gonna be alright.”
“We’re leaving now,” Aira adds, already dragging him away.
The three teens make their way toward Appa, who lounges near the edge of town chewing lazily on a bundle of hay. Aang quickly follows after them, waving goodbye to Aunt Wu and the villagers. As Appa rises to his feet with a heavy grunt, the group begins climbing into the saddle. Katara settles near the front while Aang takes his usual place near Appa’s head. Aira climbs in across from Sokka, who still looks personally betrayed by the entire village. His arms are crossed so tightly across his chest that Aira wonders if circulation has stopped entirely.
“You okay over there?” she asks lightly.
“No,” Sokka says immediately. “I’m surrounded by lunatics.”
Aira snorts softly and adjusts her cloak around her shoulders. “You know, for someone who hates fortune-telling so much, you spent an awful lot of time thinking about it.”
“That’s because everyone else refused to think about it!”
Aang grins. “I think Aunt Wu’s prediction about you was pretty accurate.”
Sokka groans dramatically. “Not you too.”
Katara hides a smile behind her hand. “Your life is full of struggle and anguish.”
“Self-inflicted struggle and anguish,” Aira adds helpfully.
Sokka points accusingly at both girls. “See? This is exactly what I’m talking about. I save an entire village and somehow I’m the victim.”
“You did call half the town delusional,” Katara replies.
“Because they are delusional!”
Aang laughs from Appa’s head. “You were kinda yelling a lot.”
Aira shakes her head, unable to stop the grin tugging at her mouth. The late afternoon wind rushes past Appa’s saddle as the village grows smaller beneath them. Below, the people of Makapu wave cheerfully from the ground, completely unaware that Sokka is still offended by their existence.
Then her stomach growls loudly. Everyone pauses. Aira immediately stiffens. “…You all heard that, didn’t you?”
Sokka’s grin appears instantly. “Wow. Sounds like there’s a platypus bear living in your stomach.”
Aira glares at him. “I wouldn’t be hungry if someone had shared his bean curd puffs yesterday.”
Sokka gasps dramatically, “Excuse you. I offered to share at first.”
Katara raises an eyebrow. “Sokka, Aira said you literally held the tray away from her so she couldn’t take one.”
“Because she was stealing!”
Aira crosses her arms. “Because you were hoarding!”
Katara groans loudly. “Spirits, I’m surrounded by children.”
The next day, the group decides to stop in Taku, a massive abandoned city built high on the slopes of Mt. Wuyao. Even in ruin, the city is breathtaking. Broken stone archways stretch toward the sky. Cracked roads weave between crumbling homes overtaken by moss and weeds. Pieces of scorched walls still bear blackened marks from the Fire Nation attack that destroyed the city decades ago.
Aira walks beside Appa quietly, staring at the remains of what must have been once a beautiful place. She tries to imagine families living here. Children running through the streets. Lanterns glowing in windows. Now it’s silent. The reminder of what war leaves behind settles heavily in her chest.
As the sun begins to set, the group chooses shelter inside the remains of a partially collapsed stone building. Half the roof and one of the walls is missing, allowing streaks of orange sunlight to spill through the gaps. The floor is littered with dust and bits of rubble, but it’s dry enough for the night.
Everyone works quietly to set up camp. Katara unrolls sleeping bags while Aang gathers scraps of wood for a small fire. Aira shakes dust from an old blanket near the wall. Suddenly–
“Ahhh… ah-CHOO!”
The sneeze echoes loudly through the empty structure. Aira jumps slightly and turns toward Sokka. He’s hunched over near the packs, rubbing his nose miserably. “Ugh… achoo! …snff…” Another sneeze wracks through him followed by a groan so dramatic it almost sounds painful.
Aira’s eyebrows knit together immediately. “Sokka, are you okay there?” she asks cautiously.
“Yeah, I’m—achoo!—fine,” he insists thickly.His voice sounds awful—scratchy and congested. He sniffs loudly and wipes his nose with the back of his sleeve. “Just allergies,” he mutters weakly.
Katara pauses mid-unpacking and slowly turns toward him with the flattest expression imaginable. “Sokka,” she says dryly, “it’s winter.”
Sokka opens his mouth to argue but immediately dissolves into another coughing fit.
Katara walks over and presses the back of her hand against his forehead. Her expression changes instantly. “You’re burning up.”
“I’m okay,” Sokka mumbles stubbornly. “Warriors don’t get sick.”
“You literally have a fever. Why don’t you go lie down before you pass out?"
Sokka looks like he wants to protest again, but another sneeze interrupts him. “…Fine,” he grumbles. He trudges dramatically toward his sleeping bag like a dying man marching into battle.
Aira watches him closely the entire time. Normally Sokka is animated even when he’s tired—always talking, joking, moving around. But now his shoulders sag heavily, and his movements seem sluggish.
He collapses into his sleeping bag with a groan. “This is how it ends,” he mutters weakly. “Taken out by… achoo! …by nature.”
Aang snorts. “You’ll survive, Sokka.”
“Tell my boomerang… I loved him…” His eyes close moments later. Within minutes, he’s asleep.
Aira continues staring at him, unease twisting tighter in her chest. “Guys…” she says quietly. “He doesn’t look so good.”
Katara glances over reassuringly. “Don’t worry, Aira. He’ll be okay. It’s probably just a cold.”
Aang nods as he tosses another stick onto the fire.“Yeah. Sokka is probably one of those people that just gets dramatic whenever he’s sick.”
From across the room, Sokka groans weakly without opening his eyes. “I heard that…”
Katara smiles faintly while returning to unpacking. But Aira doesn’t smile. She looks back toward Sokka curled beneath his blankets, pale and sweating despite the cold air. A sick feeling settles deep in her stomach.
That night, everyone eventually falls asleep. Everyone except Aira. She lays awake on her bedroll staring up at the fractured ceiling overhead. Moonlight spills through the missing pieces of roof, casting pale silver patterns across the stone walls.
The fire crackles softly nearby. Sokka coughs in his sleep. Aira’s chest tightens. Her thoughts spiral no matter how hard she tries to stop them. Sweaty skin. Weak breathing. Shivering hands. Her mother laying beneath blankets in a dark cave.
Aira squeezes her eyes shut.
No. No no no. Sokka just has a cold. Katara said he’ll be okay.
But grief doesn’t care about logic. Fear doesn’t either.
She turns onto her side and pulls the blanket tighter around herself, though it does nothing to ease the anxiety clawing at her ribs. Across the room, Sokka coughs again.
Aira doesn’t sleep at all.
==================================
The next morning, pale gray light filters through the ruined building. Katara kneels beside the fire heating water while Aang yawns sleepily nearby. Aira is already awake. She’s sitting near Sokka’s sleeping bag, knees pulled to her chest.
The second Sokka stirs, her attention snaps toward him. He looks worse. Much worse. His face is flushed red with fever while sweat dampens the hair stuck to his forehead. Despite the sweat, his entire body trembles beneath the blankets.
Sokka coughs harshly into his elbow before groaning weakly. “Water…” he croaks.
Katara immediately hands him a canteen. He drinks sloppily before collapsing back down.
Aira’s stomach drops. “Guys,” she says quickly, panic slipping into her voice, “we need to do something. He looks really weak.”
As if to prove her point, Sokka suddenly doubles over coughing violently. Aira flinches. Aang kneels beside her gently. “It’s okay, Aira,” he says softly. “It’s probably just a bad cold. He’ll get better soon.”
“No, it’s not okay!” she snaps suddenly.
The words come out louder than she intended. The room falls silent.
Aang blinks in surprise and instinctively raises his hands. “Whoa—sorry. I didn’t mean—”
Aira stands abruptly before he can finish. Katara looks at her carefully now, beginning to understand that this isn’t really about Sokka having a cold.
“Aang,” Katara says gently, “why don’t you go look for some ginger root? We can make tea for him.”
Aang hesitates. He looks between Katara and Aira before nodding quietly. “Okay.” A moment later he’s gone, glider catching the morning wind outside.
Katara slowly approaches Aira. “Are you okay?”
“I’m fine,” Aira answers immediately. Too quickly. Too sharply.
Katara’s expression softens with concern. “Aira—”
“I said I’m fine.”
The guilt hits instantly after the words leave her mouth. Katara doesn’t deserve that tone. Neither did Aang. But the panic sitting inside Aira feels too big, too overwhelming.
She grabs her cloak and heads for the doorway.
“Aira,” Katara calls softly.
But Aira keeps walking. Cold mountain air hits her face the second she steps outside. She walks aimlessly through the abandoned streets of Taku, boots crunching against loose gravel and broken stone. The city is eerily quiet. Her breathing feels uneven. She wraps her arms tightly around herself as memories continue surfacing no matter how hard she tries to bury them.
Her mother coughing late into the night. The sound of weak breathing. The fear of waking up and finding—
Aira stops walking abruptly. Her eyes sting. “No,” she whispers shakily to herself.
Sokka is not her mother. Sokka is going to be okay. But grief is cruel like that. Sometimes it takes one fever, one cough, one sleepless night to drag old wounds wide open again.
And right now, Aira feels twelve years old and helpless all over again.
======================================
When Aira returns to the ruined building, she finds Katara kneeling beside Sokka with a damp washcloth in her hands. She gently pats the cloth against his forehead, trying to cool his fever. Sokka looks miserable. His cheeks are flushed bright red, his hair is sticking to his forehead with sweat. Every few seconds he sniffles loudly or coughs weakly into his sleeping bag.
“You know what I love most about Appa?” Sokka mumbles deliriously, staring blankly at the ceiling.
Katara sighs patiently. “What’s that?”
“His sense of humor.”
“That’s nice,” Katara humors. “I’ll tell him.”
Appa, currently laying near the doorway, lets out a long groan at the sound of his name. Sokka immediately bursts into weak giggles. “Hehehe… classic Appa…”
Despite herself, Aira’s lips twitch faintly.
Then footsteps echo through the building. Aang lands nearby, folding up his glider. “How’s Sokka doing?” he asks, slightly out of breath.
Aira immediately notices his empty hands. Her stomach sinks. “You didn’t find the ginger root?” she asks quietly.
Aang rubs the back of his neck sheepishly. “No, but I did find this.” He unfolds an old weathered map across the ground. “There’s supposed to be an herbal institute on top of the nearest mountain.” He points toward a massive mountain barely visible through the broken archways of the ruined city. “We can probably find medicine for Sokka there.”
Katara looks uncertain. “Sokka’s in no condition to travel,” she says softly while wringing out the cloth. “He just needs rest. I’m sure he’ll feel better by tomorrow.”
The second the words leave her mouth, Katara coughs harshly into her elbow.
Then again. And again. The coughs scrape violently through her chest. Aira’s eyes widen immediately. Katara straightens quickly, waving a hand dismissively. “I’m fine. It’s just a small cough—” Another coughing fit interrupts her entirely.
Aang points dramatically toward Sokka. “That’s exactly how Sokka started yesterday! And now look at him—he thinks he’s an earthbender!”
As if on cue, Sokka weakly lifts his arms toward a pile of rubble nearby. “Take that… you rock…” he mutters seriously while making clumsy bending motions.
Aira would normally laugh. Instead, fear grips tighter around her chest. “Aang, we need to hurry before Sokka and Katara get any worse,” she says, emotion thickening her voice. Her breathing begins to quicken as she looks between the siblings.
Aang steps toward her carefully. “They’re going to be oka—”
“Stop saying that!”
The shout echoes sharply through the abandoned structure. Everyone goes still. Aira’s chest heaves as panic crashes through her all at once. “This can’t be happening again,” she whispers shakily.
“Aira…” Aang says gently, taking another cautious step forward. “You need to calm down—”
“Don’t tell me to calm down!”
Aang visibly flinches.
The reaction hits Aira instantly. Her expression crumples with guilt. The anger drains from her face, replaced by exhaustion and grief. She squeezes her eyes shut tightly and forces herself to breathe. “I’m sorry,” she whispers. Slowly, Aira lowers herself onto her knees. She curls inward and covers her head with her arms as if trying to physically hold herself together.
For a moment, the only sounds are Sokka’s coughing and the distant wind moving through the ruins of Taku. Then she feels a hand rest gently against her back. Aang kneels beside her quietly. “You know you can talk to me,” he says softly. “What’s going on?”
Aira lowers her arms slowly and looks at him. Her eyes are glassy with unshed tears. “It’s just…” Her voice wavers. “The last time someone I loved got this sick… they died, Aang.”
Aang’s face softens immediately. “…Aira.”
She shakes her head quickly before tears can fall. “Which is why we need to do something. Fast.” Her voice cracks with desperation. “We can’t just sit here and watch them get worse.”
Aang nods slowly. Then determination settles across his face. “How about this,” he says. “I’ll go to the herbal institute and get medicine while you stay here with them.”
Aira hesitates before nodding. A tiny smile pulls at her lips, though it’s weighed down by fear.
“Thank you, Aang.”
Aang gives her shoulder one last reassuring squeeze before standing. “I’ll be back as fast as I can.” Then he’s gone in a rush of wind, running down the mountainside.
Silence settles over the ruined building afterward.
Aira throws herself into caring for the siblings to distract her thoughts. She boils water over the fire for compresses. Changes the cloths on their foreheads. Helps Katara sip water between coughing fits.
Hours pass slowly. Outside, the sky shifts toward afternoon. Aira is crouched beside the fire adjusting the boiling pot when she hears a weak voice behind her.
“Aira…”
She immediately turns. Sokka is barely lifting his head from the blanket. “Aira,” he rasps, voice strained and dry. “Please… water.”
She quickly grabs the canteen beside him. Empty. Aira’s stomach twists. She checks the others. Nothing. She exhales shakily. “Looks like we’re out,” she says gently. “I’m gonna head down to the river and get more. I’ll be right back.”
She glances nervously between the siblings. “Will you guys be okay alone for a few minutes?”
Katara gives a weak thumbs up. Sokka just groans in response. Aira grabs Katara’s water pouch and a large jug before heading out.
The mountain air is cold as she walks through the abandoned streets and into the forest beyond the city ruins. Eventually she hears the sound of rushing water–a river.
She kneels beside it, dipping the containers beneath the current. As they slowly fill, her thoughts drift somewhere she wishes they wouldn’t.
Aira kneels beside her mother on the floor of the cave they found shelter in. It's dark and musty. Her mother lays beneath several blankets, face flushed with fever. Every breath sounds shallow. Painful.
“Aira, honey…” her mother whispers weakly before dissolving into a violent coughing fit. The sound rattles horribly in her chest.
Aira grabs her hand tightly, tears already filling her eyes. “Mama…”
Her mother struggles to steady her breathing. “Aira… listen to me carefully.”
“No,” Aira shakes her head rapidly. “Don’t talk like that.”
“We need to consider the possibility…” Her mother pauses to cough again. “…that I might not recover.”
“No!” Aira cries instantly. “No, mama, you’re gonna get better. You have to.” Tears stream freely down her face now.
Her mother smiles sadly and brushes a trembling hand through Aira’s hair. “My sweet moon peach…”
“Mama please…”
Her mother cups Aira’s cheek gently. “Remember the promise you made me.”
Aira’s breath catches.
“Don’t forget why,” her mother whispers. “It’s to keep you safe.”
“Mama…”
“Promise me, Aira.” The desperation in her mother’s voice breaks something inside her.
“I promise,” Aira sobs. “I promise, mama.”
Her mother smiles faintly. “Thank you, dear.” She closes her eyes weakly. “I’m going to rest now,” she murmurs. “I’ll see you in the morning.”
“I love you, mama.”
“I love you too.”
The next morning, sunlight spills weakly into the cave. Aira wakes instantly and looks toward her mother. Still asleep. Too still. Something feels wrong immediately.
“Mama?”
No response.
Aira crawls closer and gently touches her shoulder. Cold. Ice cold. Her mother’s lips are pale blue.
Aira’s heart drops violently into her stomach. “No…” She grabs her mother desperately, shaking her.“ Mama? Mama wake up!”
Nothing.
Panic explodes through her. “Mama, please!” she sobs. “Please wake up! Don’t leave me!”
But she never opens her eyes again.
Aira clenches her jaw tightly against the memory. Her hands tremble slightly as she seals the water jug. After a moment, she notices a small patch of lotus roots growing near the riverbank. Her expression softens faintly. Her parents used to give them to her whenever she had a sore throat. Without thinking much about it, she harvests a few and places them into her bag.
By the time she returns to camp, the ruined building is quiet. Katara and Sokka are both asleep. And Aang still hasn’t returned. Aira tries not to let that worry her too. She reheats the water over the fire and dips cloths into it before wringing them out carefully.
One by one, she lays the warm compresses across the siblings’ foreheads. Sokka stirs first. His tired eyes blink open slowly.
“I’m sorry,” Aira says softly. “I didn’t mean to wake you.”
“It’s okay,” he mumbles hoarsely. His eyes drift toward the water jug. “Did you find water?”
Aira nods quickly. “Yeah. Here.” She pours water carefully into a cup before kneeling beside him. One hand slips gently beneath his head to help him sit up. Sokka leans heavily against her arm as he takes a sip. Immediately he coughs violently, sputtering water all over himself.
“Oh–Sokka–”
Aira quickly takes the cup and grabs a towel nearby, dabbing the spilled water from his shirt and chin. Sokka watches her quietly the entire time. Even exhausted and feverish, his eyes soften slightly. “Thanks,” he says quietly. “For taking care of us.”
Aira says nothing. She focuses on wringing out the towel instead.
But Sokka keeps watching her. “Aira… I overheard you talking to Aang earlier,” he says softly. “About your mom.”
Aira’s shoulders tense immediately.
“How are you doing?”
The question lodges painfully in her chest. She keeps her eyes fixed downward. “I’m fine,” she answers too quickly. “Don’t worry about me. Just focus on getting better.”
Sokka frowns slightly. Before he can respond, Aira grabs one of the lotus roots from her bag and sets it beside his cup. “Chew on that,” she says quietly. “It’ll help your throat.” Then she stands and walks away before he can say anything else.
Sokka watches her retreating figure silently. Even through the haze of fever and exhaustion, he can tell she’s hurting far more than she’s letting anyone see. And for the first time since getting sick, the ache in his chest has nothing to do with the fever.
=================================
Aira must have fallen asleep without meaning to. One moment she had been sitting beside the fire listening to the crackling flames, and the next, her eyes slowly flutter open to darkness.
For a second, she’s disoriented.
The abandoned stone structure around them is quiet and cold, illuminated only by the weak orange glow of the dying fire she lit earlier that day. Most of the logs have burned down to embers, faint trails of smoke curling lazily upward into the night air. The ruined walls around them cast long shadows that sway softly with the flicker of the flames.
Aira pushes herself upright with a groan, rubbing sleep from her tired eyes. Her neck aches from having fallen asleep sitting up. She pulls her blanket tighter around her shoulders and glances toward the opening of the ruined building.
Pitch black.
The moon hangs high above the broken city ruins, bathing the crumbling stone streets outside in pale silver light.
She waltzes over to the Water Tribe siblings, finding them asleep yet again. Katara is curled beneath her blanket, her brows slightly pinched even in sleep. Beside her, Sokka is sprawled onto his back with one arm hanging limply at his side. He’s snoring loudly—louder than usual. The sound rattles through his chest unevenly, likely worsened by his congestion.
Aira’s expression tightens with concern. She crouches beside him quietly and presses the back of her hand lightly against his forehead. Still warm. Too warm. Sokka shifts slightly in his sleep and lets out a congested groan before settling again.
Aira sighs softly and stands. Her eyes drift around the campsite before realization settles into her chest. Aang still hasn’t returned. The pit in her stomach deepens.
‘Should I be worried?’ she asks herself.
She walks toward the entrance of the ruined structure and peers out into the darkness. The city of Taku stretches endlessly before her—broken pillars, collapsed rooftops, and empty stone streets swallowed by shadows. The wind whistles softly through the ruined buildings, carrying an eerie stillness with it.
No sign of Aang. Her fingers tighten slightly around the edge of her blanket. After everything that happened yesterday, the idea of another person disappearing makes anxiety crawl up her spine. But she forces herself to take a steady breath. Aang is the Avatar. He can handle himself.
…Right?
Aira decides to wait until morning. If Aang doesn’t come back by then, then she’ll go searching for him herself.
In the meantime, she decides to rebuild the fire. She kneels beside the pit and places a few fresh logs onto the pile. The wood shifts with soft cracks as she uses a long stick to carefully push the logs deeper into the small flame. Sparks dance upward as the fire slowly catches, orange light growing brighter little by little until warmth begins to spread through the room again.
Satisfied, Aira dusts ash from her hands before grabbing an empty pot nearby. She fills it with water and adds a few slices of the lotus root she harvested earlier that day along with some dried herbs. Soon, the water begins to simmer gently over the flames. Steam curls upward into the chilly air as she stirs the concoction with a wooden spoon.
The smell is earthy and subtly sweet, instantly making her stomach growl. She realizes she hasn’t eaten much all day.
Once the roots are thoroughly cooked and softened, she carefully pours herself a small bowl. She sits cross-legged beside the fire and quietly eats, the warmth of the food spreading pleasantly through her body. The lotus root has a mild sweetness to it, soft but slightly crisp at the center.
The camp remains silent around her. Only the crackling fire, the scrape of her spoon against the bowl, and Sokka’s thunderous snores break through the stillness of the night.
At one point, Sokka snorts loudly in his sleep and rolls over dramatically, nearly kicking off his blanket. Aira blinks at him before quietly standing and pulling the blanket back over his shoulders.
“You’re impossible,” she mutters under her breath, though there’s fondness in it.
Hours seem to pass slowly. Eventually, Aira notices the darkness outside beginning to change. She looks out toward the horizon to see the very first signs of dawn emerging in the distance. The sky slowly shifts from deep black to soft shades of blue and purple, streaks of pale yellow beginning to bleed through the horizon.
The ruined city suddenly feels less lonely in the morning light. Aira is staring absently at the sunrise when movement catches her eye. A figure appears between the broken stone pathways outside.
Aang.
Relief floods through her so quickly it nearly makes her dizzy. He walks into the campsite looking utterly exhausted. His clothes are dusty, his shoulders slumped heavily, and dark circles sit beneath his eyes. His feet drag slightly against the stone floor as he enters.
“Aang!” Aira immediately stands. “Where have you been?”
Aang barely lifts his head. “Long night,” he mumbles tiredly.
Before she can ask anything else, he shuffles over to Katara and Sokka and gently nudges them awake.
“Huh?” Katara groans sleepily.
Aang places something small into each of their mouths before they can properly react.
“Just suck on it,” he says wearily. “It’ll make you feel better.”
Then, without another word, he collapses face-first into Appa’s tail with a groan. The giant bison lets out a sympathetic rumble and curls his tail slightly around Aang protectively.
Sokka blinks as he sucks on the medicine. “Did you make any new friends?” he asks hoarsely.
Aang’s voice is muffled by fur. “No… I don’t think I did.”
He curls tighter into Appa’s tail and is practically asleep within seconds.
“Mmmm,” Sokka hums thoughtfully as he continues sucking on the medicine. “This is tasty.”
Katara nods in agreement, still half asleep. “Kind of slimy though…”
Aira narrows her eyes suspiciously at the objects in their mouths. They look oddly familiar. Her eyes widen. “Oh no.”
A second later, the frozen frogs begin thawing. Tiny legs suddenly twitch. Then squirm. The frogs wriggle frantically inside Katara and Sokka’s mouths in an attempt to escape.
The siblings freeze.
Their eyes slowly widen in horror. Katara immediately spits hers out with a shriek. Sokka gags violently before launching the frog across the room. “YOU GAVE US FROGS?!” he yells, his congested voice cracking halfway through.
The frog lands on the ground with a wet splat before hopping away. Katara sputters in disgust, furiously wiping her tongue with the edge of her sleeve. “Aang!” Sokka, meanwhile, begins aggressively wiping his tongue against Appa’s fur.
“Get it off! Get it OFF!”
Appa groans in annoyance and pushes Sokka away with his giant paw.
Aira can’t help it. She bursts into laughter. Not just a small laugh either—a real one. Bright and breathless. The sound echoes softly through the ruined structure.Sokka pauses mid-panic to look at her. For a moment, despite the frog slime and fever and exhaustion, he smiles too. Aira presses a hand over her mouth, still giggling. ‘At least they’re feeling better,’ she thinks warmly.
Later that day, the group begins packing up camp, preparing to continue their journey north.The sun now pours through the ruined stone walls, warming the chilly air from earlier. Katara rolls up blankets while Sokka dramatically complains about his “traumatizing frog experience.”
“I can still feel it kicking,” he mutters.
“You’re fine,” Katara says flatly.
“I’m changed forever.”
Aira smiles faintly before noticing Aang beside Appa, tightening the bison’s reins. Her expression softens. She quietly walks over to him. “Uh, Aang?” she asks softly. “Can I talk to you for a second?”
Aang glances up immediately and nods. “Sure.” He hops down from Appa in one smooth motion, landing lightly in front of her.
Suddenly nervous, Aira’s hand drifts toward the back of her neck. Her fingers press lightly against her skin as she looks anywhere but him—the ground, the ruins, Appa’s tail. Anywhere except Aang. For a moment, it seems like she might not say anything at all.
Then she finally speaks. “I-I shouldn’t have yelled at you yesterday,” she says sheepishly. Her voice is quieter than usual. “I was a little emotional…” She lets out a small breath before correcting herself. “Okay, a lot emotional.”
Aang stays silent, listening carefully.
Aira’s eyes drop toward the dirt beneath her boots. “And I let it get the best of me,” she admits. “I’m sorry.” Her toe nudges lightly against the ground as if trying to distract herself from how vulnerable the apology feels. It’s not easy for her to admit when she’s wrong. Especially out loud.
Aang doesn’t answer immediately—not because he’s upset, but because he’s taking in her words carefully. His expression softens. “Thank you for saying that,” he says sincerely.
Aira finally glances up.
Aang offers her a small reassuring smile. “But I understand what it’s like when grief takes over,” he says gently. “Trust me.” Something in his tone makes her chest ache a little. “If you ever need someone to talk to,” he adds softly, “I’ll be there for you.”
A small smile slowly pulls at Aira’s expression. This one reaches her eyes. “Thank you, Aang.”
There’s a brief pause between them. Then, without hesitation, Aang steps forward and wraps his arms around her in a quick hug. Aira stiffens for only a second before slowly relaxing into it. The warmth of it catches her off guard.
For the first time in two days, the heavy tension sitting in her chest loosens slightly—replaced, even if only briefly, with comfort.
The pair part from their hug and share a small smile. For a moment, the heaviness that had been lingering between them feels lighter.
Nearby, Appa snorts softly as Katara finishes tying down the last of their supplies. Aang starts to turn back toward Appa when Aira’s curiosity gets the better of her. “Aang,” she says, tilting her head slightly, “what happened to you last night? You were gone for… a really long time.”
Aang freezes mid-step. His shoulders stiffen almost imperceptibly before he rubs the back of his neck sheepishly, avoiding her eyes. “Well…” he drags out nervously, “I was kinda taken by the Fire Nation and imprisoned at one of their fortresses.”
The entire campsite goes silent. Even Appa pauses chewing. Aira’s mouth falls open. Sokka nearly drops the rope he’s holding. “You WHAT?” he blurts, voice cracking in disbelief.
Katara immediately rushes toward Aang, eyes wide with panic. “Aang, are you okay?” She grabs his shoulders, quickly looking him over like she expects to find injuries hidden somewhere.
Aang waves his hands around casually, trying—and failing—to downplay it. “I’m fine! Seriously, I’m okay.”
“You got captured!” Sokka exclaims. “That’s not exactly a casual little sightseeing trip!”
Aang sighs dramatically, realizing there’s no escaping the interrogation now. “Okay, okay,” he relents. “When I was heading to find medicine, this group of archers ambushed me in the forest.” He gestures vaguely with his hands as he talks. “They tied me up and took me to a Fire Nation fortress nearby,” Aang continues. “They chained me to the wall in this prison cell.”
Aira’s expression darkens immediately at the word chained. Without meaning to, her fingers brush over the healing skin on her wrists.
Katara notices but says nothing. “Was it Zuko?” Katara asks quietly.
“Or Zhao?” Sokka butts in.
Aang hesitates for half a second too long. Aira catches it immediately. “Okay,” she interrupts, pointing between them, “seriously. Who is Zuko? And who’s Zhao? Everyone keeps saying these names like I’m supposed to know who they are.”
Aang quickly looks away. “It wasn’t Zuko,” he says simply, very carefully avoiding the rest of the question.
Sokka narrows his eyes suspiciously but decides not to press it.
“I managed to escape,” Aang continues quickly. “Then I found the frozen frogs and brought them back for you guys.”
Katara’s face softens slightly, though worry still lingers in her eyes. “But are you sure you’re okay?” she asks again. “They didn’t hurt you?”
Aang gives her a reassuring smile. “I’m okay. Just tired.”
“Tired?” Sokka repeats incredulously. “Aang, most people don’t casually survive prison breaks before breakfast!”
Aang shrugs sheepishly.
Aira exhales heavily and shakes her head, though a small smile tugs at her lips despite herself. “You’re unbelievable.”
“Thank you,” Aang says proudly.
“That wasn’t a compliment.”
Sokka finally steps beside Aira and hooks a thumb toward Aang. “Anyway, Zuko is basically this angry Fire Nation prince who’s been chasing us since the South Pole.”
“He’s not just some angry prince,” Aang interrupts. “He’s actually pretty complicated.”
Sokka deadpans. “Complicatedly annoying.”
“And Zhao?” Aira asks.
“Fire Nation commander,” Katara explains. “Also obsessed with capturing Aang.”
Aira blinks slowly before looking between all three of them. “Wow. You guys really attract problems wherever you go, huh?”
“You get used to it,” Sokka says with a shrug.
“No you don’t,” Katara mutters.
Aira looks back toward Aang, her expression softening again. “I’m glad you made it back safely.” Her voice turns firmer. “But that’s the last time we let you wander off alone.”
Aang rubs his neck awkwardly. “Yeah… probably fair.”
Katara suddenly perks up. “Actually, maybe we should make a rule.” She points between all of them. “Buddy system. Nobody goes off alone anymore.”
“That’s a great idea,” Aang agrees immediately. “That way we can protect each other.”
“I call Aira!” Sokka blurts.
Silence. Absolute silence. A gull screeches somewhere in the distance. Sokka freezes solid. Katara’s eyes widen slowly before a grin spreads across her face. Aang looks between the two teens with immediate interest.
Sokka’s ears turn bright red almost instantly. “I mean—uh—” He gestures wildly between Aang and Katara. “You guys already make a good pair! Like, team-wise. Fighting-wise.” His voice pitches higher with every word. “So obviously you’d go together and that leaves me and Aira and it’s just logical and not weird at all—”
“Right,” Katara says slowly, very unconvinced.
Aang bites the inside of his cheek, clearly trying not to laugh. Aira stands perfectly still staring at Sokka. She blinks once. Then twice. Then she clears her throat softly, her own cheeks warming pink. “Okay,” she says quietly.
Sokka immediately looks away like the sky has suddenly become fascinating. “Cool,” he says far too quickly.
“Cool,” Aira echoes awkwardly.
The two teens promptly separate and busy themselves with packing as though the conversation never happened. Sokka aggressively tightens a random strap that absolutely does not need tightening. Aira pretends to reorganize the same satchel three separate times.
Behind them, Katara leans toward Aang with the biggest grin on her face. Aang grins right back. Neither of them says a word.
Warnings: Mild violence. Mentions of grief. Nightmares.
Chapter 5 | Chapter 7
Chapter Masterlist
Panic floods through Aira as she runs through the forest. Branches scrape against her arms and legs while loose roots snag at her shoes, threatening to send her crashing to the ground. Her lungs burn with every desperate breath she takes. Behind her, heavy footsteps thunder against the ground.
They’re getting closer. Too close.
Aira glances over her shoulder and immediately regrets it. Several Fire Nation soldiers barrel through the trees after her, fire illuminating their fists in flashes of orange light. Her pulse pounds painfully in her ears as she pushes herself faster, but exhaustion is clawing at her body. She knows she can’t outrun them forever. The muscles in her legs begin to give way, so she decides the best course of action is to stand and fight.
Aira suddenly skids to a stop in the middle of a forest clearing, chest heaving. She spins around into a defensive stance. The soldiers halt several feet away. One steps forwards with a cruel smile spread across his face. He thrust his arm forward and a blast of fire rockets toward her–
Aira gasps sharply and jolts upright. Her breath is frantic as she looks around, her heart beating so rapidly it almost hurts. Sweat clings to the back of her neck and dampens her clothes. For a second, she still expects to see flames. Instead, moonlight stretches peacefully across the shoreline. The ocean rolls calmly beside their campsite, waves softly collapsing against the sand. Appa is asleep nearby while Aang curls against Appa’s soft tail, snoring softly. Sokka and Katara are both still asleep in their sleeping bags.
Everything is quiet. Safe. Peaceful.
Aira slowly presses a hand against her chest, trying to steady her breathing. Another nightmare. She exhales shakily. Ever since the Fire Nation captured her, sleep has become exhausting. The second she closes her eyes, she’s back in the forest. Back in that tent. Back in that chair with ropes cutting into her wrists and fear lodged within her.
Her fingers instinctively drift toward the fading marks around her wrist. The skin is still sensitive. She swallows hard before carefully pushing herself to her feet, trying not to wake the others. The cool sand sinks beneath her steps as she walks along the shoreline. The ocean breeze brushes against her skin, carrying the distinctive scent of saltwater through the air.
Eventually, she lowers herself onto the sand near the water’s edge. The waves pull in and out slowly. They’re steady, rhythmic. Aira closes her eyes and begins to meditate, focusing on the sounds of the ocean instead of the lingering panic trapped inside her chest.
Breathe in. Breathe out. And for a while, the world feels still again.
Further down the beach, Sokka stirs awake with a grimace. Momo is sprawled out directly beside his head, snoring loudly into his ear. “Ugh,” Sokka mutters sleepily, lightly nudging the lemur away. “Personal space, buddy.”
Momo chirps irritably in his sleep and curls into a ball. Sokka rubs his eyes before glancing around the campsite. Then he notices Aira’s sleeping bag–empty. His tiredness disappears instantly. He sits up straighter scanning the beach until his eyes finally land on a lone figure sitting near the shoreline. Moonlight reflects against the ocean in front of her. Relief loosens the tension in his chest. Sokka quietly stands and makes his way across the sand toward her.
As he gets closer, he realizes she’s meditating. Her eyes remain closed as the breeze gently stirs her clothes. The moonlight softens her features, making her look strangely peaceful despite the exhaustion he’s noticed clinging to her the past few days. Sokka slows unconsciously. For a moment, he just watches her. The steady rise and fall of her breathing. The way the water curls around the shore beside her. The calmness she somehow carries even after everything she’s been through.
Aira opens her eyes suddenly.
Sokka immediately freezes, realizing he’s absolutely been caught staring. He clears his throat awkwardly. “I wasn’t watching you or anything,” he blurts out.
Aira blinks at him. “Sure you weren’t.” A small smile pulls at her lips. She then gestures beside her, “you can sit down if you want.”
He drops down onto the sand beside her with exaggerated dramatics, immediately wincing when cold water brushes against his feet. “Oh, wow. That’s freezing.”
Aira laughs softly through her nose. “Aren’t you from the Southern Water Tribe?”
“Oh what, because I’m from the Water Tribe, that makes me immune to cold water?” he replies, his voice cracking.
Aira laughs again before a comfortable silence settles between them. They sit shoulder to shoulder facing the ocean, listening to the waves roll against the shore. Sokka glances sideways at her after a moment and notices her rubbing absentmindedly at her wrists. His expression softens immediately. “Does it still hurt?” he asks quietly.
Aira looks down briefly before giving a small shrug. “A little. It’s getting better though.”
Sokka’s jaw tightens anyway. He hates those marks. Hates what put them there. Aira notices his expression and gently nudges his shoulder with hers. “Hey,” she says softly. “I’m okay.”
Sokka lets out a breath through his nose. “Yeah,” he mutters. “Still.” Aira looks back out at the horizon instead of answering. The moonlight stretches across the water in shimmering waves. Sokka watches her fiddle with the wooden bracelet around her wrist.
“I should’ve protected you better,” he says suddenly.
Aira immediately looks over at him. “Sokka–”
“No, seriously.” His voice stays quiet, but firm. “I shouldn’t have let you walk off alone like that.”
“There was no way you could've known what would happen.”
“Still happened.” he gestures vaguely toward her healing cheek and wrists. “They hurt you.” The anger in his voice is muted now. Not explosive. Just heavy.
Aira’s chest tightens warmly at the certainty in his words. Her expression softens. “So you’re not still upset with me for lying?” she asks timidly, almost afraid of his answer.
Sokka rubs the back of his neck. “I was,” he admits honestly. “Or… I thought I was. But after we found your bag and realized the Fire Nation took you…” he exhales slowly. “None of that other stuff mattered anymore.”
Aira looks over at him, her chest tightening.
He shrugs, gaze fixed firmly on the ocean now. “I just wanted to find you.”
The softness of his confession settles warmly in her chest. Before she can think of what to say, another wave crashes against the shore and splashes both of their legs. Aira shudders, the coldness from the water creeping up her body. She immediately stands and takes a step back. “Okay, maybe you’re right. This water is really cold.”
Suddenly, this gives Sokka an idea. He smirks to himself before scooping some water into his hands and splashing it across Aira. She squeals as the cold seawater hits her skin.
“Sokka!”
He doubles over laughing. Aira stares at him in disbelief for approximately half a second before scooping up some water in both hands and throwing it directly at him.
Sokka sputters dramatically. “Oh, it is ON.”
The next few minutes dissolve into utter chaos. They splash water at each other relentlessly, stumbling through the shallow surf while laughing so hard they can barely breathe. Aira can’t remember the last time she laughed like this. Loudly. Genuinely. Not politely. Not quietly. But really laughed. The kind that makes your stomach hurt and your lungs ache.
At one point, Sokka manages to gently grab both of her forearms to stop her from splashing him again, the cold water turning his hands numb. “Truce,” he says breathlessly. They stare into each other’s eyes, both trying to catch their breaths from all of the laughing. And just for a second, neither of them say anything. The sunrise glows around them. Waves roll gently onto the shore. They just smile at each other.
Suddenly, a large wave crashes into them and knocks them both underneath the surface of the water. They both sit up, sitting in the sand underneath the shallow water. The pair make eye contact for a silent second then burst into laughter.
=======================================
Later that morning, the sun rises slowly over the ocean, spilling warm gold light across the beach. The waves lap gently against the shore while seagulls circle overhead, their cries soft and distant. Appa is still sleeping farther up the sand, snoring loudly, while Momo is curled into a fuzzy ball by Sokka’s sleeping bag. Sokka went back to sleep after their venture in the water, wanting to get some more rest before they all start their day.
Aira, however, has been awake for what feels like forever. She sits cross-legged near the campsite with her hands clasped tightly in her lap, bouncing one knee with barely contained excitement. Every few seconds her eyes drift toward Aang’s sleeping bag.
Today is the day Aang is going to start her airbending training. The thought makes her stomach flutter. For years, she had hidden this part of herself away like something shameful. Dangerous. Every instinct in her had been built around staying small, quiet, and hidden.
Aira glances down at her hands thoughtfully, fingers toying with her wooden bracelet. The promise she made to her mother still echoes in her mind. A pang of guilt twists in her chest, but it feels softer now, less sharp. Because her mother never could’ve imagined this. A real airbending master. The Avatar. Another survivor of her culture.
Aira hopes–more than anything–that her mother would understand. That she’d be proud.
A sudden snort breaks Aira from her thoughts. She looks over just in time to see Aang roll over sleepily before finally waking with a loud, groggy yawn. His eyes blink lazily. Then immediately widen. Aira is sitting directly in front of him, staring expectantly. Aang jumps about a foot in the air. “Whoa!” he scrambles backward while Aira giggles.
“Oh good, you’re awake!” she says brightly, unable to stop grinning. “Can we start training now?”
Aang rubs one eye tiredly, still trying to recover from the scare, but the moment her words register, his entire face lights up. “Oh! Right!’ he shoots upright instantly, all traces of exhaustion gone. “Traning day!” He airbends himself to his feet in one smooth motion, wind and sand swirling beneath him.
Aira’s jaw drops. “You can just do that casually?” she asks.
Aang shrugs proudly. “Yep,” he spins his staff once in his hand and points dramatically toward the open beach. “By the end of your training, you’ll be using airbending all of the time too.”
“Hey!” Sokka’s voice calls groggily from across camp. “I’m trying to sleep here!”
Aira laughs as Sokka sits up from this sleeping bag with messy hair sticking out in every direction, his usual ponytail loose and in disarray. He grumbles. “You guys are being way too energetic this early in the morning.”
“Breakfast!” Katara announces, stirring a pot hanging over a fire. Steam curls into the air from the porridge she’s making, carrying the warm smell of cinnamon across the campsite.
A minute later, everyone sits around the fire with bowls in hand. Katara blows gently across her spoon before taking a bite. Across from her, Aang and Aira are demolishing their food. Neither of them speak, too busy inhaling porridge at alarming speeds. Spoons click rapidly against bowls. Aang has porridge dripping down his cheek. Aira nearly chokes trying to swallow too fast, clearly in a hurry to start training.
Sokka stares at them in awe. “I think I’ve created a monster,” he says, pointing his spoon at Aira.
Katara watches in horror as porridge continues to leak down Aang’s chin. “Aang! Slow down!”
“No time,” Aang mumbles through a mouthful. “Airbending awaits.”
Aira nods seriously while chewing. “Very important.”
Sokka leans back with crossed arms, offended. “Wow. And here I thought I was the food enthusiast around here.”
“You still are,” Katara says flatly.
Aang suddenly finishes his bowl, slamming it down onto the sand with unnecessary drama. “All done!” Then he lets out the loudest burp imaginable. The sound echoes across the beach. Momo screeches. Appa snorts awake briefly. Several birds fly out of a nearby palm tree.
Sokka immediately doubles over laughing. Katara looks disgusted. “Aang!”
“What?” he asks innocently. He looks to his left and notices that Aira’s bowl is also empty now. He suddenly grabs her arm and jumps to his feet. “C’mon! Training time!” he starts dragging her down the shoreline before she can protest.
“Thanks for breakfast, Katara!” Aira calls over her shoulder.
Sokka and Katara watch as the two airbenders race down the beach, kicking up sand as they go. Aira’s laughter carries through the salty morning air, bright and carefree. Sokka smiles to himself as he watches her. Something in his chest feels strangely light.
Katara glances sideways at her brother, a knowing smile spreading across her face.
===============================
The shoreline stretches endlessly before them, glowing gold beneath the early morning sun. Aang and Aira walk far down the beach until they find a quiet stretch of untouched sand.
“This is perfect,” Aang says brightly.
Aira follows close behind, practically vibrating with excitement despite trying to appear calm. She watches as Aang drops his staff into the sand and sits cross-legged near the water’s edge. Then he pats the sand in front of him.
Aira blinks. “We’re… sitting?”
Aang grins knowingly. “Yep.”
“But I thought we were starting airbending training.”
“We are.”
Aira lowers herself onto the sand across from him, confused but curious. Aang settles his hands onto his knees comfortably. The wind stirs around him gently. “Before learning airbending,” he explains, “you have to learn how to quiet your mind.”
“Are you trying to teach me how to meditate? I already know how to meditate, my mother taught me growing up.” Aira says, having hoped for a more physical lesson today.
Aang grins at her, “Good, then this lesson will be easy.”
“Airbending is about freedom,” Aang says. “Not just freedom of movement, but freedom of spirit. Air is always flowing, always moving. If your mind is too crowded, it becomes harder to move with the world around you.”
Aira looks down at the sand. Her mind has been pretty crowded lately. Her chest tightens slightly.
Aang notices her expression. “You don’t have to force your thoughts away,” he says gently. “You just have to let them pass through you instead of holding onto them.” His words settle heavily in Aira’s chest.
Aang closes his eyes, Aira following suit. “Let’s focus on our breathing,” Aang instructs softly. “Slow breaths. Feel the air as you inhale through your nose and exhale through your mouth.”
Aira inhales deeply, the ocean air feeling cool against her skin.
“Good,” Aang says. “Now listen. Let the sounds of the world around you guide your thoughts through your mind. Let them flow like the ocean breeze.”
At first, Aira hears the obvious things. The waves. The wind. Distant seagulls. But as the silence stretches, more sounds begin to emerge. The rustle of palm leaves. The soft shifting sand beneath her clothes. Sokka cheering in the distance as he catches a fish. A tiny smile tugs at Aira’s lips.
Aira focuses on her breathing. In and out. In and out. But thoughts start to creep in. Her mother. The village. The Fire Nation soldiers. The fear she felt tied to that chair. Her breathing falters.
Aang speaks again, noticing her begin to spiral.
“Don’t fight your thoughts,” he says gently, eyes still closed. “Just acknowledge them and let them keep moving.”
Aira swallows hard. Slowly, she tries again. The thoughts come. Then pass. Like waves rolling onto the shore before retreating back into the ocean. She feels the tightness in her chest begin to loosen. The wind brushes against her skin softly, and her shoulders slowly relax.
Aang peeks one eye open slightly and notices. A small smile spreads across his face. “That’s it,” he says quietly.
After a few more minutes of quiet meditation, Aang opens his eyes and stretches his arms overhead. “Okay!” he says cheerfully, immediately ruining the serene atmosphere. “Now for the fun part!”
Aira laughs softly as she opens her eyes. Aang grins before hopping to his feet in one fluid motion. “Now,” he says, brushing sand off his robes, “time for movement.” Aira stands as well, excitement flashing across her face.
“Airbending is about spiral movements,” Aang explains. “It’s all about evasion and mobility. We don’t meet force head on, instead, we redirect around it.” He smiles.
Aira watches Aang quietly, soaking in his words.
He plants his staff into the sand before dropping into a loose stance. His movements are light and effortless. “The key to airbending is staying relaxed,” he explains. “If you’re too stiff, then you lose flow.” He keeps his torso straight as he holds up hands, keeping his elbows in but loose. He circles around her, his feet barely grazing the sand.
Aira tries mimicking his stance. Her knees bend slightly. Her arms lift uncomfortably. Aang stops for a second, watching her critically. “You’re too tense.” He walks behind her and gently nudges her shoulders downward. “Relax these.” Then he taps one of her elbows. “Loosen these.” He steps back and nods approvingly. “Better.”
Aira exhales slowly, a small smile on her face.
“Now,” Aang says excitedly, “let’s try some movement.” He suddenly lunges toward her. She yelps and stumbles backward in surprise.
“Wrong kind of movement,” Aang says with a grin. Aang demonstrates again, this time moving slowly. He steps lightly to the side in a smooth circular motion. “Airbenders move around attacks, not away from them. Big difference.” He motions for her to copy him.
Aira attempts the same movement but nearly trips over her own feet again. She manages to catch herself before she falls face-first into the sand. This is like Jet’s lessons all over again. “Walking in circles should not be this hard,” she says with a sigh.
“It gets easier,” he promises. For the next several minutes, Aang guides her through footwork patterns across the beach. Step. pivot. Turn. Redirect. At first Aira’s movements are awkward and hesitant. She keeps overthinking every step. But Aang remains endlessly patient.
“Stay light on your feet.”
“Don’t plant your heels.”
“Feel the air move around you. Let it guide you.”
Hours seem to pass without Aira noticing. The training slowly stops feeling embarrassing. And starts feeling… fun. Aang spins his staff once before pointing it at her like a challenge.
“Okay. Final test for today.”
Aira narrows her eyes suspiciously. “Why do you say that like you’re about to do something annoying?”
“Because I am.”
Before she can react, Aang airbends several bursts of wind directly at her feet, sand quickly shifting beneath her. Aira shrieks as the sand shifts, almost causing her to lose balance. But she quickly catches on, manifesting the lightlessness that Aang has been teaching her all day. He continues to bend gusts of air toward her feet. And Aira manages to sidestep all of them.
Well… most of them.
One misstep causes her to faceplant directly into the sand. She lifts her head, spitting sand out of her mouth. Aang laughs at her softly before holding out his hand for her to take. “Sorry,” he says with a laugh. He helps Aira stand to her feet.
“I think that’s enough for today. You did great!”
She smiles at him. “Thanks, Aang.” Aira bows at him. “Master Aang.”
He returns her bow with a large grin on his face. Then together, they walk side-by-side back to their campsite. The ocean breeze brushes against Aira’s skin as she walks. For the first time ever, she feels connected to the wind in a way she never has before.
She feels like an airbender.
==========================================
That night, the group sleeps beneath a sky overflowing with stars. The moon hangs low above the Mo Ce Sea, its pale reflection rippling across the dark water. Appa sleeps several yards away from camp, curled into him. Closer to the fire’s fading embers, the four friends sleep side by side on the sand. Katara and Aang sleep closest to the water, Momo sprawls across Aang’s lap while Aira lies between Katara and Sokka.
For a while, everything is peaceful. Then suddenly–
Aang jerks awake with a sharp gasp. He sits upright so quickly that Momo screeches in alarm and launches himself directly onto Katara’s stomach. “Ahh–Momo!” Katara yelps, jolting awake. Momo then ricochets off her and lands squarely onto Aira’s face. Aira muffles a startled yell beneath a pile of fur before tossing Momo sideways, who then sails directly into Sokka. Sokka wakes instantly with pure survival instincts. He shoots upright with his boomerang in one hand and blade in the other.
“What’s going on?” he blurts hoarsely, looking around. “Did we get captured again?”
Aang sits stiffly with his knees pulled to his chest, breathing unevenly. The panic in his expression fades quickly once he realizes where he is. “It’s nothing,” he says quietly. “I just had a bad dream. Go back to sleep.” Without another word, he lays back down facing away from the group, curling tighter into himself.
Aira notices Katara’s expression soften with concern.
“You don’t have to tell me twice,” Sokka mutters sleepily as she flops back onto the sand.
Katara ignores her brother, watching Aang carefully. The ocean breeze ruffles her hair slightly. “Aang,” she says softly, “you’ve been having a lot of nightmares lately.” She scoots a little closer to him. “Do you want to talk about it?”
Aang doesn’t answer. He just stays quiet. Aira watches his shoulders tense, his back still facing them. “I think…” he says, his voice small, “I just need some rest.” But the exhaustion sounds deeper than simple sleepiness. It sounds heavy. Sad.
Sokka glances over now too, some of the grogginess fading from his face. The joking expression he usually wears slips for a moment. Then, in typical Sokka fashion, he tries to lighten the mood. “You guys want to hear about my dream?” he asks.
Aira turns slightly toward him, already curious. But Katara immediately shoots him a look. A sharp, older-sister look, causing Sokka to deflate immediately. “That’s okay…” he mutters. “I didn’t want to talk about it anyway.”
Aira bites back a smile. She leans slightly toward him so only he can hear her. “You can tell me about your dream later if you want to.”
Sokka looks over at her, surprised. Then he smiles. “Yeah?”
“Yeah.”
The beach slowly falls quiet again afterward. The waves continue their endless rhythm against the shore as some of their group falls back into a peaceful sleep, but it doesn't come as easily to all of them that night.
=========================================
The following morning dawns bright and beautiful. The sky stretches endlessly above them in shades of pale blue, not a single cloud in sight. Seagulls circle overhead, their distant cries mixing with the rhythmic crash of waves against the shore.
Appa lets out a huge yawn as the group begins packing up camp for another day of flying north. Aira folds her blanket and carefully stuffs it into her bag before climbing on to Appa’s saddle to organize the rest of her things. The leather beneath her feet shifts unexpectedly, and suddenly her footing slips.
“Oh–!”
She pitches forward. Instinctively, she throws out her hands to catch herself, but before she can hit the saddle, strong hands grab firmly onto her arms. Aira gasps softly. Sokka stands directly in front of her, bracing her weight with both hands wrapped around her upper arms. His grip is steady and warm, keeping her balanced only inches away from him.
For a moment, neither of them moves.
Aira can feel her pulse fluttering wildly in her chest. She’s close enough to see the freckles dusted across Sokka’s nose. Close enough to notice the individual stands of hair in his ponytail and the way the morning sunlight catches his blue eyes.
Sokka blinks at her, equally startled. “You okay?” he asks, voice slightly higher than usual.
Aira realizes she’s still half-falling into him and immediately straightens herself. “Uh–yeah. Yeah, I’m okay.” She brushes some hair out of her face awkwardly. “Th-thanks, Sokka.”
“No problem,” he replies, his voice cracking embarrassingly on the last word.
Katara snorts from below Appa. “Very smooth, Sokka.”
Sokka whips around immediately. “I was being heroic!”
“You sounded like a strangled turtle duck,” Katara replies with a smile on her face.
“I did not.”
“You kinda did,” Aang chimes in helpfully while tightening Appa’s saddle straps.
Aira bites down on her lip to stop herself from laughing, though a small smile still slips through. Sokka notices immediately, his embarrassment melting into a grin. “Hey, at least somebody appreciates my heroics.”
“You caught someone who tripped,” Katara says plainly.
“Exactly. Heroic.”
Aang climbs onto Appa’s head and grabs the reins with excitement radiating off of him. “Look at those clear skies, buddy. Should be some smooth flying.”
“Well we better smoothly fly ourselves to a market, because we're out of food,” Katara says as she flips their food bag upside down. A pathetic trail of crumbs falls into the sand. Momo’s ears perk instantly. He dives onto the crumbs face-first, stuffing them into his mouth before anyone else can react.
“Guys, wait.” Sokka stiffens. “This was in my dream. We shouldn’t go to the market.”
“What happened in your dream?” Katara asks.
Sokka lowers his voice ominously. “Food eats people.”
Katara and Aang both look at Sokka with bored expressions. Aira pauses halfway through securing a strap on the saddle. “Food… ate people?”
“Yes.” Sokka crosses his arms seriously. “And Momo could talk.” Momo freezes. Sokka points accusingly at the lemur. “You said some very unkind things.”
Aira’s eyebrows lift with genuine curiosity. “Like what?”
Sokka leans closer and loudly whispers, “I can’t repeat it around the children.”
Aira giggles softly, trying to hide her smile behind her hand. But Sokka catches it anyway, visibly pleased with himself for making her laugh.
=========================================
The group eventually manages to find a small harbor town tucked along the edge of the sea. Fishing boats bob gently in the water while merchants shout over one another from crowded market stalls lining the docks. The salty air smells like fish, ocean water, and freshly cooked food drifting from nearby vendors.
Unfortunately for the group, smelling food and actually being able to buy food are two very different things. Aira, Aang, and Sokka stand off to the side while Katara inspects a large melon at one of the stalls. She lifts it to her ear and shakes it cautiously.
“I don’t know if I like the sound of that swishing,” Katara says skeptically.
The old woman running the stand looks personally offended. “Swishing means it’s ripe,” the vendor argues, stepping beside Katara gesturing. “It’s the ripe juices swishing around, eh?”
“How are we paying for this anyway?” Aira asks. “I thought we were out of money.”
Both Katara and the vendor freeze. Slowly, Katara lowers the melon back into the basket and offers the woman an awkward smile. Before anyone can react, the vendor yanks the basket of food straight out of Sokka’s hands. She gives Sokka a hard kick to the backside that nearly sends him tumbling into Aang.
Aira’s eyes widen. She glares at the woman, but Aang grabs her wrist and gently pulls her way. “Keep moving,” he mutters quickly.
Sokka rubs his behind dramatically as the four of them retreat farther down the docks. The group eventually stops near the edge of the harbor where the noise of the market becomes quieter. Fishing nets sway gently in the breeze.
“Aira,” Sokka says, still rubbing the sore spot on his back, “you were on your own for years. How’d you manage food?”
Aira shrugs slightly. “Mostly foraging. Berries. Nuts.” She glances toward the inland forests beyond the town. “That’s why I stayed in heavily wooded areas most of the time. It’s easier to survive there.”
Katara listens quietly, her expression softening.
Aira continues, “Plus, it’s easier finding enough food for one person.” She gestures toward Appa, who’s lazily chewing on a dock rope nearby. “Finding enough food for four people, a sky bison, and a lemur is… a little harder.”
“Touché,” Sokka says with a sigh. He slouches dramatically. “So, out of money and out of food. Now what are we supposed to do?”
“You could get a job, smart guy,” Katara says, crossing her arms. And as if the universe heard her, an older fisherman stomps down the dock while an older woman follows angrily behind him.
“We shouldn’t go out there!” the woman scolds. “Please! The fish can wait. There’s gonna be a terrible storm.”
“Agh, you’re crazy,” the fisherman grumbles. “It’s a nice day. No clouds, no wind, no nothing. So quit your nagging, woman,” he says frustratedly, pointing at the woman.
Aang suggests that they find shelter. But Sokka scoffs immediately. “Are you kidding? Shelter from what?” he asks incredulously.
Aira tilts her head thoughtfully. “I mean… haven’t you heard the phrase ‘the calm before the storm’?”
Sokka opens his mouth, pauses, then points at her. “Okay, don’t start siding against me too.”
The older woman continues, “My joints say there’s going to be a storm, a bad one.”
“Well it’s your joints against my brain,” the fisherman says. “I’ll find a new fish hauler and pay him double what you get!”
Sokka perks up and walks toward the fisherman, raising his hand. “I’ll go.” His three friends watch him silently, so he turns to them defensively. “What? You said get a job. And this guy is paying double,” he grins.
“Double? Who told you that nonsense?” the fisherman asks with a raised brow.
Katara pinches the bridge of her nose, and Aira smacks her hand against her forehead.
He isn’t getting paid at all, is he?
=====================================
Sokka helps the fisherman haul supplies onto the old fishing boat, carrying crates of bait and tangled nets across the damp wooden deck. The boat creeks with every wave that crashes against it. Far out across the ocean, dark storm clouds gather, approaching ominously. They loom over the water, swallowing the horizon bit by bit. Occasional flashes of lightning flicker in the distance, illuminating the clouds from the inside.
The sight sends unease curling through Aira’s stomach.
I hate being right.
The air feels heavier now. The wind is sharper. Aang stands near the edge of the dock with his glider tucked beneath one arm, staring nervously toward the incoming storm.
“Sokka,” he says carefully, “I really don’t think this is a good idea.”
Sokka tosses another coil of rope into the boat. “I said I was gonna do the job.” He dusts off his hands stubbornly. “I can’t back out now just because of a little bad weather.”
Aira walks closer, concern written plainly across her face. “Sokka, no job is worth risking your life over.” She gestures toward the ocean. “Look at that storm. We’ll figure something else out.”
Sokka avoids her eyes while tightening one of the ropes on the boat. “We need food, Aira.”
“We need you alive.”
For a brief second, Sokka falters. But then the fisherman barks from inside the boat. “Boy! You gonna stand around flirting all day or help me haul these nets?”
Aira blinks. Sokka’s face turns bright red instantly. “I am NOT–” Sokka starts loudly before immediately tripping over a bucket.
Aang snorts. Katara hides a smile behind her hand.
The older woman folds her arms smugly. “The girl and the boy with the tattoos have more sense than either of you.”
The fisherman pauses mid-step. “Boy with tattoos…” he squints toward Aang. “...airbender tattoos. Well I’ll be a hog monkey’s uncle.” Realization dawns across his weathered face. “You’re the Avatar, ain’t you?”
“That’s right,” Katara says proudly. Aira nods with a smile on her face.
“Well don’t be so smiley about it,” the man says harshly. “The Avatar disappeared for a hundred years. You turned your back on the world.” He points a finger at Aang’s chest.
Katara immediately comes to Aang’s defense. “Don’t yell at him! Aang would never turn his back on anyone.”
The fisherman scoffs, unconvinced. He then goes on to blame Aang for the past hundred years of war and suffering. Aira feels heat surge through her chest so fast it almost makes her dizzy. Katara once again cuts in. “Aang is the bravest person I know. He has done nothing but help people and save lives since I met him,” she says with her hands on her hips. “It’s not his fault he disappeared, right Aang?”
Both girls turn to look back at Aang, but he takes a step backward before opening his glider with a snap and launching himself into the sky. Aira spins furiously toward the fisherman, ready to tackle him into the ocean, but Katara quickly grabs Aira’s arm before she can lunge at him.
“Forget him,” Katara urges. “We need to go after Aang.”
Aira clenches her fists so tightly that her nails dig into her palms, but she nods. The two girls and Momo hurry onto Appa.
“Yip yip!” Katara calls.
Appa launches into the sky just as the first cold gust of storm wind slams into them. Rain begins shortly after. It starts as a drizzle but then the skies open completely. Rain pelts against Aira’s skin so hard it stings. Wind screams past them as thunder cracks violently overhead. Appa growls uneasily while fighting against the storm.
Aira scans the skies frantically. “Katara, we need to find him fast!”
“I know!” Katara yells over the storm. Her hair flips wildly around her face as she grips the reins tighter. “I’m trying!”
Lightning flashes nearby, illuminating the ocean below in brief bursts of silver-white light. Aira’s stomach twists tiger with every passing minute. Not just because of the storm. But because she knows those words hurt Aang more than he let anyone see.
Eventually, through sheets of rain, Aira spots a dark opening carved into the side of a mountain.
“There!” she points. A faint silhouette sits just inside the cave entrance. “Aang!”
Katara steers Appa toward the cave immediately. The moment they land, Aira practically jumps off Appa and rushes inside. Water drips heavily from her soaked clothes onto the stone floor beneath her feet.
Aang kneels further inside the cave with his head lowered. “I’m sorry for running away,” he says quietly.
Katara approaches gently. “It’s okay. That fisherman was way out of line.”
“Seriously,” Aira adds, still angry. “He’s just a bitter old jerk who likes blaming other people for his problems.”
Aang gives a weak smile at her attempt to defend him. But it fades quickly. “Actually…” he says softly, “he wasn’t that far off.”
Appa ducks into the cave behind them with Momo perched on his head. The massive bison rumbles affectionately as Aang wraps his arms around his fur. Aira walks over and rests a hand carefully on Aang’s shoulder. Another gust of freezing wind blows rain deeper into the cave, causing Aira to shiver violently.
Katara notices immediately and quickly kneels near a pile of dry brush near the cave wall. Within moments, a warm fire crackles to life. The three of them settle near the flames. Steam rises faintly from their soaked clothes as the warmth slowly pushes back the cold.
And there, with rain hammering outside the cave and thunder shaking the mountainside, Aang finally tells them everything. About the monks. About finding out he was the Avatar. About being afraid.
Aira listens silently, her chest aching more and more with every word. Especially when Aang describes being separated from Monk Gyatso.
“They wanted to take away everything I knew and everyone I loved!” Aang says angrily, standing suddenly. His tattoos begin glowing bright blue.
Aira’s breath catches.
The air inside the cave shifts violently. Wind explodes outward from Aang in a burst of emotion, sending the fire scattering toward them.
“Whoa! Hot cinders!” Katara yelps, shielding herself.
Aira reacts instinctively, thrusting her hands forward and airbending the hot cinders harmlessly away before they can hit anyone.
The wind settles, and Aang’s tattoos dim. “I’m sorry,” he whispers immediately. He sits back down and quietly explains the rest. How he ran away. How the storm swallowed him and Appa whole. How the Avatar State froze them inside the iceberg for a hundred years.
“And then the Fire Nation attacked our temple. My people needed me and I wasn’t there to help. The world needed me and I wasn’t there to help. That fisherman was right, I did turn my back on the world.”
“Aang, you’re being too hard on yourself,” Katara consoles. “Even if you did run away, I think it was meant to be. If you had stayed, you would’ve been killed with all the other airbenders.”
“You don’t know that,” he denies.
“I know it’s meant to be this way. The world needs you now. You give people hope.” Katara smiles at Aang, and he smiles back, her words having a positive effect.
Aira nods in agreement. “We can’t change the past,” she says quietly. “But we can decide what happens next.” Aang looks toward her. “We’re going to help you end this war,” Aira continues. “And afterward… you and I can make sure the Air Nomad culture survives. Together.”
Emotion flickers across Aang’s face. Before she can react, he launches himself forward and wraps his arms tightly around her. Aira hugs him back immediately.
Then suddenly–
“Help!” the fisherman’s wife cries frantically as she appears at the cave entrance. “Please!”
The group jumps to their feet. The woman explains breathlessly that her husband and Sokka still haven’t returned from the ocean. Instantly, the three of them rush back onto Appa. The storm outside has become monstrous now. Rain crashes against them sideways. Massive waves as big as mountains churn below. Lightning tears across the sky. Aira grips the saddle tightly as panic claws at her chest.
Please let Sokka be okay.
“There!” Aang points. Far below, the tiny fishing boat is being violently tossed between enormous waves. Sokka and the fisherman cling desperately to the sail ropes as the boat tilts dangerously sideways.
Aang leaps from Appa without hesitation. He lands on the boat with impossible precision and quickly ties ropes around Sokka and the fisherman. Then Aang swoops overhead. He jumps back on Appa and pulls both men upward.
They both scream the entire way through the air until they crash onto Appa’s saddle directly beside Aira. She grabs onto Sokka immediately to steady him. “You okay?” she asks.
“Never better,” he wheezes.
Then a massive wave crashes over all of them. Everything disappears underwater. The current tears violently at Aira’s body as she clings desperately to the saddle. Saltwater burns her eyes. She glances sideways and sees Sokka slipping. His fingers lose their grip, and without thinking, Aira lunges forward and grabs his hand tightly.
Sokka’s eyes widen. For a terrifying second the ocean current fights against her grip. Then suddenly, blue light erupts around them as Aang enters the Avatar State. A sphere of swirling air forms around Appa, forcing the ocean back and pulling everyone safely into the saddle. Sokka coughs violently before looking toward Aira. Their hands are still clasped together tightly. He gives her a breathless smile. “Guess we’re even now.”
Relief floods through her so intensely she almost laughs. Appa bursts back above the ocean surface. As they soar through the storm, they pass dangerously close to a Fire Nation ship cutting through the waves. Standing on the deck is a teenage boy with a burn scar over one eye. He stares directly at Aang with fury burning in his expression.
Aira watches him curiously as they fly past. “Who’s that?”
“Uhh, that,” Sokka says carefully, “is a very long story.”
===================================
They make it back inside the cave soaked to the bone, shivering as rainwater drips from their clothes onto the stone floor. The fisherman practically stumbles the second his feet hit solid ground again. His wife rushes toward him immediately, pulling him into a fierce hug. She then smacks him on the chest, demanding that he owes Aang an apology. The man tries to offer a free fish to Aang as a thank you, but Aang politely declines, saying he doesn’t eat meat.
“Fish ain’t meat,” the fisherman says incredulously.
Aang walks away and joins Katara and Aira near the entrance to the cave. The storm outside has finally begun to calm down, the rain softening into a gentle patter against the rocks. Aang stands bedside them with a small smile on his face, exhaustion lingering in his eyes but no longer weighing him down the same way.
“You guys were right,” he admits softly. “I’m done dwelling on the past. I can’t make guesses about how things would’ve turned out if I hadn’t run away. I’m here now, and I’m going to make the most of it,” he finishes with a smile on his face.
The fisherman walks up to Aang and places a hand on his shoulder. “If you weren’t here now, well, I guess I wouldn’t be either. Thank you for saving my life, Avatar.”
Eventually the rain stops completely. Light spills into the cave entrance as the clouds begin to part. The ocean beyond the cliffs has settled into gentle rolling waves once more. Everyone slowly gathers their things and heads outside.
The fisherman and his wife prepare to leave for home together. They disappear down the rocky path side by side, still arguing quietly with one another. Aira watches them leave with a faint smile before stepping beside Sokka.
The ocean breeze brushes through their damp clothes and tousles their hair. For a moment, neither of them say anything.
Then, without looking at him, Aira asks casually, “So… did you get paid?”
Sokka lets out the most exhausted sigh she’s ever heard. His shoulders sag dramatically as he slowly lifts both hands into the air. Resting in his palms is a single fish.
Aira stares at it. Sokka stares at it.
“... This,” he says painfully, “was not worth almost drowning for.”
Aira bites the inside of her cheek trying not to laugh. But suddenly, Momo launches through the air and snatches the fish directly out of Sokka’s hands. There’s a stunned beat of silence. Then–
“My fish!” Sokka yells. He bolts after Momo, who chitters victoriously as he runs into the cave away from Sokka.
Katara crosses her arms beside Aira with an amused shake of her head. “He really almost died for that fish.”
“Apparently,” Aira giggles. She watches the two of them and warmth spreads through her chest. Not long ago, she’d been alone. Now she has this–chaos, laughter, friendship.
Word Count: 3.3k (shorter chapter this time sorry)
Warnings: Mild violence. Mentions of grief.
Chapter 4 | Chapter 6
Chapter Masterlist
Aira leans weakly against the rough bark of a tree, exhaustion settling deep into her bones. Her eyes stay shut. The aftermath of her crying still clings to her miserably–her head throbbing, her face sticky with dried tears, her eyes swollen and aching.
Every time she thinks she’s finally calmed down, another wave of shame crashes over her. Their expressions replay endlessly in her mind. Katara’s disappointment. Sokka’s hurt. And worst of all–Aang’s face. That quiet devastation in his eyes.
Aira squeezes her eyes tighter shut. She wishes she could go back. Back to the first day. Back to when they flew away from Jet’s hideout together on Appa. She should’ve told them. Before they trusted her. Before Aang opened up to her. Before Sokka smiled at her like she belonged bedside them. It would’ve saved everyone so much pain. Including herself.
A tiny chirp pulls Aira from her thoughts. She slowly opens her eyes. A small sparrowkeet has landed a few feet from her. The little creature hops closer cautiously, its tiny head tilted curiously toward her. Another soft chirp. It hops closer again, then suddenly–
FWOOSH.
A blast of fire streaks past Aira’s legs. Heat explodes against her skin. The ground beside her blackens instantly from the impact. The sparrowkeet screeches in terror and flies away.
Aira jumps upright immediately, heart lurching violently. She spins around and freezes. Several Fire Nation soldiers stand only yards away. One of them holds a poster in his hands. A rough drawing of her face stares back at her from the page. The soldier points immediately.
“That’s her,” he says sharply. “That’s the girl that was seen riding the Avatar’s bison away from Gaipan!”
Panic floods Aira instantly.
No. No no no–
She turns to bolt into the forest but a wall of fire erupts directly in front of her. Aira stumbles backward as the flames roar upward, blocking her escape completely. Her breathing turns shallow as she realizes that she’s trapped.
The soldiers slowly begin surrounding her. Aira raises her hands instinctively into a defensive stance. Her expression hardens despite the terror clawing through her chest. She can’t let them see how afraid she is. Even if her heartbeat feels violent enough to crack her ribs open.
One of the soldiers suddenly charges with a yell. He swings a fist toward her face. Aira ducks underneath it just in time.
Another soldier rushes her immediately, slamming his shoulder directly into her torso. The force knocks the air from her lungs. Both of them crash violently onto the forest floor, and pain explodes through her side.
Instinct kicks in and she quickly twists her body, using the soldier's momentum against him to roll until she lands on top. She goes to shove herself upright when suddenly pain burns across her scalp. A third soldier grabs a fistful of her hair and yanks her backward hard enough to force her standing.
Tears sting Aira’s eyes instantly. The soldier holds her tightly in place while fire burns brightly in his other hand only inches from her face. The heat radiates across her skin. It’s close. Far too close. Aira goes completely still as fear locks every muscle in her body.
The soldiers quickly seize the opportunity. They wrench her arms painfully behind her back and tie her wrists tightly together with rope. Aira struggles but another soldier forces a strip of cloth harshly between her teeth and ties it behind her head so she can’t yell for help.
Her breathing grows frantic through her nose. One hard shove between her shoulder blades forces her forward.
“Move.”
Aira stumbles ahead while the soldiers escort her deeper through the forest. Two leads in front. One follows directly behind her. Every time she slows even slightly, another shove sends her moving again.
Branches scrape against her arms as they walk. Her tied hands ache. And beneath the panic clawing through her mind, another thought settles heavily into her chest.
The others don’t know where she is.
Eventually the trees clear enough to reveal a large metal wagon waiting along a dirt path. More soldiers stand guard bedside it. One of them opens the back doors, and darkness awaits inside. Aira immediately digs her heels into the dirt in resistance, but rough hands grab her beneath the arms. Then suddenly, she’s thrown violently into the wagon.
Aira crashes hard against the hard floor, and pain shoots through her shoulder. The doors slam shut behind her instantly. And darkness consumes everything.
==================================
Meanwhile, Aang sits quietly in front of Appa, elbows resting on his knees as his thoughts churn so fast that they make his head spin. Beside him, Katara gently rubs his arm in silent comfort, while Sokka paces nearby with his arms crossed tightly over his chest.
Very little time has passed since Aira revealed herself as an airbender, yet it feels like the entire world has shifted beneath their feet.
Aang isn’t the last airbender.
The realization is so enormous that none of them know how to fully process it.
“How is this even possible?” Sokka blurts, throwing his hands into the air. “I thought all the airbenders were extinct. Well—except for you,” he adds awkwardly toward Aang.
Aang barely reacts. He stares at the ground, brows furrowed. “I don’t know,” he admits softly. His voice sounds distant, almost breathless in disbelief.
Katara’s expression tightens with hurt. “But why didn’t she tell us?” she asks quietly. “Does she trust us that little?”
No one answers. Because the truth is, they’re all wondering the same thing. The silence stretches painfully between them until Sokka finally looks back toward Aang.
“Aang,” he says carefully, “what did you mean earlier? When you said she should’ve told you last night?”
Aang exhales slowly. “When you guys were traveling with the tribes through the canyon, Aira and I stayed together the whole time,” he explains. “We started talking about the Air Nomads. About my people.” His expression pinches painfully. “I told her how hard it is being the last airbender. How alone I feel sometimes.”
Katara’s face softens immediately.
Aang swallows hard before continuing. “She comforted me. She hugged me while I cried.” His voice grows quieter. “But she still didn’t tell me she was an airbender too.”
Sokka’s frustration fades slightly, replaced with confusion.
Katara looks troubled. “There has to be a reason,” she says, almost trying to convince herself. “There has to be.”
Sokka nods firmly after a moment. “You’re right,” he says. “There is a reason. And we’re gonna find out what it is.” He points toward the direction Aira disappeared into the forest. “She can’t have gone far.”
Without another word, the three head into the trees.
The forest is eerily quiet. Only the sound of crunching leaves and snapping twigs follows them as they search deeper into the woods. Then suddenly, Katara stops.
“Wait.”
Ahead of them, a patch of forest sits blackened and scorched. Thin trails of smoke still curl upward from the burnt vegetation. It’s fresh. Very fresh. The three cautiously approach the scene. Sokka’s eyes immediately begin scanning the area with sharp focus. Then he spots something lying in the grass near the edge of the burned ground–and his stomach drops. He quickly rushes over and picks it up.
Katara gasps. “Is that Aira’s bag?”
Sokka grips the strap tightly in his hand. “...Yes.” the single word comes out tense, worry creeping into his voice. His eyes dart rapidly around the clearing now, searching for signs of movement, signs of struggle–anything.
His expression hardens. “Aira was taken by firebenders.”
Katara covers her mouth in shock. Aang’s head snaps toward him. “What?” he asks. Panic bleeds into his voice. “How do you know?”
Sokka points toward one concentrated blast mark burned into the earth. “That scorch pattern,” he explains quickly. “It’s from firebending. One clean shot.” He gestures toward the rest of the damaged vegetation. “The rest probably caught fire afterward.”
Sokka crouches lower, eyes narrowing. Then he notices faint footprints pressed into the dirt. They’re barely visible, but enough. “They went this way.”
The three immediately take off after the trail.
The farther they follow the tracks, the faster they move. Eventually, the footsteps stop, replaced by wagon tracks. Branches whip past them as they hurry through the forest, desperation pushing them forward.
Finally, the trees begin to thin. And through the brush they spot a large Fire Nation camp hidden within the woods. Soldiers patrol between rows of tents while torches burn brightly against the darkening sky. The trio quickly duck behind thick bushes before they’re seen.
Katara peers nervously through the leaves. “Well… now what?” she whispers. “There’s soldiers everywhere. We can’t just walk in there.”
Sokka studies the camp carefully, his mind already working through the possibilities. “First we figure out where they’re keeping her,” he says quietly. “Then we get in and out as fast as possible.”
“But how are we supposed to know where she is? She could be in any one of those tents,” Aang groans. Then Katara suddenly grabs both of their arms.
“Wait.”
She points toward a red tent near the edge of the camp. Sokka and Aang look just in time to see two Fire Nation soldiers step inside. The tent flap opens briefly–just enough to reveal Aira inside.
Aang’s breath catches. Sokka’s grip tightens around Aira’s bag.
“There she is.”
The flaps close again. Sokka immediately lowers himself back behind the bushes, thinking fast.
“Okay,” he says quietly. “Here’s the plan. We circle around the perimeter of the camp and wait for an opening. Then we sneak in through the back, grab Aira, and get out before anyone notices.”
Katara nods immediately. Aang grips his staff tightly. None of them say it out loud but all three are thinking the same thing.
They are not leaving without her.
==========
Aira is currently tied to a chair inside a Fire Nation tent, wrists bound so tightly that the rope bites into her skin every time she moves. The coarse fibers scrape against her raw wrists as she twists and pulls, but it’s useless. The knots refuse to budge. Her breathing shakes.
Think. Think.
But every thought crashes into panic before she can hold onto it long enough to form a plan. The tent flap suddenly opens, and two soldiers stride inside. Aira stiffens immediately. One of them approaches her slowly, almost casually, before bracing both hands against the arms of her chair and leaning down into her space. He yanks the cloth gag from her mouth.
“Hi there, little lady,” he says with a crooked smile.
The sour smell of his breath hits her instantly, making her stomach churn. Aira turns her face away in disgust, but the soldier only chuckles. The back of his hand drags along her cheek in a mockingly gentle gesture before his fingers suddenly clamp around her jaw.
Hard.
Aira winces as he forces her to look at him.
“It was pure luck we found you wandering around those woods,” he says. “The same girl who helped save Fire Nation soldiers from that flood in Gaipan… then flew off on the Avatar’s bison.”
At the mention of Appa, her pulse spikes.
The soldier's grip tightens. “Now you’re going to tell us exactly where the Avatar is.”
Aira’s eyes widen slightly, but she says nothing. She won’t. The soldier stares at her for a long moment before shoving her face away in irritation. Then–
Crack.
His hand collides with her cheek hard enough to snap her head sideways. Pain explodes across her face. Aira gasps sharply, the sting immediate and burning. Heat floods the wounded skin as her eyes water involuntarily. She tastes blood where her teeth cut the inside of her mouth.
“Let’s try that again,” the soldier says coldly. “Where is the Avatar?”
Aira slowly turns back toward him, breathing uneven. “I don’t know,” she says hoarsely. Then her glare hardens despite the fear clawing at her chest. “And even if I did… I wouldn’t tell you.”
The second soldier steps toward now, holding a small flame in his palm. The fire flickers dangerously close to her injured cheek. Not enough to burn. But enough to threaten. Enough to make her flinch.
Before he can continue, another soldier peeks through the tent flap. “Sir, Commander Zhao sent for you. Says it’s urgent."
The two men exchange annoyed looks. The first soldier points a finger at Aira. “You got lucky... For now.” Then the three of them disappear outside, and the tent falls silent.
Aira sags against the chair in relief, shaky breaths escaping her lungs. Tears prick at her eyes but she forces them back.
Don’t cry. Don’t let them break you.
Her cheek throbs violently. Her wrists ache. Fear twists through her stomach so hard it makes her nauseous.
How am I getting out of this?
Then suddenly–a hand clamps over her mouth. Aira jerks violently in terror, muffled cries escaping into the palm.
“Shhh,” a familiar voice whispers urgently bedside her ear. “It’s me.”
Sokka.
Relief crashes through her so fast it nearly hurts.
“We’re getting you out of here,” he murmurs.
Aira’s shoulders sag instantly as Sokka crouches behind the chair and hurriedly begins sawing through the ropes with his knife. His movements are quick and tense. The second the ropes loosen, feeling rushes painfully back into Aira’s hands.
“You okay?” he asks quietly.
Aira nods weakly, though she can barely feel her fingers. Sokka helps her stand, steadying her when her knees wobble beneath her. Then his eyes finally settle fully on her face. On the red welt blooming across her cheek. On the bruise forming near her jaw. His expression darkens immediately. For a moment, Aira can practically see the anger simmering beneath his skin.
“They hit you,” he says softly.
It isn’t really a question. Aira looks away. Sokka’s jaw clenches hard enough to twitch. He grips the knife tighter in his hand, fighting the sudden urge to storm back into the camp and make those soldiers regret touching her. But getting Aira out safely matters more. So he swallows the anger down.
“C’mon,” he says gently. He lifts the back edge of the tent and helps Aira crawl underneath it. The moment they emerge outside, daylight floods Aira’s vision so harshly she has to squint.
Katara and Aang are waiting nearby. The second Katara sees Aira’s face, her expression crumples with concern. “Aira…”
Aang looks horrified. Sokka places a careful hand against the middle of Aira’s back, guiding her forward protectively. “Let’s go before they realize she’s gone.”
The four of them sprint through the trees. Aira’s lungs burning from exhaustion and adrenaline. Eventually Appa comes into view, waiting exactly where they left him. Relief floods her chest so intensely she almost collapses.
They hurriedly climb aboard, and moments later Appa launches into the sky.
Only once the forest becomes distant beneath them does the tension finally begin to ease. The wind rushes through Aira’s hair as she sits curled on the saddle, still trembling slightly from everything that happened.
Aang eventually crawls over beside her, with Katara and Sokka following close behind. Katara’s eyes soften the moment she gets another good look at Aira’s injuries.
“Are you okay?” she asks quietly, voice full of warmth.
Aira stares down at her hands. “I’m okay now,” she says softly. “Becuase of you guys.” Her throat tightens. “Thank you for saving me, I didn’t deserve it.”
“What?” Aang blurts out immediately. “Aira, don’t say that.”
“No one deserves that,” Katara says firmly.
Aang’s expression suddenly falters. Guilt creeps across his face. “This happened because of me,” he says quietly. “The Fire Nation only wanted you because you were with the Avatar.”
“Aang, no,” Aira says.
He avoids her eyes. “People keep getting hurt because of me.”
“This wasn’t your fault,” Aira insists. “If anything, it was mine.” The group looks at her. Aira curls her fingers tightly into her sleeves. “I should’ve told you from the beginning,” she admits quietly. “I’m sorry.”
Silence settles over them. Then Sokka finally speaks. “Why didn’t you?” His tone is gentle, confused instead of angry.
Aira squeezes her eyes shut briefly before taking a shaky breath. “When my father died, my mom and I were already struggling,” she begins softly. “Two years later… I found out I could airbend. A bitter laugh escapes her. “The first time it happened, people in my village saw.” They panicked. Said I'd bring the Fire Nation to them. Said I was dangerous.”
Katara’s face falls.
“So they banished us.” The words come out flat. “My mother and I left together, but she got sick not long after.” Aira’s voice wavers despite her efforts to steady it. “Really sick.” A tear slips down her face. “She died a few months later.”
Nobody speaks. The only sound is the wind rushing around Appa.
Sokka watches her quietly, something aching in his chest as he listens. He knows that grief. Knows what it feels like to lose a parent too young and spend years carrying the hollow space they left behind.
“But why did you hide it from us?” he asks softly.
Aira wipes quickly at her eyes. “Because before my mother died, she made me promise not to airbend anymore.” Her voice cracks. “She wanted me to be safe, so she did what she thought was right to protect me,” Aira expresses.
Katara’s expression softens immediately with understanding. “And you were trying to keep her promise,” she says quietly.
Aira nods. “I didn’t mean to hurt you guys. I just…” She looks down helplessly. “I was scared.”
Katara reaches over first, gently taking Aira’s hand. “I’m sorry we pushed you away.”
Then Aang suddenly lights up with realization. “If you’re an airbender…” HIs eyes shine with cautious hope. “Then maybe there are others too.”
Sokka rubs the back of his neck in uncertainty. “Maybe. But Aira’s situation sounds pretty rare. No one has seen another airbender in a hundred years.”
“So how is this even possible?” Katara questions.
Aira recalls the stories her parents used to share about Aira’s great grandfather–Kairu.
“He was an air nomad that hailed from the Northern Air Temple. Kairu was visiting the Northern Water Tribe when the Fire Nation first attacked his people. Word of the attacks spread fast, so he stayed hidden in the Northern Water Tribe, safe from the start of the war.”
Her friends listen intently, engrossed by her words.
“Several years later, he wanted to search for surviving air nomads, so he went off alone. He scoured the world for years but didn’t find a single air nomad or even signs of one. So he settled down in a small Earth Kingdom village secluded in a dense forest. There he met my great grandmother and started a family. He hid his airbending for the rest of his life, but he still passed down the ways of his people. My parents and grandparents were all very spiritual people–their habits, their way of life, their outlook on the world–all descended from my great grandfather’s teachings.”
As she speaks, Aang listens like every word is precious. Like hearing about another air nomad–even one long gone–is enough to stitch together tiny pieces of his broken world.
When Aira finishes her story, silence settles again. Then she turns fully toward Aang.
“Aang,” she says carefully, “if you’re willing… I'd really like you to teach me airbending." She politely bows at him. He bows back with a smile before engulfing her in a big hug.
Katara laughs and joins the embrace, wrapping her arms around both of them. After a moment, she reaches out and grabs Sokka’s wrist, tugging him closer too.
Sokka groans dramatically. “Okay, okay, group hug, I get it–”
But he’s smiling when he finally wraps an arm around them anyway.
High above the clouds, the four of them remain tangled together for a moment longer. Not just teammates. Not just fellow travelers. But family.
Aira rests against Appa’s saddle, arms loosely wrapped around her knees as she stares out at the horizon. The sky stretches endlessly around them, painted in deep blue hues and streaks of gold as the sun begins its slow descent. Clouds drift beneath them, close enough to touch if she leaned over far enough.
They’ve been flying for hours now. Long enough for the adrenaline from the village to wear off. Long enough for Aira to start thinking again.
Once Sokka explained what happened–that Aira helped him warn the town and turned against Jet–Katara and Aang welcomed her surprisingly easily. Easier than she expected. And now here she is, flying across the sky with them like she belongs.
But does she?
She doesn’t exactly know where to go from here. She could leave. Keep moving like she always has. Traveling alone from village to village, surviving one day at a time. Never staying long enough to form roots.
It’s safe. Simple. Lonely.
Or… She could ask to stay with them. Ask Aang to teach her airbending. To teach her about her heritage. This could be her only chance. Her only chance to learn about the part of herself she’s spent years hiding.
Aira closes her eyes briefly. And immediately she sees her mother. Her soft eyes. Her gentle hands smoothing back her hair.
You promised me.
The memory hits like ice cold water. Aira’s chest tightens slightly. Right. The promise. Stay hidden. Stay safe. Don’t let people know who you are. Because airbenders bring danger. Because being discovered ruins lives.
“Aira?” Katara’s voice gently pulls her from her thoughts. Aira opens her eyes and turns slightly. Katara is watching her, curiosity softening her expression. “If you don’t mind me asking…” Katara hesitantly begins, “how did you end up with Jet?”
She pauses briefly.
“I mean… where are your parents?”
Aira stills. Across from her, both Aang and Sokka glance over, waiting quietly for an answer. The attention makes her chest tighten. Her gaze drops to her lap. She bites lightly at the inside of her cheek as emotion rises faster than she was prepared for.
She hadn’t talked about this in a long time. Not out loud. Not to anyone.
“My parents are…” her voice catches. She swallows hard and tries again. “They’re gone.” The words barely rise above a whisper. “My father died in the war when I was little,” she continues quietly. “And my mother passed away a few years ago from a sickness.”
Aira keeps her eyes fixed downward. “Ive been on my own ever since.” The pain in her voice is impossible to hide. Silence settles over the group. It’s heavy. The kind of silence built from empathy. Aira can feel them looking at her, but none of them interrupt. None of them push. And somehow that almost makes it harder.
Katara’s expression softens further. “What about your home?” she asks gently. “Why didn’t you stay?”
The question hits harder than the others. Because this one has an answer that she’s spent years avoiding. Aira’s throat tightens. She could lie. She’s done it before.
The Fire Nation destroyed my town.
Easy. Clean. Sympathetic. Or–she could tell the truth. That she was banished. That the people she grew up with looked at her with fear. That being an airbender made her dangerous in their eyes. That her mother chose exile over letting the village turn against her daughter.
Aira’s chest suddenly feels too tight to breathe properly. The words sit in her throat–but they won’t come out. She must hesitate for too long because Katara’s expression shifts. “It’s okay,” she says softly. “You don’t have to talk about it if you’re not ready.” She reaches over and gently places a hand on Aira’s shoulder. The gesture is so warm. So instinctively comforting. “I didn’t mean to pry.”
Something about Katara’s voice nearly breaks Aira’s composure. It’s so gentle and patient. The sort of kindness that Aira hasn’t allowed herself to lean on since her mother died.
“No,” Aira says quickly, shaking her head. “It’s okay.” Her voice is quieter now. “I’ve just…” she exhales shakily. “I’ve been alone for so long.” The admission feels strangely vulnerable. “I’m not really used to talking about this stuff with other people.” She gives Katara a small smile that doesn’t quite reach her eyes. “I think I've kept everything bottled up for so long that I don’t even know how to say it out loud.”
Katara’s hand remains on her shoulder for another second before pulling back slowly. Not pushing. Just there.
“But what about Jet?” Aang asks. “How long were you with him?” There’s no suspicion in his expression. Only curiosity and concern.
“I met him a few months ago,” she explains. “I ran into some Fire Nation soldiers, and the Freedom Fighters stepped in.” A faint smile flickers briefly at the memory. “They saved my life. And they took me in after that.” Aira pauses, searching for the right words. “I never really got close with anyone there, though,” she admits. “Not fully.”
Sokka watches her quietly.
“I don’t know… I always felt outside of everything.” Her brows pull together slightly. “Like everyone else already belonged to something I didn’t.” Her jaw tightens subtly as thoughts of Jet resurface. The lies. The dam. The way he spoke about innocent people like they were expendable. “And I guess now I know why.” The words come out more bitter than she intended.
Aira looks away quickly, staring back out at the clouds before anyone can see the hurt still lingering there. Because part of her is still grieving it. Not just the betrayal. But the loss of what she thought she’d found.
=========================
Eventually, Appa begins his descent toward their designated camp site for the evening. He lands with a thud, sending a small gust of wind through the dirt around them.
Everyone immediately slips into motion. They’ve clearly done this dozens of times before. Sokka starts unpacking the tents and supplies with practiced efficiency. Katara heads into the trees to gather firewood, while Aang volunteers to forage for food nearby.
Aira ends up with the task of collecting drinking water from the nearby stream. She doesn’t mind this task at all, finding the quiet sounds of flowing water to be oddly calming.
But by the time she returns, balancing two filled containers carefully in her arms, the peaceful atmosphere is… gone. Sokka and Katara begin bickering over the proper use of the tarp–Sokka says it makes a good blanket during dry season, where Katara says the tarp is meant to protect the tent from rain. The disagreement escalates until they both yell in frustration and give up on their respective chores, facing away from each other with their arms crossed.
Aira pauses several feet away, blinking.
The tent behind them has collapsed, lying in a heap in the dirt while scattered firewood litters the ground nearby. Apparently things escalated quickly. Aira stares for a second, fascinated despite herself. She’s never had siblings. Do all siblings argue like this?
Somehow this feels less like animosity and more like… a routine. A very loud routine.
A few moments later, Aang walks up next to Aira with an armful of food, “Ok, I got the grub if you guys got the–” he hesitates when he notices the state of the campsite–the collapsed tent, the abandoned firewood. The two glaring siblings refusing to look at each other. “Hey, where’s the campfire, and what happened to the tent?”
Katara and Sokka continue to bicker, they even resort to namecalling. Katara grabs a stray stick and hurls it at Sokka. The stick bounces harmlessly off Sokka’s forehead with a pathetic thunk.
This causes both Aira and Aang to snicker.
“Okay, listen guys. Harsh words won't solve problems, action will. Why don’t you just switch jobs?” Aang suggests as he raises his hands diplomatically.
The siblings appear content with this suggestion, and go off their separate ways to complete their newly assigned tasks without another word. Just like that. Problem solved.
Aira watches them separate in amazement. “That actually worked,” she says under her breath.
Aang beams proudly. “You see that? Settling feuds and making peace–all in a day’s work for the Avatar.”
“Nice work, Avatar,” Aira lightly pats him on the back. “You’re pretty good at mediating, do you have to do that often with those two?” Aira asked, thoroughly amused by the whole encounter.
Aang pauses thoughtfully and looks to his left. “Yeah, and not just with those two either.”
Before Aira can ask what that means, she follows Aang’s gaze to see Momo trying to take a melon from Appa. Momo is using all of his strength in an attempt to pull the melon away from underneath Appa’s foot.
Aang waltzes over and uses his airbending to slice the melon into two pieces–a larger piece for Appa, and a smaller piece for Momo. Momo scurries off with his piece, chittering victorious. Appa seems satisfied enough.
And Aira watches the casual display of airbending with fascination. Even something so small feels graceful. Effortless.
“What?” he says innocently. “Snack disputes are just as important in maintaining peace.”
Aira laughs again, softer this time. The sound surprises her a little–it comes so easily. And as she helps finish setting up camp bedside them, beneath the setting sun, Aira lets herself feel something she hasn’t allowed herself to feel in a very long time…
Comfort.
==========================
Later that night, the four of them sit gathered around the campfire beneath a sky overflowing with stars.
The fire crackles softly between them. Appa sleeps nearby with his tail lazily flicking every so often, while Momo is curled up in Aang’s lap. Everything feels calm–no soldiers, no running, no arguing. Just warmth, food, and conversation.
Aira sits cross-legged beside the fire with a handful of roasted nuts in her hands, quietly listening as Aang enthusiastically retells one of his adventures.
“You actually rode an elephant koi?” she laughs, eyes widening in disbelief.
Across from her, Aang beams proudly at her reaction. “Yeah!” he says excitedly. “You should totally try it sometime. I’ll take you! It’s really fun once you get the hang of it.”
“I don’t know, Aang,” Katara interrupts dryly, “you left out the part where the giant eel almost ate you.”
Aang waves a dismissive hand. “Okay, but I survived, didn’t I?”
Katara gives him an unimpressed look before rolling her eyes with a reluctant smile tugging at her lips. Sitting bedside Katara, Sokka snorts loudly through a mouthful of food. “Yeah,” he says between bites, “because you have magic airbending powers.”
Aira’s stomach tightens at the word. Airbending.
“There’s no way you would’ve escaped if you couldn’t bend,” Sokka continues obliviously. “Do you want Aira to get eaten by a giant water monster?”
The others laugh. Aira forces a smile a second later–just enough to blend in–but the reaction had come too suddenly to fully hide. Thankfully, no one seems to notice.
“What about you, Aira?” Katara asks after the laughter dies down. She rests her chin against one hand, genuinely curious. “You said you’ve been traveling around the Earth Kingdom for years now,” she continues. “You have to have some interesting stories.”
Sokka immediately points at her with exaggerated seriousness. “Preferable stories that involve exploding dams or murderous Freedom Fighters.”
“That only happened once,” Aira replies automatically.
“Once is still too many times,” Sokka mutters. Aang laughs into his food.
Aira thinks for a moment, trying to sort through years of memories. Most of them aren’t exactly campfire related–long days walking alone, cold nights, running from soldiers, hiding who she is, surviving.
Eventually, one memory rises above the others. It's older, warmer. And before she realizes it, she’s smiling. “I do have one story,” she says softly. “But it happened a long time ago. Back when my parents were still alive.”
The group quiets immediately.
Aira shifts closer to the fire, staring into the flames as the memory unfolds in her mind.
“I think I was eight… maybe nine,” she begins. “My parents and I traveled to the southeastern peninsula of the Earth Kingdom.” As she speaks, her voice changes subtly. It's softer, lighter. Like she’s stepping back into the memory itself. “We stayed high up in the mountains where the trees were enormous and the grass was so soft you could lay in it for hours.” She can almost smell the mountain air again. “The whole place felt untouched,” Aira continues. “Like the world slowed down up there.”
The others listen intently. Even Sokka has stopped eating.
“My dad found a wild herd of hopping llamas for us to ride through the trails,” she says, smiling fully now.
Aang perks up immediately. “No way.”
“Oh, yes way,” Aira laughs. “And my father swore he knew how to ride one.”
Katara grins knowingly already.
“He did not, not even a little.”
Sokka snickers.
Aira gestures animatedly now as the memory pulls her in completely.
“What are those, dada?” a young Aira asks, pointing in the direction of a herd of hopping llamas.
“Those, my dear,” Aira’s dad starts, “are hopping llamas. You can find them all over this region. They're one of the reasons we’ve traveled here.” His eyes glimmer with excitement. He holds his hand out to Aira and begins to walk her towards the herd of animals.
“Tavren,” Aira’s mother asks her husband quietly, “are you sure it’s a good idea for her to be riding these this young?” Her motherly instinct coming into play.
“Nira, relax,” he draws out with a grin on his face, “I was her age the first time I rode the hopping llamas.”
“Yeah, and you fell off and broke your arm,” Nira deadpans.
This causes young Aira’s eyes to go wide in alarm. “Uhm, I don’t know if I want to ride them anymore, dada,” concern was present in her voice.
Tavren sighs and crouches down to Aira’s level. He gently places his hands on her shoulders.
“Aira, honey, I’m not going to force you to do something that you don’t want to do. But I really think you’re going to enjoy this. You can’t let fear control you. If you let fear decide everything for you, you’ll miss out on so much of what the world has to offer you,” Tavren preaches wisely.
Aira still appears hesitant.
“I’ll tell you what–we’ll both ride with you to make sure you’re safe. How does that sound?” he asks, wanting her to experience this.
She looks to both of her parents and nods. Her little hands are clenched into fists as she raises her shoulders and puts on a brave face.
“That’s my girl,” Tavren smiles before standing, once again holding out his hand for Aira to take.
Together they all walk towards the herd of hopping llamas. The animals all stand still, unbothered as they watch Aira and her parents come toward them. Tavren expertly mounts one of the llamas and holds his arms out for Aira to take. He gently lifts her onto the animal and sets her down in front of him. Nira then climbs onto the same animal in front of Aira, this way, the young girl is sandwiched between both adults.
The rest of the herd begin to hop away. They leap much higher into the air than Aira expected them to. She becomes nervous once again, but she doesn’t have time to change her mind as the llama they’re sitting on begins to follow its herd. It launches several feet into the air before coming back down. The animal picks up speed, hurling into the field in front of them.
Aira’s stomach flies into her chest with each bounce. Air whips around them, her hair flying everywhere. The sensation is new, but exhilarating. Aira lets out a laughing shriek with each leap, her parents joining in on the laughter.
Eventually, the hopping llama gets tired, wanting the three humans off of its back. It comes to a halt and quickly lifts its hind legs into the air and sends Aira and her parents flying off. They land in a heap on the ground, Nira and Tavren breaking Aira’s fall. They all sit up and look at each other before bursting into giggles.
“Let’s do that again!”
The entire group bursts into laughter. Aira laughs with them, the sound bright and unrestrained in a way it hasn’t been in years.
“Wow, Aira!” Aang exclaims. His eyes are wide with excitement. “That's amazing! I’ve always wanted to ride the hopping llamas!”
“You’ve always wanted to ride everything,” Katara says with a laugh.
“Not true,” Aang replies. “I’ve never wanted to ride a platypus-bear.”
Katara smiles, turning back toward Aira. “Seriously though, Aira, that trip sounds really beautiful.”
“Yeah,” Aira says softly, her smile fading into something gentler. “It was.”
For a moment, the memory lingers between them. The mountains. The animals. Her parents’ laughter. It hurts a little to remember. But now, the memory feels softer somehow.
Aira looks between the group, unable to stop herself from smiling at them. Aang’s excitement makes even ordinary things feel magical, while Katara listens to people like their stories genuinely matter. Aira hadn’t realized how much she missed conversations like this. Simple ones. Warm ones. The kind where nobody’s watching over their shoulder waiting for danger.
Then her eyes drift to Sokka. And she pauses slightly. Because he’s being uncharacteristically silent. He’s just… looking at her. Quietly. The softness in his expression catches Aira off guard, and suddenly, she becomes hyper aware of herself. Of the warmth in her cheeks. Or the way she’s smiling. Or even how she’s sitting.
He doesn’t even realize he’s staring. He’s too distracted by her smile. Because it’s different from before. It’s lighter and unrestrained. And for the first time since meeting her, she doesn’t look completely weighed down by grief or exhaustion. She just looks happy.
========================
The following morning, the group arrives at the edge of the Great Divide, the largest canyon in the world. And Aira immediately forgets how to breathe. She slowly steps towards the canyon’s edge, shoes crunching against loose stone as the massive formation stretches before her.
The canyon cuts through the earth endlessly, its towering walls layered in shades of red, gold, and brown. Jagged rock formations twist downward farther than Aira can comfortably look. The sheer scale of it is overwhelming. It’s beautiful, but terrifying.
“It’s breathtaking…” Aira whispers.
Bedside her, Katara stares out with similar awe written across her face. And Aang grins excitedly, peering downward without a hint of fear.
Then–
“Okay, I’ve seen enough.” Sokka says bluntly, causally walking back toward Appa with complete disinterest. Aira blinks at him in disbelief. She opens her mouth to question him when suddenly a voice cuts sharply through the air.
“Hey! If you’re looking for the Canyon Guide, I was here first!”
Everyone turns.
A man with long brown hair dressed in flowing white robes marches towards them with visible irritation etched across his face. “He’s an earthbender,” the man explains quickly, “he’s the only way in and out of the canyon. And he’s taking my tribe across next.”
Sokka raises his hands. “Calm down, we know you’re next,” he says defensively, a little perturbed by the guy’s attitude.
“You wouldn’t be calm if the Fire Nation destroyed your home and forced you to flee,” the man snaps. His face hardens further. “My whole tribe has to walk thousands of miles to the capital city of Ba Sing Se.” His voice is full of anger, fear, and stress.
Aira feels her stomach tighten immediately. Because unlike her, this man isn’t lying. His home actually was destroyed. His people actually are refugees. And suddenly the story she’s repeated for years feels heavier than ever. She’d told it to survive. To protect herself. But standing here now, looking at someone who truly lost everything… guilt curls painfully in her chest.
Movement nearby catches her attention. A group approaches from farther down the path, clad in red clothing. They walk with equally visible annoyance the moment they notice the man in white robes.
Katara glances back at the man. “Is that your tribe?”
The man looks horrified by the suggestion. “It most certainly is not,” he says sharply, glaring toward the approaching group. “That’s the Zhang tribe.” He speaks their name as if it leaves a bad taste in his mouth. “A bunch of lowlife thieves. They’ve been the enemy of my tribe for a hundred years.”
The guy in the white robes begins arguing with a woman from the Zhang tribe, both trading insults and harsh accusations. But their bickering is interrupted when the canyon guide emerges, ready to escort the refugees through the canyon. And as luck would have it for the fellow in the white robe, his tribe is seen walking gracefully towards them, all clad in the same white and gold robes.
After another argument about which tribe should be escorted through the canyon first, Aang suggests the two tribes travel the canyon together while Appa flies their sick and elderly people across. The tribes begrudgingly agree with this idea, probably because neither tribe wants the other to go first.
Soon everyone begins preparing for the journey into the canyon.
Aira adjusts the straps on her bag uneasily as she stares down toward the winding paths below. From a flying perspective, the canyon looked beautiful. Manageable. Now that she’s actually standing at the entrance? It’s enormous… and they’re going to walk all of it.
Beside her, Sokka looks equally horrified. “Aang’s job is going to make us walk this whole thing on foot, isn’t it?” he shrugs his shoulders in despair.
And his despair worsens when he hears the Canyon Guide’s next announcement.
“Here comes the bad news. No food allowed in the canyon. It attracts dangerous predators,” he says menacingly.
Instant chaos erupts. “No food? This is ridiculous!” someone shouts.
The guide seems unimpressed by the complaints. “Would you rather be hungry or dead?” he retorts. “Now, we’re heading down in ten minutes. All your food better be in your gut or in the garbage!”
Beside Aira, Sokka looks personally betrayed by the Spirit World itself. His face falls in genuine horror. “What kind of horrible place bans food?” Sokka whispers painfully.
Aira bites her lip to stop herself from laughing. The devastation on his face is so sincere that it’s impossible not to find it amusing. She pats his shoulder in mock sympathy. “I’m so sorry for your loss.”
Sokka sighs heavily. “Thank you. This is a very difficult time for me.”
That breaks Aira, and she snorts out a laugh. Still smiling, she kneels beside her bag and digs through it for a moment before pulling out a small pouch filled with mixed nuts and dried fruit. She pours some into his hands before taking a few for herself.
“There,” she says casually, popping a dried berry into her mouth. Sokka stares down at the food like she’s handed him one hundred gold pieces.
“You’re amazing.”
Aang and Katara waltz over and they share Aira’s remaining rations. Momo even helps himself to a couple lychee nuts. They can hear the two tribes munching on their rations as well.
And somehow, despite standing at the edge of the largest canyon in the world preparing for a miserable hike–Aira feels strangely content. The warmth of the sun. The crunch of dried fruit. The company of new friends. For the first time in years, Aira finds herself thinking that traveling with other people isn’t so bad after all.
==========================
The deeper they travel, the more enormous the canyon feels. Towering rock walls rise impossibly high around them, blocking out parts of the sky. Pathways twist between jagged cliffs while loose stones crunch beneath their footsteps.
Every few minutes, the guide stomps his foot or thrusts his arms forward, sending huge slabs of rock shifting aside almost effortlessly to clear pathways for the group.
Aira stares openly in fascination. Earthbending seems so different from airbending. Where airbending is flowing and freedom, earthbending looks rooted. Heavy. Powerful. It must take incredible strength.
Eventually, the group reaches the very bottom of the canyon. The guide pauses near the path they descended from and bends a giant boulder towards it, collapsing the path into nothing but rubble and dust. The group eyes him curiously.
“These people are fleeing the Fire Nation, aren’t they? We’ve got to make sure we can’t be followed,” he explains.
Aira coughs slightly, waving dust away from her face.
Then, something moves behind the guide. Fast.
A huge creature lunges from the debris. Before anyone can react, massive jaws clamp around the Canyon Guide and yank him upward. He shouts in pain as the creature thrashes violently.
A canyon crawler.
Aira freezes in pure shock. Beside her, Sokka reacts immediately. “We gotta help him!” he whips his boomerang from his belt and hurls it directly at the creature’s head. The canyon crawler screeches and releases the guide violently. Unfortunately, it also sends him crashing into the rocky ground below–hard.
Aira winces visibly. “Ooh,” she mutters. “That looked painful.”
The creature then immediately turns toward the nearest targets. Her and Sokka. Its legs scrape against the canyon floor as it lunges forward with terrifying speed.
Both her and Sokka’s eyes widen as the crawler charges toward them. They scream simultaneously and bolt in the opposite direction. “Okay!” Sokka yells frantically while running. “Now we’ve gotta help me and Aira!”
Katara reacts first. She whips a stream of water forward, striking the canyon crawler across the face hard enough to knock it sideways. The creature hisses angrily and turns toward her instead. Then Aang leaps into action. With a sweeping motion of his staff, Aang bends a massive funnel of air that slams the creature into the canyon wall. This causes all of the canyon crawlers to immediately disperse into the shadows.
Silence falls. Broken only by heavy breathing.
A few feet away, Katara and Aira rush toward the Canyon Guide, who still lies crumpled painfully against the rocks. The guide groans weakly as they kneel bedside him.
“What was that?” Aang asks the guide.
“Canyon crawlers,” the guide responds. “And there’s sure to be more.” He continues to groan in pain, unable to move.
Katara examines the guide’s arms. Her expression immediately changes. Aira notices it at the same time. And her stomach drops. Both of his arms are broken. Badly. Katara looks up at Aira with horror written across her face. Aira stares back, realization crashing into her instantly.
The guide is the only earthbender. The only person capable of creating exit paths through the canyon. Meaning one thing–they’re trapped.
Sokka wonders out loud why they came across canyon crawlers even after ditching their food. The Zhangs and Gan Jins both start accusing each other of smuggling in food, leading to another unnecessary argument. Aira covers her ears with her hands, already sick and tired of their incessant bickering. And Aang seems to be fed up as well, so he suggests the tribes split up and travel on opposite sides of the canyon, whilst Sokka accompanies the Zhangs, and Katara accompanies the Ghan Jins.
“Aira,” Aang says, “you can come with me”. He smiles and gestures for her to join him. She slowly looks up at the high ledge that separates the two tribes, the high ledge that Aang intends for the them to travel on. She blinks and points upward cautiously.
“Uh… Aang? How exactly do you expect me to get up there?”
Aang grins immediately. A grin so mischievous that it concerns her more than it should. “Hop on,” he says as he turns around and crouches slightly, gesturing toward his back.
Aira stares at him. “You’re serious?” He simply nods, his smile still present. After a hesitant moment, she carefully walks over and climbs onto his back. To her surprise, Aang doesn’t stumble at all. Despite looking smaller and younger than her, he supports her weight easily.
Huh. He’s stronger than he looks.
And without warning, Aang leaps. Aira yelps loudly as her stomach shoots straight into her chest. Wind bursts around them as Aang airbends beneath his feet, propelling both of them upward effortlessly. Aira tightens her arms around his shoulders instinctively. Then, just as quickly as they launched upward, Aang lands gracefully atop the ledge. He gently sets her back down onto solid ground. She stumbles slightly as her legs adjust, and her heart is pounding.
Behind them, the Canyon Guide casually walks up a winding trail leading directly to the ledge where they’re standing. Aira slowly turns toward Aang. “...Aang.”
“Yeah?”
“Why didn’t we just use the trail?”
Aang shrugs innocently. “Because jumping was more fun.”
Aira stares at him for a second before laughing despite herself.
The rest of the afternoon passes quietly. The three of them continue along the upper ledge overlooking both tribes as they travel below. As time passes, the setting sun paints the stone walls in deep oranges and reds, and the cool evening air slowly replaces the daytime heat.
Aira’s feet ache terribly by the time night finally approaches. She spots the glow of campfires below where the tribes have settled for the evening. On one side, Sokka sits surrounded by the Zhang tribe. On the other side, Katara appears in deep conversation with Gan Jins.
“Sure would be nice to be around one of those campfires, telling stories and laughing.” Aang says longingly overlooking the two tribes. “It’s okay, though, we’ll be out of here soon enough. And then we can eat our weight in lychee nuts.”
Beside Aang, Momo catches a bug in his little furry hands and goes to munch on it before offering some to Aang, who politely turns him down.
Aira quietly watches Aang from the corner of her eye. Specifically–his tattoos. The blue arrows stand out softly beneath the moonlight, curving along his scalp and disappearing into his clothes. Aira has spent years avoiding her identity as an airbender. Avoiding reminders. Avoiding herself. But now, sitting bedside someone who openly carries the markings of their people, she can’t stop wondering.
“Hey, Aang?”
“Hm?”
Aira hesitates carefully. “I’ve been wondering about something.”
Aang looks over curiously.
“The Avatar disappeared a hundred years ago,” she says slowly. “And the Fire Nation wiped out the Air Nomads, so…” she trails off awkwardly.
Aang understands immediately. “So how am I here?”
Aira nods sheepishly.
“I may not look like it,” Aang says lightly, “but I was born over a hundred years ago.”
Aira gives him an utterly unconvinced look, causing Aang to laugh. “I know, I know–it sounds crazy.” He leans back slightly, staring up at the stars. “I got trapped in an iceberg during a storm. The Avatar State froze me there somehow.” His voice softens. “Katara and Sokka found me a few months ago and freed me.”
Aira listens silently.
“I woke up to a hundred year war,” Aang continues quietly. “A world without airbenders.” He wraps his arms around himself unconsciously. “My home…” His voice cracks slightly. “My people…”
Aira feels her chest tighten painfully. Because suddenly she understands something she hasn’t fully realized before. Aang doesn’t just miss his people. He has to carry the weight of being the only survivor. The only one left to remember them.
“Aang…” she says softly. He doesn’t look at her. Instead he stares down at the ground. “Aang,” she asks carefully, “do you know if there are any other airbenders out there?”
The question hangs heavily between them. Aang’s expression crumples almost immediately. “No,” he whispers. The single word sounds devastating. “I’m the last one. The last airbender.”
Aira hears him sniffle quietly. Before she can even think about it, she moves closer and wraps her arms around him. Aang melts into the hug instantly. Like he needed it far more than he realized. Aira closes her eyes tightly as he cries against her shoulder. And it pains her. Because she knows what loneliness feels like. She knows what isolation feels like. And suddenly keeping her secret feels unbearable. It feels wrong. Aang thinks he’s alone. And he isn’t.
I have to tell him.
Aira slowly pulls back from the hug, nerves immediately flooding her stomach. “Aang,” she says shakily, “there’s something I need to tell you. I–”
THUD
Both of them jump as the Canyon Guide suddenly stumbles over and drops directly between them onto the dirt. “Canyon crawlers…” he mumbles incoherently. “So many teeth… too many teeth…” Then immediately starts snoring.
Aira stares blankly. Aang blinks.
The moment completely evaporates. And with it–Aira’s courage.
=======================
The next morning, Aang, Aira, and the canyon guide meet up with both tribes at the end of the canyon, all ready to move on with their journey. But once again, the tribes continue their disagreement, this time bringing Sokka and Katara into the mix. The yelling becomes louder and louder, and violence ensues until Aang snaps.
A powerful burst of air explodes outward from him in frustration, whipping through the canyon in every direction. The gust sends robes flapping wildly and bags tumbling across the ground. And then–food goes flying everywhere. Meat. Vegetables. Fruit. Even baked goods.
Both tribes scramble to hide the smuggled food now exposed around them.
Aira blinks. Aang stares in disbelief. “Is that food? Everyone smuggled food down here?” he asks angrily. “Unbelievable! You guys put our lives in danger because you couldn’t go without a snack for a day?!” His shoulders rise and fall sharply as he glares at both tribes. But before he can continue–he pauses and his expression changes.
Aira follows Aang’s line of sight and notices a single pastry sitting untouched. A small golden tart. Aang clutches his stomach as it growls. He points towards the tart. “...is that egg custard in that tart?”
Then, the ground begins to tremble. Growling can be heard in the distance. Suddenly, dozens of canyon crawlers emerge from the shadows all around them. Their huge jagged bodies crawl over rocks and canyon walls with horrifying speed, their massive jaws snapping as they charge toward the tribes.
People scream and chaos erupts immediately. The tribes scatter in every direction while crawlers lunge at anyone within reach. Aira barely has time to react before one barrels toward her. Its enormous jaws snap shut just inches from her face. She yelps and dives sideways onto the rocky ground just in time. Dust scrapes against her palms as she hurriedly scrambles back to her feet.
Run. She needs to run.
Aira spins around only to freeze. Another canyon crawler blocks her path. Its jagged limbs scrape against the canyon floor as it advances toward her slowly. Her breath catches painfully.
No.
She turns back. The first crawler is approaching too. Both creatures edge toward her from opposite sides, forcing her backward until her spine hits a massive boulder.
She’s trapped.
Aira’s heartbeat pounds violently in her chest. The crawlers move closer and closer. Their sharp teeth glisten beneath the canyon light while hot rancid breath washes over her face. This can’t be happening. Out of all the ways she imagined dying–she never thought it would be canyon crawlers. The noise around her becomes deafening. People screaming. Rock crumbling. The screeching of crawlers. She can’t even yell for help over the chaos.
Nearby, Aang struggles to fend off multiple crawlers at once when Sokka suddenly rushes toward him. “Aang!” Sokka shouts frantically. “I can’t find Aira!”
Katara immediately whips around at the panic in his voice. “What?!”
The three of them begin searching desperately through the chaos. Then Sokka spots movement near one of the canyon walls. Two canyon crawlers. Someone trapped between them and a boulder. His face pales instantly. “That has to be Aira!”
Without hesitation, the three of them sprint toward her.
Aira presses herself harder against the rock behind her. The crawlers are right in front of her now. Close enough for her to smell them. Close enough to feel their breath. One screeches loudly before both creatures suddenly lunge.
Aira shuts her eyes in terror, and instinct takes over. She thrusts her hands outward desperately–
A violent burst of air explodes around her. Wind howls through the canyon. Before Aira even realizes what’s happening, the force launches her several feet upward into the air. She flies over the boulder entirely. Then crashes harshly onto the rocky ground on the other side. Pain shoots through her side as the breath gets knocked violently from her lungs. She curls slightly against the ground coughing for air, eyes squeezed shut.
The trio skids to a complete stop. All three stare at her in stunned silence. Katara slowly lowers her hands. Sokka’s mouth parts slightly in disbelief. The movement. The wind. The air. Katara looks toward Sokka with wide confused eyes. Sokka looks equally lost.
But Aang–
Aang looks frozen. Completely frozen. Like the world around him has suddenly stopped moving. Because he knows exactly what he just saw. And somehow… he still can’t believe it.
Before anyone can speak, more canyon crawlers rush toward them. Aang snaps out of it immediately. He and Katara leap back into battle while Sokka runs straight toward Aira.
“Aira!”
She’s still struggling to breathe when he reaches her. “Aira, are you okay?” he asks frantically. His voice sounds panicked enough to cut through the ringing in her ears. He grabs her by the arms and quickly helps pull her upright. The moment she stands, pain and dizziness slam into her again. Her knees buckle. Sokka catches her immediately before she can collapse. His hands tighten firmly around her upper arms to steady her. Aira instinctively grabs onto his shoulders for support.
And for a second–everything else fades away. The canyon. The screaming. The crawlers. None of it seems real anymore. Sokka just stares at her anxiously, searching her face for injuries.
“You okay?” he asks again, softer this time. Aira nods weakly despite the panic rapidly building in her chest. Because she knows. She knows what just happened. And judging by the expressions on their faces–so do they.
Suddenly they hear Aang yell across the canyon, “Hey everyone! Look at me and do what I do!”
Aang grabs one of the scattered bags and waves some food in front of an approaching crawler. The creature lunges at him. At the last second, Aang pulls the bag over its snout and ties it shut, preventing it from opening its mouth. Then he jumps directly onto the creature’s back.
Everyone immediately scrambles to copy him. Suddenly both tribes are working together to subdue the crawlers before climbing onto their backs in pairs. The tribes stop fighting long enough to cooperate.
Aira manages to recover enough to help Sokka restrain one of the creatures. Together they climb onto its back. Aira sits in front while Sokka positions himself behind her to keep her steady. Instinctively, he wraps both arms tightly around her waist to keep her from falling backward. His chest presses firmly against her back, and his legs brush against hers while his grip tightens slightly every time the crawler shifts beneath them.
Under different circumstances, Aira’s thoughts might’ve spiraled completely… Okay, maybe they still are a little. Despite everything happening. She can’t stop noticing how close he is. And judging by the way Sokka’s grip subtly tightens–he’s very aware of it too.
Eventually they reach the top of the canyon. Everyone hurriedly dismounts the crawlers while Aang tosses the remaining bags of food back down the canyon. The creatures scramble after them, disappearing into the depths below.
Almost immediately, the tribe leaders begin praising one another before they once again begin to insult each other and pull out their swords. The leader of the Ghan Jin tribes pulls out his sword menacingly, “Too bad we can’t rewrite history. You thieves stole our sacred orb from Ghin Wai!” So the leader of the Zhang tribe responds by pulling out her own sword, “You tyrants unjustly imprisoned Wai Ghin for 20 long years!”
Aira’s shoulders dropped, aggravated that the two tribes can’t just get along. But Aang steps in when he realizes that he actually knew the people these tribes are referring to. He tells a story about how he knew Gin Wei and Wei Gain over one hundred years ago, and that the story the tribes are referring to is actually about a game the two men played as little boys. Supposedly, the “sacred orb” was just a regular ball, and the “prison” was just a penalty box for the game.
“Now don’t get me wrong. Wei Ghin was kind of a slob, and Ghin Wei was a little stuffy. That much is true. But they respected each other's differences enough to share the same playing field.”
The two tribe leaders seem to accept Aang’s story. They make amends and decide to head to Ba Sing Se together as a single tribe, with the canyon guide deciding to join them, “I’m sick of this place!” So the tribes–and the canyon guide–walk off into the distance together as one.
Sokka mentions how lucky it is that Aang knew the men from the story. Aang shrugs his shoulders with a mischievous grin on his face, “You could call it luck, or you could call it lying”.
Aira’s eyes go wide as she turns to Aang, her mouth agape. Sokka holds a similar expression, “You what?!”
Aang admits devilishly that he made the whole thing up.
Aira can’t stop herself from laughing. Honestly? She’s impressed. And amused. And somehow not even surprised. Because over the past few days, all of them have managed to surprise her in ways she never expected.
Aang, with his freedom. The way he moves through life so lightly despite carrying impossible responsibility on his shoulders. He reminds Aira that the world is still beautiful even after everything it’s become.
Katara, with her warmth. The way she nurtures so instinctively. The way she listens and cares. Being around Katara feels achingly familiar sometimes. Like sitting beside her mother again. Safe. Wanted. Loved without having to earn it.
And Sokka–Aira’s chest tightens slightly just thinking about him. Sokka makes her feel lighter. Like she can laugh without guilt. Like survival isn’t the only thing life has to offer anymore. And somehow, in the span of a few days, he’s made her smile more than she has in years. More than she thought she still could.
Before meeting them, Aira had forgotten who she used to be. She used to be curious. Playful. Full of wonder. Then her father died. Then her mother died. Then fear hollowed out whatever remained. Years of hiding herself had slowly turned survival into her entire identity.
But now–traveling bedside these three–it feels like pieces of herself are returning.
“Aira.”
Aang’s voice pulls her from her thoughts. She looks up. And immediately realizes something is wrong. Because Aang is staring at her with an expression she’s never seen from him before. He’s serious. Quiet. Almost nervous.
“Aira…” he says again slowly. He hesitates. “Are you… an airbender?”
The question hits her like ice water. Katara immediately looks toward Aang. Then toward Aira. Sokka does the same.
It’s suddenly very, very quiet. Aira stills completely. And then she remembers–the canyon crawlers. The panic. The airbending. Her stomach drops. She wasn’t sure if anyone saw.
“Aira?” Sokka asks carefully this time.
She can’t look at them. Can’t breathe. Her gaze drops toward the ground while fear crawls up her spine. She can feel them waiting. Watching. And eventually–she nods.
“Yes,” she whispers. Then louder, “Yes. I’m an airbender.”
Aira can’t bring herself to meet their eyes. Not after this. Not after hearing the hurt in their voices already forming. Finally, Sokka speaks. “Why did you lie to us?” His tone is firm. But beneath it lies hurt and confusion.
She fidgets uncomfortably beneath their stares. “I didn’t lie,” she says quietly. “I just… didn’t tell you.”
“That’s the same thing,” Sokka replies immediately, causing Aira to flinch. “That isn’t something you keep to yourself,” he continues. “... Not from us.” The disappointment in his voice hurts more than anger would’ve. Because she can hear how personal this feels to him.
Katara looks toward Aang. and her expression softens with concern. Because Aang still hasn’t moved. Hasn’t spoken. He just stands there staring at the ground quietly. His hands clenched tightly at his side. Katara steps closer to him protectively.
“When were you going tell to us?” she asks Aira. “Did you ever plan on telling us?”
“Yes!” Aira says quickly. “I wanted to–I was going too–”
“If you planned on telling us,” Aang interrupts softly, “then why didn't you say something last night?” His voice cracks slightly. That hurts the most. Because he sounds devastated.
Katara and Sokka exchange confused glances. Realizing there was clearly another conversation they weren’t present for.
Aira remembers immediately–the canyon ledge. Aang admitted he believed he was alone. The last airbender. He cried into her arms. And she said nothing.
Aang’s chest aches. Part of him wants to feel happy. He’s not alone anymore. There’s another airbender. Another person to share in his culture, his people, his loss. But instead–he feels embarrassed. Hurt. Because he trusted her. He opened up to her completely. And during that time–she already knew.
Why didn’t she tell him? Was she scared? Did she not trust him? Did she think he’d reject her? Aang doesn’t know. And that hurts more than anger.
Katara gently places a hand against Aang’s shoulder. “I think…” she says carefully while looking toward Aira, “you should give us some space.” She rubs Aang’s back comfortingly while he keeps staring downward silently.
Aira looks toward Sokka. But he won’t meet her eyes. That hurts too. More than she expected.
Her throat tightens painfully. And without another word, she nods. Then quietly grabs her bag and walks away. Tears stream silently down her face as the distance between her and the group slowly grows.
And for the first time since joining them–Aira feels alone again.
Aira awakes slowly, her awareness returning in pieces. She feels stiff–an ache runs through her back and shoulders, dull and persistent. Then she feels the faint chill of the morning air brushing against her skin.
Her eyes open and she realizes that she’s laying on the same wooden floor she’d be sitting on the night before. For a second, she doesn’t move.
Then she remembers– the failed meditation. The thoughts she couldn’t quiet. The way her breathing had started to shake, and the moment it all slipped. She had let herself cry harder than she had in a long time. She must’ve fallen asleep right after.
Her stomach growls–loud, almost startling the morning stillness. She exhales and drags her hand over her face. “Great,” she mutters under her breath. She forgot to eat dinner last night.
Aira pushes herself up, wincing slightly as her muscles protest. Sleeping on the hard wood floor was not part of the plan. Her neck is stiff, her legs heavy, and when she stretches her arms overhead, her joints pop in a series of cracks. She rolls her shoulders, shakes out her hands, then finally steps toward the door.
The walk to the common area is calm in that early-morning way–soft light filtering through the leaves of the trees that surround their base. Song-birds chirp overhead. Two of them dart past her suddenly–small, quick, their wings beating in uneven bursts as they loop and weave around each other. Their bouncy flight almost resembles a dance in the air.
Aira slows just slightly, watching them with a yearning. She feels almost envious of their freedom.
The closer she gets to the common area, the more the quiet fades–replaced by voices, laughter, and the clatter of dishes. And then the smell hits her. Warm, sweet, unmistakable–red bean buns and spiced tea. Her stomach reacts immediately, louder this time.
Members of the Freedom Fighters move around the space, some sitting, some standing, all with plates in hand. Aang is mid-laugh, while Katara smiles over at him. And across the table is Sokka, eating his food like it’s a competition.
Aira slips into the open seat across from him.
“We missed you at dinner last night,” he says with his mouth full, words slightly muffled as crumbs threaten to escape. “Where did you run off to?”
A few crumbs do escape.
“Sokka! That’s disgusting,” Katara cuts in, recoiling. “Swallow your food before you talk!”
Sokka rolls his eyes and makes a show of it–chewing dramatically, then swallowing hard. He opens his mouth wide, leaning toward her. “There,” he says. “Happy?” He grins and immediately shovels more food in.
Aira can’t help but smile at their sibling banter. The ease of their back-and-forth cuts through the lingering heaviness in Aira’s chest. It’s… nice. Normal.
“I went back to my hut, “Aira finally answers, reaching for a bun, her tone casual. “I needed some time alone.” That part is true. “I guess I fell asleep,” she adds with a small shrug. “Yesterday’s fight took more out of me than I thought.” Also true.
Aira lowers her gaze to her food, tearing off a small piece instead of taking a full bite. Her appetite is there–but not fully. Not yet.
Footsteps approach–confident and direct. Aira glances up just as Jet steps into view, his hook swords strapped across his back. “Sokka,” he says, “are you ready for our mission?”
Sokka straightens instantly. “Yep,” he says, already standing. He wipes his hands quickly on his pants, energized in a way he hadn’t been a second ago.
Aira pauses. Mission?
“Bye, Aira,” Sokka waves before he falls into step beside Jet, the two of them already talking as they head toward Smellerbee and Pipsqueak.
Aira watches them go, her fingers still loosely holding the edge of her food. A small frown pulls at her expression. Her gaze lingers a second longer than necessary before she looks back down at her plate. The food is still warm. The voices around her still light. But something in her chest tightens, just slightly.
Why would Jet invite Sokka on a mission?
========================
It’s been a few hours since Jet and Sokka left for their “mission”. Aira keeps herself busy. It’s easier that way. She helps patch a section of the rope bridge that had started to fray, hauls water up from the lower platforms, even volunteers to help sort through supplies–tasks she normally wouldn’t linger on. But she needs something to keep her hands moving. Anything to keep her thoughts from circling back to the same question:
What kind of mission?
Every now and then, she catches herself glancing toward the paths, half-expecting to see them returning. But they don’t.
By the time the sun shifts higher and the shadows shorten, Aira exhales and finally decides to step away. She heads toward the Avatar trio’s hut, brushing her hands off on her pants as she walks. That’s when Sokka rushes past her–fast. She barely has time to register the sharp movement, the tensions in his shoulders, or the way his jaw is set tight like he’s holding something back.
“Sokka–?” She starts, but he doesn’t stop. He doesn’t even look at her. Aira frowns and immediately breaks into a jog to catch up, knowing something is wrong.
By the time she reaches the hut, Sokka is already there, standing rigidly in front of Aang and Katara. “We’re leaving,” he says sharply, his voice cutting through the air. “Right now”.
Katara blinks, thrown off. “What? Why–?”
“Because your boyfriend Jet’s a thug,” Sokka sneers. “He beat and robbed a harmless old man”.
The words land hard. Aira’s breath catches. “What?” she blurts, shock clear on her face. This doesn’t make sense to Aira. Jet is reckless at times, sure. Intense, yes. But that? He wouldn’t–would he?
Sokka’s gaze snaps towards her, sharp and accusing. “You knew about this didn’t you?” he says, pointing at her. “About how messed up he is?”
The tone hits harder than the words. Aira recoils slightly, her brows knitting together in disbelief. “What?” she scoffs, the offense immediate and unfiltered. “Of course not!”
There’s a bite to her voice now–hurt, more than anger. “Why would you even think that?”
For a split second, something flickers across Sokka’s expression–uncertainty, maybe–but it’s gone just as quickly, replaced by frustration.
Aira’s gaze drops briefly, her thoughts tangling. She thinks back to the way Jet carries himself. The confidence. The edge beneath it. The way he talks about the Fire Nation–not just with anger, but something more… something personal. Her stomach tightens.
“I want to hear Jet’s side of the story,” Katara says, lifting her chin slightly, resolute. There’s conviction in her voice. And hope–hope that this isn’t true.
The group starts moving, tension thick between them. Aira falls into step behind them, quietly. Her mind won’t settle. She glances at Sokka-his posture still rigid, his focus locked forward. He believes what he’s saying.
Then she looks ahead, toward where Jet’s hut sits hidden among the trees.
Why would he lie?
The question lingers, but another one pushes in, just as persistent–
What if he isn’t?
=======================
“Sokka, you told them what happened but you didn’t mention that the guy was Fire Nation?” Jet replies, his tone level, almost too calm for the accusation hanging in the air. There’s no rush in him. No defensiveness. Just control.
Katara hardens immediately and folds her arms. “No,” she says with contempt, “he conveniently left that part out”.
Sokka’s frustration spikes. “Fine, but even if he was Fire Nation, he was a harmless civilian,” Sokka throws his hands up in frustration as he attempts to defend himself.
Jet doesn’t argue. He just reaches into his pocket. The movement is smooth and deliberate.
Thunk.
The knife slams into the wooden table between them. Everyone flinches.
“He was an assassin, Sokka,” he says evenly. He twists the base of the knife, and something clicks–a small hidden mechanism. With practiced ease, he slides out a thin compartment, revealing a vial of red liquid nestled inside.
“See?” Jet continues, holding it up just enough for them to see. “Poison”.
His words linger between them. “He was sent to eliminate me,” Jet adds, his gaze flicking briefly to Sokka. “You helped save my life, Sokka”.
Katara’s posture shifts first. Her arms loosen slightly, her certainty becoming more steady. She exhales, the tension leaving her shoulders as the explanation fits into place.
Sokka shakes his head immediately. “No,” he says, firm. “There was no knife”. He turns away abruptly, “I’m going to the hut,” he mutters. “I’m packing my things”. And just like that, he’s gone–footsteps sharp and fast against the wood, the frustration practically radiating off of him.
Aira doesn’t move right away. Her eyes drift back to the knife. Jet’s hand still rests near it, casual now, like the tension had already passed. Too casual. But something doesn’t sit right with Aira. The knife. The mechanism. The way he revealed it. Her gaze narrows slightly as she leans in just enough to get a better look.
Have I seen that knife before?
She can’t place it. Not fully. But the feeling lingers—quiet, insistent. She steps back, then turns. And without saying anything, she slips out of the hut. Outside, Sokka is already halfway down the path. She hurries after him, closing the distance quickly.
“Sokka, I–” she starts, reaching out, her hand landing lightly on his shoulder. He tenses instantly and pulls away.
“No stop,” he says, his voice rougher now. He doesn’t look at her. “Just leave me alone.” He turns and keeps walking, faster this time, like he doesn’t want to give her the chance to follow.
Aira stands here, hand still half-raised, watching him go. Her chest tightens and a small frown etches onto her face. She feels conflicted, uncertain. But one thought cuts through everything else:
I believe you…
Even if she doesn’t fully understand why yet.
========================
That night, Aira lies on her cot, starting up at the wooden ceiling of her hut. Sleep doesn’t come. She shifts onto her side. Then her back. Then the other side. The thin blanket twists around her legs as she tries–unsuccessfully–to get comfortable. Her body is tired, but her mind isn’t. It won’t stop replaying everything. The argument. The knife. The look on Sokka’s face when no one believed him. Jet’s calm explanation.
Aira presses her palm over eyes with a quiet groan. “One of them has to be lying…” she murmurs. But the thought doesn’t settle anything–it just splits her further. Because both sides make sense.
Jet did save her. Took her in without hesitation. Gave her a place to stay. Taught her how to fight, how to survive. There was trust in that–real trust. And Sokka. She’s only known him for two days. But something about him feels solid in a way she can’t quite explain. He didn’t waver. Not even when everyone turned against him. She exhales sharply, dragging her hands down her face. “This is ridiculous,” she mutters. She throws the blanket aside and swings her legs over the edge of the cot.
Maybe a little fresh air will do me some good.
The forest at night is quiet, but not silent. Cricket moths hum softly beneath the canopy, and leaves rustle faintly with the breeze. The world feels dim and distant, lit only by streaks of moonlight slipping through the branches overhead, breaking through the darkness of night.
Aira walks without thinking too much about where she’s going. She just lets her feet carry her forward along the worn paths between the trees. Her mind drifts back to the hut. To the moment Jet slammed the knife onto the table. The image replays clearly–the curve of the blade, the black handle, the gold detailing along the edge. Something about it nags at her. It’s familiar. Too familiar.
Suddenly, her breath catches as the memory clicks into place.
Jet stands in front of Aira with a serious look on his face and a knife balanced easily in his hand. “Aira, when learning to fight, you need to know how to defend yourself against different types of weapons. You’ve already managed to deflect my hook swords and dodge Longshot’s arrows, so now you’re going to try defending yourself against someone with a knife.”
Aira gulps, her eyes flicking to the blade. She feels unease at the sharpness of the knife. But still–she nods. She knows that in a world like this, hesitation will get her hurt, again.
“Now this knife actually holds a vial for poison,” he adds casually, “but don’t worry, there’s nothing in it right now.”
That’s not very reassuring. Not even a little.
“The first thing you need to remember is to keep your distance,” Jet begins to teach, “Space gives you time to react. And try to keep moving, standing still makes you an easy target. Now I'm going to swing at you with this knife and I want you to block my attacks. Think you can do that?”
Aira nods with a determined look on her face, getting into her defensive stance. Her heart beats in trepidation as she waits for Jet to make his move. He moves swiftly, slicing the knife through the air in her direction. She sloppily steps straight back, the movement feeling unnatural.
Jet stops for a second to comment on Aira’s movement. “When you’re moving to avoid strikes, you want to move diagonally. Moving straight back makes it easier to track you, keeping you in your attacker’s line of sight. If you step diagonally, you force your opponent to turn and reorient, giving you more time to react to their movements. Here, try it again,” Jet says with a smile.
Aira once again assumes her defensive stance, her knees bent, ready to adjust her position in response to Jet’s attacks. This time, she quickly steps back diagonally, just as Jet instructed, and avoids his strike. Not perfectly or cleanly, but better.
He goes to strike again. She steps back again. Again. And again. Her movements grow quicker and sharper. Still a little frantic, but harder to predict. Jet adjusts, but she keeps moving, never quite where he expects her to be.
Aira manages to disorient Jet from her constant movements, wearing down his stamina. She notices this and manages to duck underneath one of his strikes. She charges forward and knocks him to the ground. The knife falls from his hand. Aira hurriedly grabs it and points it in his direction, effectively ending the match.
“Not bad,” Jet smiles at her. She lets out a shaky laugh, lowering the knife before offering him a hand up.
Aira stops walking as the memory fades and her chest tightens. That’s the same knife…
“So Jet was lying,” Aira whispers to herself, shocked and disappointed at her revelation. She stands there for a moment, trying to process everything when voices cut through the quiet. The voices are low and careful. And they’re moving closer.
Her head snaps up and instinct kicks in. She ducks off the path and into the brush, crouching low behind a cluster of bushes. The voices grow clearer, so Aira slowly parts the branches just enough to see Jet, Smellerbee, Pipsqueak, Sneers, The Duke, and Longshot. They’re all moving together through the forest. And they’re pulling something–a wagon loaded with barrels.
What are they doing?
Aira quietly follows them, hiding behind bushes and trees to remain out of sight. Eventually they come to a clearing on a cliff overlooking the dam, the dam located not far from Gaipain, the Earth Kingdom village that was recently overrun by the Fire Nation.
Aira watches the group closely now. Not the way she did before. Not with trust. But with doubt.
“Now listen,“ Jet says, his voice low but commanding, “you’re not going to blow the dam until I give the signal. If the reservoir isn’t full, the Fire Nation troops could survive.”
Aira freezes.
Blow the dam?
Her eyes dart toward the wagon, toward the barrels. And suddenly it clicks.
Blasting jelly.
Aira’s stomach drops so hard it almost hurts. She listens intently, barely breathing as the Freedom Fighters continue speaking.
“But what about the people in the town?” The Duke asks. His voice is hesitant, confused in an innocent way that only a kid’s voice can be. “Won’t they get wiped out too?”
Jet places his hand on Duke’s shoulder, calm and reassuring. “Look Duke, that’s the price of ridding this area of the Fire Nation.” He then looks to Longshot, “Now don’t blow the dam until I give the signal, got it?”
Aira’s pulse pounds violently in her ears. This can’t be happening. The Fire Nation soldiers are one thing–but a whole town? Families. Children. Innocent civilians.
Sokka was right. About all of it. I have to tell them.
She slowly shifts backwards through the bushes. She turns to run when she hears a painful yell. Aira whips around and freezes. Pipsqueak has Sokka by his ponytail, yanking his head back hard. Smellerbee stands beside him with a knife pressed to Sokka’s neck.
“Where do you think you’re going, ponytail?” Smellerbee sneers.
Aira’s heart lurches. For one reckless second, she almost moves. But then she realizes–there’s too many of them. If she attacks now, she’ll lose. Then nobody can stop them. Nobody can stop the dam. She forces herself to stand still and listen as Sokka confronts Jet, despite every instinct in her screaming against it.
Sokka stares at Jet with open disgust. “There are people living there, Jet. Mothers and fathers and children,” he says as he tries to talk some sense into Jet.
Jet’s expression doesn’t change. “I was hoping you’d have an open mind,” he says cooly. “But I can see you’ve made your choice.” Jet nods towards Smellerbee and Pipsqueak. “Take him for a walk. A long walk.” he says darkly.
Sokka struggles as Pipsqueak and Smellerbee tie Sokka’s hands behind his back before pushing him forward. “Come on! Move along,” Smellerbee continues to push Sokka forward.
Aira clenches her fists. She hates this. Hates standing there doing nothing while they drag him through the forest. But rushing in blindly won’t help him. So she follows. Quietly. Carefully. She hides behind the thickest parts of the brush while Smellerbee and Pipsqueak force Sokka farther down the trail.
Sokka keeps walking but protests, “How can you stand by and do nothing while Jet wipes out a whole town?” Aira can’t help but admire Sokka’s courage and conviction. Even when tied up and outnumbered, he’s still fighting. Still standing by what he knows is right even when nobody else will. Even when it would be easier not to.
“Hey, listen, Sokka,” Pipsqueak says from behind him, sounding almost defensive. “Jet’s a great leader. We follow what he says and everything always turns out okay.”
Aira silently scoffs to herself. Tell that to the people that you’re about to drown.
Smellerbee shoves Sokka again. “Keep moving”.
As they continue down the forest path, Sokka’s eyes flick through the trees, searching. Off to the left, partially hidden beneath leaves and brush, sits a Fire Nation trap baited with food. His expression changes instantly. Aira notices it even from the bushes.
Without warning, Sokka bolts.
“What–hey!” Smellerbee yells. Her and Pipqueak charge after him immediately. Sokka leaps cleanly over the hidden trap that the two Freedom Fighters fail to notice.
CLANG
The metal trap snaps shut with violent force and springs upward, capturing both Freedom Fighters inside its metal confines, suspending them several feet off the ground.
Below them, Sokka straightens, hands still tied behind his back, a smug grin across his face.
“Everything always turns out okay, huh?” he says dryly.
Even now, Aira almost laughs. This is her chance. She steps carefully out from the bushes, leaves crunching softly beneath her feet.
Sokka whirls immediately, instincts kicking in. His shoulders are tense and his stance defensive, ready for a fight if necessary despite the ropes still binding his wrists.
The reaction makes Aira’s chest tighten slightly. He really thinks she might attack him. She quickly raises both hands. “Wait–Sokka, I want to help you.” He doesn’t lower his guard. The moonlight catches sharply against his expression–wary, uncertain. But after tonight, Aira can’t blame him.
“I overheard Jet’s plan,” she says quickly. “I didn’t know about it before, I swear.” Her voice softens. “Please… help me save the people in that town.”
For a second, neither of them move. Then she sees it–the tension in his posture eases slightly. He believes her. Or at least… he wants to. Aira slowly reaches into her pocket, which causes Sokka to stiffen again instinctively.
Aira pauses.
“Relax,” she says gently, pulling out a small switchblade. “I’m cutting your ropes. And if it makes you feel better–” she gives a tiny, nervous shrug, “--you can keep the knife afterward.”
Sokka studies her for another moment before finally nodding–cautious but trusting. Aira steps closer. Close enough to see the red marks forming around his wrists from the ropes. The sight makes her cringe before she flips open the blade and carefully cuts the bindings, the ropes falling away immediately.
Sokka exhales sharply and pulls his arms forward, rubbing at his wrists as blood rushes painfully back into his hands. “Thanks,” he mutters.
Aira offers him the switchblade handle-first like she promised, but Sokka waves it off.
“It’s okay,” he says. “I trust you.”
The words hit harder than she expects them to. Especially after everything. Aira smiles back automatically–and then makes the mistake of actually looking at him. Really looking. The moonlight catches his blue eyes, brighter somehow against the darkness surrounding them. Suddenly, she forgets what she was going to say.
Sokka notices too. There’s a strange second where both of them just… stare. Too long.
Then they both step back at nearly the exact same time. Aira looks away first, ears burning. Sokka clears his throat awkwardly and turns towards the trail.
Right. The town. The dam. People are still in danger. The moment shatters instantly.
Sokka breaks into a run toward the hideout, and Aira quickly follows behind him. Branches whip past them as they spring through the trees.
“Wait! Shouldn’t we be heading the other way?” she questions, “We need to stop them from blowing the dam!” She huffs as she runs, slightly struggling to keep up with Sokka’s pace.
“There’s not enough time,” Sokka says without slowing down. “Our best bet is to evacuate the town before it floods. We can fly there on Appa and warn the villagers before it’s too late.”
Aira admits–Sokka’s plan is practical.
And under almost any other circumstance, the idea of flying on Appa would’ve excited Aira beyond belief. A flying bison. An actual flying bison. But right now, all she can feel is urgency clawing at her chest. Because somewhere beyond the forest, an entire town is completely unaware that a wall of water could come crashing down on them in a matter of minutes.
===========================
They eventually reach Appa, hidden among the trees at the edge of the hideout. Aira slows to a stop in front of him, staring upward in awe. She’s been Appa before–but never this close. Never close enough to see the texture of his fur or hear the deep rumble of his breathing.
Beside her, Sokka swings himself on to Appa with practiced ease, like climbing onto a flying bison is completely normal. But Aira remains frozen on the ground. Sokka notices immediately. He leans down slightly and holds out his hand toward her. “Here,” he says. “Let me help you.”
Aira looks up at him. Then at his hand. And for reasons she cannot explain, her pulse stumbles. She quickly grabs his hand before she can overthink it. Sokka’s grip tightens around hers as he pulls her upward with surprising ease, and suddenly she’s scrambling onto Appa’s head beside him.
The movement brings them close. Very close. Their shoulders brush as they settle side-by-side, and Aira becomes painfully aware of the warmth radiating off him through the cool morning air.
Too aware.
Her stomach flutters as she feels heat creeping through her face again. She immediately looks away before he notices.
Seriously, Aira? She scolds herself internally. Now is not the time.
“You ready?” Sokka asks. Aira swallows and nods. Part of her is terrified. The other part can barely contain itself. She’s about to ride a flying bison. Sokka grins lightly and grips the reins.
“Yip! Yip!” Sokka yells, and all of a sudden, they go flying into the sky, the ground disappearing beneath them.
The wind whips past them, the cool air hitting their faces harshly as Appa flies with determination towards the village. The world opens beneath them in endless stretches of forest.
Aira stares in complete amazement. “Wow, you can see everything from up here!” she exclaims, her voice full of awe. The kind of awe that can only come from experiencing something truly impossible for the first time.
Sokka glances sideways at her and can’t help smiling. Not his usual sarcastic grin, but something softer.
But the moment doesn’t last long. Soon the village comes into view below them. And immediately, Fire Nation soldiers surround them the second Appa lands. Weapons raised. Voices shouting.
Sokka jumps down first, hands raised quickly. “Wait! Listen to us! There’s no time, your town is about to be destroyed. You all need to leave immediately!” He then tries to explain Jet’s plan to blow the dam and flood the town.
The soldiers are hesitant of Sokka’s words, not wanting to believe what he’s saying. Not until an old man in Fire Nation attire walks up to them and vouches for Sokka.
This must be the civilian that Sokka saved from being attacked by Jet.
The soldiers take a second to think things over before taking Sokka and the old man by their word. Their expressions change, now full of realization and alarm. The town erupts into motion. People rush through the streets gathering children, carrying supplies, calling for loved ones.
By the time the last civilians clear the valley, Sokka mounts Appa and grabs his reins. “We need to find Jet,” he says breathlessly. Aira nods and joins Sokka on Appa before heading towards the cliff that overlooks the dam.
They take off again just as a deafening explosion tears through the valley. The ground shakes beneath them. Then comes the sound of water. It’s roaring and violent as it cascades down into the valley below, swallowing the town whole.
Aira’s stomach knots. If they’d been any later… She can’t even finish the thought.
When they reach the cliffside, they find Aang and Katara already there. Jet is pinned against a tree, frozen in place by a thick sheet of ice wrapped around his arms and torso.
“This was a victory Katara, remember that,” Jet says darkly, “the Fire Nation is gone, and this valley will be safe”.
“It will be safe, without you,” Sokkay says as Appa lands on the cliffside in front of the others. Sokka is holding Appa’s reins with Aira at his side.
Jet’s head snaps toward them.
“We warned the villagers of your plan just in time”. Sokka explains how the Fire Nation soldiers assumed he was a spy, but that the old man vouched for them, and that they were able to get everyone out in time.
Jet’s eyes become wide with fury, “Sokka, you fool! We could’ve freed this valley!”
“Who would be free?” Sokka asks rhetorically, “everyone would be dead.”
Then Jet’s gaze shifts to Aira. And suddenly the anger there changes into something else–hurt. “You helped him?” he says quietly in disbelief. “You traitor.”
Aira flinches slightly.
“I thought you were a Freedom Fighter,” he glares at Aira. She looks away from Jet, her expression pained.
Beside her, Sokka notices immediately. His expression softens for half a second before facing Jet again. “No Jet, you became a traitor when you stopped protecting innocent people.”
Heavy silence follows. Katara and Aang then mount Appa’s saddle as Jet begs for Katara’s help, “Good-bye, Jet”, she says sadly.
And just like that–the four of them rise into the sky together. Away from the flooded valley. Away from Jet. Away from the second home Aira had only just begun to trust. She looks back once, then turns forward again. Toward whatever comes next.
It had been several months since Jet and his Freedom Fighters took Aira in. She spent the first few weeks of her stay holed away in her hut. The wounds she obtained from her encounter with the Fire Nation soldiers eventually healed, and she was finally able to explore the massive tree house that the Freedom Fighters call their home. Their base is high up in the tall trees of the forest, hidden away from the Fire Nation troops down below.
Aira has come to enjoy her time with this ragtag group of refugees. Each person there has their own story to tell, but they all have two things in common, they’re all outcasts and they all hate the Fire Nation. Some of the Freedom Fighters were hesitant of Aira at first, unsure if they could trust her. They would ask about her past, about how she ended up alone in the woods where the Fire Nation attacked her.
But Aira couldn’t tell them the truth, not the whole truth at least. She explained that her father died fighting in the war, and that she lost her mother to a sickness she encountered in the wilderness. But Aira couldn’t tell them that she’s an airbender; that would break the promise she made to her mom and potentially put Aira in danger. And she definitely couldn’t tell them that she was banished from her home village, especially without being able to give the reason why–that could create a sense of mistrust from the Freedom Fighters.
So she lied. She told them her village was raided by the Fire Nation. That it was burned to the ground and that she and her mother were the only ones to escape. It was a morbid lie to tell, but it felt necessary. And it was believable. The Freedom Fighters were quick to accept her story. They took her in with open arms and gave her something that she hadn’t experienced in so long–a sense of community.
Pipsqueak and The Duke would sit next to her at meal times and share jokes and laughs. They discovered early on that Aira takes herself very seriously. More often than not, she could be found with a stony expression, devout of expression. Aira often dwells on her past experiences and lets them affect her present day demeanor more than she’d like to admit. She spent so long on her own without anyone to talk to or laugh with. Silence and brooding became her norm. So Pipsqueak and The Duke made it their mission to get Aira to laugh, or even just smile. They were unsuccessful most of the time, but occasionally they would say a quip that would put a hint of a smile on Aira’s face. One time, she even giggled.
If Aira ever needed peace and quiet to meditate or just ponder her thoughts, she would be found with Longshot. Aira has never heard the boy speak. He’s quiet yet calm. But his silence isn’t empty or distant–it feels intentional. Sharing silence with him brings Aira a sense of comfort. There’s no need for words. Just shared space, shared air, shared stillness. It reminds her of the many meditation sessions she shared with her mother in the past, where silence i meaningful and safe.
All of the Freedom Fighters made her feel safe. Safe from the Fire Nation. Safe from the world below them. Safe from isolation. For so long, Aira was forced to travel on her own. Towns and communities passed her by. She didn’t realize it until recently, but she yearned for human connection. For togetherness. For belonging. And thanks to Jet and the Freedom Fighters, she was starting to feel a whiff of what it was like to have a family again.
After Aira’s wounds recovered, Jet offered to teach her how to fight. He said she should know how to defend herself in a world riddled with war. She turned him down initially, hesitant to partake in anything remotely violent. Her ancestors were pacifists after all. But the more she thought about it, the more she realized that Jet is right. The Fire Nation is becoming more powerful and taking over more territories every day–Aira should know how to defend herself.
So their lessons began. Jet started Aira off with simple movements. Teaching her about stances–how to stand fiercely, how to shift her weight swiftly, and how to move deliberately. When she mastered the stances, Jet began to add resistance. They would spar in hand-to-hand combat. Jet went easy on her at first. Her reflexes were too slow, too stiff. Aira would often miss blocks or take missteps. She would frequently get knocked to the ground, but she always got back up. And gradually, her reaction time improved–she became stronger, fiercer. Her blocks became faster as muscle memory set in. Her dodges sharpened as she learned to anticipate certain movements. Eventually, she was able to hold her own against Jet in sparring sessions.
Aira held a sense of confidence that she hadn’t felt in a long time, and it was all thanks to the Freedom Fighters. However, she still occasionally felt like an outcast in this group of outcasts. The core group–Jet, The Duke, Pipsqueak, Smellerbee, and Longshot–often went on missions. Missions for what, Aira didn’t know, as she was never included. And they would never tell her exactly what happened on these missions either. The secrecy gives Aira a sense of unease. It sits in her chest like a quiet pressure, not exactly painful, but persistent–unsure if she should pursue her curious thoughts, or just learn to sit without knowing.
The dinner table was lively this evening, Pipspeak and The Duke were once again joking and laughing through mouths full of food as Aira quietly ate her meal bedside them. Even if she didn’t usually partake in their antics, she still enjoyed the positive atmosphere that radiated from them. It reminded her of her mother, who was always so bright and cheerful.
Aira finished her meal and excused herself to her hut, ready to tuck in for the night. She plans to do some light stretches and meditate before going to bed.
She admires the colorful trees all around them as she crosses one of the many wooden bridges built by the Freedom Fighters that connect their community.
It really is beautiful here.
Her quiet walk is interrupted by footsteps coming toward her from behind. She turns her head and finds Jet walking towards her, so she stops and faces him.
“Hi, Aira,” Jet smiles as he gets closer, “I wanted to ask you something.” Jet catches up to Aira and they walk side-by-side to her hut.
“Sure, what’s on your mind?” Aira questions. Her curiosity is piqued, Jet doesn’t spend much time with Aira alone outside of their sparring sessions. He’s usually too busy running the camp or planning secret missions.
“We have a mission tomorrow and I’d like you to join,” Jet offers. This causes Aira to stop in her tracks and stare at Jet with her eyebrows raised and her mouth open in shock. Jet has never invited Aira on a mission before.
“Me? Why do you want me to come along?” Aira doesn’t know whether to feel scared or excited. She agreed to learn fighting from Jet as a form of self defense, but she never intended to use what she learned for offensive purposes–that goes against her mother’s teachings. She remembers her mother’s words fondly.
“Air nomads were peaceful people. They respected all forms of life and never intentionally caused harm to others. If they were ever confronted with danger, they would evade. Not out of fear, but out of intention. It takes a certain degree of discipline and restraint to survive without causing harm to others.”
“Aira,” Jet starts as he places his hand on her shoulder, “the village not far from our base is being taken over by Fire Nation soldiers. They have a camp nearby that we plan to clear out. But the camp has over 20 soldiers so we need all of the help that we can get.” Jet places both hands on Aira’s shoulders and looks deeply into her eyes with a serious yet soft look. “We need your help. The innocent people in that town need your help.”
Jet’s hands on her shoulders and his intense gaze made Aira’s stomach flip. She blushes and clears her throat as she turns around and holds onto the handrails of the bridge they’re standing on. Aira isn’t used to physical contact with other people, especially with boys her age. Her shoulders drop and she sighs. “I… don’t know, Jet. I don’t think I’m ready.” She’d only been sparring Jet for a few months now. And while she’s definitely improved, she still has a lot to learn.
“Nonsense, you’re more than ready, Aira,” Jet reassures. “You’ve come such a long way since we first met. You can do this, I know you can. And if you run into trouble, I’ll be right there to protect you.”
Jet’s words help Aira feel more at ease–more confident in herself. It makes her feel better knowing that Jet will be there with her in case something goes wrong. So she takes a deep breath and faces Jet with a smile on her face. For the people in that town, she tells herself.
Aira and the Freedom Fighters head out early the next morning. She feels tense the whole way there, nervousness taking over her being. What if I possum-chicken out? What if a soldier overtakes me?
Jet must sense Aira’s unease because he grabs her hand and rubs his thumb against the backside of it in an attempt to soothe her. “Hey, you got this,” he reassures. His actions seem to physically relax Aira’s body, but they don’t quell the rapid beating of her heart.
They’re now sitting high up in some trees looking over the Fire Nation soldiers’ camp. Jet said they had to wait for some sort of distraction before they engage. He said the element of surprise will shift the odds in our favor.
It feels as though hours have passed. Aira is beginning to feel restless, and her legs are starting to hurt from crouching on this tree for so long. What kind of distraction are we even waiting for? She asks herself, starting to become less anxious and more impatient.
Suddenly, three kids, or teenagers, waltz into the Fire Nation’s camp by accident. Aira sees a boy and a girl both in Watertribe attire, and a smaller boy with a bald head and arrow-shaped tattoos. Wait, are those–
Before Aira can finish her thought, the Fire Nation soldiers bend a wall of fire behind the trio, preventing them from escaping. The Watertribe boy holds his arms out in front of his two counterparts, obviously trying to protect them. “If you let us pass we promise not to hurt you,” he speaks with confidence and bravery.
“You promise not to hurt us?” a Fire Nation soldier almost laughs. The soldier then immediately gets knocked to the ground by one of Longshot’s arrows before Jet and the other Freedom Fighters jump to action. Aira sees Jet use his hook swords to swing from a tree branch and kick two soldiers to the ground. He then hooks his swords around the ankles of two more soldiers, swinging them into the air. They land in a heap on top of the first soldier that collapsed.
“They’re in the trees!” someone yells urgently. Then chaos ensues. The Duke leaps from his tree and lands on a Fire Nation soldier's head. As the soldier runs away trying to get The Duke off of his head, Pipsqueak uses his strong hands to crack two soldiers’ heads together, knocking them unconscious. Aira sees Longshot in the distance shooting arrows in every direction. She also sees the Water Tribe girl and the bald boy using bending to take down some soldiers.
Aira can barely keep track of who’s where. Soldiers and Freedom Fighters are running left and right. Some are locked in intense one-on-one combat. Grunts and screams can be heard from every direction. But the Freedom Fighters are holding their own, mostly. Aira notices Sneers, one of the Freedom Fighters’ scouts, being cornered by three Fire Nation soldiers.
I can’t just stand by while my friend gets hurt by these monsters, Aira thinks. So she jumps to action.
Aira swiftly jumps from the tree branch she’d been hiding sitting on, and lands in a crouched position. She then leaps towards the Fire Nation soldiers and sweeps her feet across one of the soldier's legs, effectively knocking him to the ground. This gets the attention of the other two soldiers and they stand to face her, ready to attack. Aira hesitates for a second and takes half a step back, fear quickly creeping in. I didn’t think this through. I did NOT think this through.
One of the soldiers takes advantage of Aira’s uncertainty and swings his spear towards her head. She acts quickly and dodges the attack, just like Jet taught her. Aira rushes at him and quickly jabs him in the stomach before disarming his spear and knocking him down. She doesn’t have to blink before the third soldier slams her to the ground hard. The air is knocked out of her lungs as her body hits the hard surface. Panic begins to set in as the soldier has her pinned, crushing her. She gasps trying to catch her breath underneath his weight. He’s bending a small flame in his hand, ready to strike. Aira instinctively covers her face with her arms. This is it. This is the end.
Suddenly, the weight of the soldier is thrown off of Aira and she can finally breathe again. She gasps for breath as she quickly gets off the ground and looks for her attacker. He’s currently standing in front of the brave Water Tribe boy she noticed earlier. He holds up his silver boomerang while yelling a war cry, ready to strike, before Jet swoops in and kicks the soldier down.
“Gotta be quicker next time,” Jet remarks before running off to find more soldiers. Aira watches Jet as he moves. He’s very agile. Jet moves as if fighting is second nature to him. He really went easy on me during sparring sessions…
“Are you okay?” The Water Tribe boy asks as he walks to stand in front of Aira. He’s looking at her with concern in his deep blue eyes. They're so blue.
Aira’s attention is then diverted as the last remaining soldiers run past them away from Pipsqueak. They have broken swords in their hands. Did Pipsqueak do that? She surveys her surroundings and notices all of the Fire Nation soldiers had fled. They did it!
Aira then realizes she had not responded to the Water Tribe boy. “I’m fine thanks to you. I appreciate your help,” she sheepishly smiles at him and rubs her arm, a little embarrassed that she let one of the soldiers get the best of her.
The boy puffs out his chest, obviously proud that he was able to help, “It’s no problem.” He then relaxes his shoulders and smiles at her, “Really. I'm just glad you’re okay.”
Aira and the boy share a smile. She holds out her hand to introduce herself but is cut off as Jet rushes up to her. He places both hands on her upper arms as he checks her for injuries.
“Are you okay Aria?” he asks with concern in his voice. Before Aira can answer, he beams at her, “You were amazing out there! We couldn't have done it without you.” He then ruffles her hair on the top of her head before turning to the Water Tribe boy and girl and the bald boy. Aira moves to join Jet’s conversation with the three friendly strangers.
“You just took out a whole army almost single-handed,” the bald boy says in awe. He and the Water Tribe girl look to be impressed by Jet and the other Freedom Fighters.
“Army? Pft. There were only, like, 20 guys,” the Water Tribe boy scoffed. He doesn’t seem to be as impressed as his two friends.
Jet ignores the Water Tribe boy, and gestures toward himself with a smile. “I’m Jet, and these are my Freedom Fighters–Sneers, Longshot, Smellerbee, The Duke, Pipsqueak, and Aira,” his says with his voice full of pride.
The bald boy walks towards The Duke with a laugh. “Pipsqueak, that’s a funny name”. Aira snickers to herself, realizing the boy’s mistake. Pipsqueak is much than Duke. She probably would’ve done the same if she hadn’t met the two boys separately.
“You think my name is funny?” Pipsqueak questions in his usual deep voice, sounding almost threatening.
“It’s hilarious!” the bald boy responds. This causes Pipsqueak to erupt into a fit of laughter with the boy and The Duke. Aira giggles at the lighthearted interaction. As she watches, she can’t help but study the bald boy’s tattoos. They’re shaped like arrows, closely resembling air bender tattoos. Aira’s mother told her a long time ago that arrow tattoos are given to air benders when they’ve officially mastered airbending. But surely this boy can’t be an airbender. As far as Aira knows, all airbenders were killed off by the Fire Nation over 100 years ago. As far as she knows, she’s the last one.
The Freedom Fighters filter through the Fire Nation’s camp, gathering up any and all supplies that could be useful. Aira notices the Water Tribe boy watching everyone with his armed crossed, obviously tense. She joins Pipsqueak and the Duke as they find several barrels, some filled with jelly candy, and others filled with blasting jelly.
“That’s a great score,” Jet says cooly, “let’s not get those mixed up.” Pipsqueak and the Duke load the barrels onto a wagon before departing to the Freedom Fighters’ hideout.
“You guys have a hideout?” Aang asks with excitement. Jet offers to let them see it, which Katara enthusiastically agrees to. Thus, The Freedom Fighters start their trek back to the hideout with the three strangers in tow. Aira can’t help but notice the small lemur and large bison following the group. The bison has arrows on his head that match the bald boy’s tattoos. Peculiar.
Aira falls behind as they all walk towards the hideout. Jet and the other Freedom Fighters lead the way with the Water Tribe girl and bald boy following closely. The Water Tribe boy is close to Aira. She notices he’s walking behind the group to keep an eye on everyone, seemingly untrusting of the company he’s in.
“I’m Sokka,” the Water Tribe boy introduces. “Jet said your name is Aira?” he asks, genuinely curious about the girl in front of him.
“That’s right,” she smiles, “it’s nice to meet you Sokka”. Her smile is beautiful, Sokka thinks as she smiles at him.
“Likewise,” he clears his throat awkwardly and blushes, realizing he was staring at her for too long. “So,” he trails off as they continue their walk in tandem, “how do you know Jet?”
She ponders for a second, thinking about the last few months she’s spent with the Freedom Fighters. “He and the other Freedom Fighters saved me from a run-in with Fire Nation soldiers. I was badly injured, and they took me in. If it weren’t for them, I’d probably be dead”.
“Really?” Sokka asks. “It looked like you were taking pretty good care of yourself out there,” he compliments, remembering how she managed to take down two Fire Nation soldiers all on her own. Her movements were impressive.
“I don’t know about that,” Aira denies sheepishly as she rubs the back of her neck with a grimace on her face. “That last soldier surely would’ve hurt me if it weren’t for you. Thank you again for saving me,” she smiles at him kindly, her words filled with gratitude.
“Don’t mention it.” Sokka’s voice cracks as he too becomes sheepish. They fall into a comfortable silence as they continue to walk shortly behind the rest of the group. Aira looks ahead, studying Sokka's friends from a distance.
“Sokka, who is the boy and girl that you’re traveling with?” Aira asks, wanting to know more about the water bender and the boy with the arrow tattoos.
“Katara is my sister,” Sokka points to the pretty Water Tribe girl. He then points to the boy, “And that’s Aang. He’s the Avatar”.
This causes Aira to stop in her tracks. Her eyes are wide as she processes this information. “The Avatar?” she gapes, “I didn’t know the Avatar was alive.” If he’s the Avatar, and he has Air bender tattoos, then he must be an air bender. I’m not the last one.
“Yeah, Katara and I found him in the South Pole. We’re taking him to the North Pole so he can learn water bending,” Sokka explains. Before he can elaborate, Jet announces that they’ve arrived at the hideout. Sokka and Aira walk up to the front of the group where Jet, Katara, and Aang are all standing.
Sokka eyes the ropes hanging in the air that the Freedom Fighters use to pull themselves towards the hideout. “What’s this do?” Sokka asks.
Aira steps forward to explain but Jet hands Sokka a rope, which immediately pulls Sokka upwards into the trees. Sokka screams in surprise from the unexpected motion.
“You should’ve warned him,” Aira crosses her arms, giving Jet a condescending look. Jet just shrugs and smiles, “What? He wanted to know what it did, so I showed him.” Jet then offers a rope to Aang, who kindly denies the offer, saying he can get up on his own. Aang then uses his air bending to gracefully leap onto the incredibly tall tree branches, making it all of the way to the top. The wind from his bending blows air through Aira’s hair. She can’t help but stare in wonder. He really is an airbender… Could I do that if I tried? She shakes the thought from her head before taking her own rope upward through the trees.
Aira lands on the walkway where Sokka is standing. She can tell he’s still trying to recover from being unexpectedly shot into the air. In the distance, Aang is using the hang glider that weaves through the hideout, obviously having a blast. Aira can't help but notice how free-spirited he is. She thinks back to her childhood, how much fun she used to have. How she used to play hide and seek with the other kids her age, or how she used to have dance parties with her parents. She used to be so footloose. Aira becomes saddened at the memory of her parents and their deaths. It weighs on her and hardens her more and more each and every day.
Aira’s inner monologue gets cut short when Jet and Katara make it onto the platform, Jet holding Katara in his arms as she blushes wildly. This causes Aira to roll her eyes, which Sokka mentally takes note of. Of course she has a thing for him, he thinks bitterly.
They all begin to walk towards the common area to prepare for dinner. Aira once again falls in line with Aang and Sokka. They overhear Jet and Pipsqueak talk about how they’ve been trying to drive the Fire Nation out of the valley by ambushing their troops and cutting off their supply lines.
“Yeah, nothing’s braver than a guy in a treehouse,” Sokka says sassily, obviously unimpressed with Jet. Katara nudges her brother with an annoyed expression, “Don’t pay any attention to my brother.” Jet brushes it off and they continue their walk.
“So Aang, I was wondering,” Aira begins, “are those airbending tattoos?” Naturally, she’s very curious about the young airbender given her heritage and own bending abilities, not that anyone else knows them. Aang perks up and holds his hands out in front of him to emphasize the arrows on his hands. “Yeah! The monks gave me my tattoos when I mastered airbending,” he says with a proud smile on his face.
“Wow! So you’re a true Airbending master?” Aira gapes at Aang.
Aang simply shrugs with a small smile. “You could say that. Check this out!” He then excitedly pulls some marbles out of his pocket and uses his airbending to quickly spin the marbles in a circle between both of his hands. Sokka groans from behind them, “Really? That trick again?”
“Oh stop it Sokka. That’s amazing Aang.” She reassures the boy. Aira has a strong desire to tell Aang that she’s also an airbender, but then she remembers the promise she made to her mother all those years ago right before she passed. You must never airbend again.
Aira suddenly stops walking and stares at her feet. She clenches her fists as she lets out a heavy sigh. Aang and Sokka both notice and turn to look at her. “Are you okay?” Sokka asks, his voice full of concern. Aira silently nods, and gives them a small, albeit fake smile.
“I’m fine. You guys go ahead. I’ll meet you in the common area later for dinner.” Aira says, her voice quiet. The two boys sense something is wrong, unsure what could’ve prompted Aira’s sudden mood shift.
“Oh-okay, if you’re sure” Aang trails off, “come on Sokka, let’s go catch up with Katara. Bye, Aira.” Aang pulls Sokka along, noting that Aira needs some time to herself. Sokka hesitates before following Aang, but not without looking back at Aira one more time.
Aira sits on the floor of her hut in lotus pose. She’s been attempting to meditate on her conflicted feelings, but her thoughts keep racing, making it too difficult to clear her head. Now that Aira knows that the Avatar has returned, and that he’s an airbender, she can’t help but feel like she has to tell him. This could be her chance to embrace her heritage, the heritage her mother tried so hard to ingrain into her since she was a little girl.
Ever since Aira was banished from her hometown, she’s been too afraid to practice her mother’s teachings. She recalls what her mother said to Aira that first night in the woods, when she made Aira promise to never airbend again.
“I know it must be confusing to hear, honey. But I’m afraid the villagers were right. Your gift puts you at great risk. If the Fire Nation discovers that you’re an airbender, they could hurt you, or worse. Suppressing your airbending ensures your safety, and that’s what matters to me most.”
Aira becomes frustrated as she relives the memory. She understands her mother’s motivation, but this was before the Avatar returned. Aang could end this war. He could make it safe for Aira to use her abilities freely. He could even teach her to airbend. But Aira doesn’t know if she can break the promise she made to her mother–it was practically her dying wish.
Tears stream down Aira’s cheeks and she begins to sob. I wish you here, mom.
The sun is just beginning to dip beneath the horizon, spilling streaks of red and burnt orange through the dense canopy overhead. The colors melt into deeper shades of blue as evening settles over the forest, painting the sky in soft watercolor hues. Aira has been walking since dawn, weaving through uneven trails and thick undergrowth in hopes of finding someplace hidden enough to rest without fear of Fire Nation patrols.
Every step feels heavier than the last.
Her feet ache inside worn shoes that stopped fitting her properly nearly a year ago. The leather pinches at her heels and rubs raw against her toes, each blister throbbing with every movement. Her shoulders sag beneath the weight of her pack, and exhaustion pulls at her eyelids like invisible hands.
She stumbles slightly over a root and shakes her head hard, forcing herself awake.
“Come on,” she mutters under her breath. “Just a little farther.”
A movement in the brush catches her attention. Hidden behind a curtain of vines and tangled shrubs is the mouth of a cave, nearly invisible unless someone was actively searching for it. Relief floods through her chest so suddenly that her knees nearly buckle.
“Oh, thank the spirits.”
Aira pushes through the brush and steps inside. The cave is small but dry, sheltered from the wind, and just large enough for one person to sleep comfortably. It smells faintly of damp stone and moss.
Perfect.
The moment she reaches the back wall, her body gives out on her. She slides down against the stone until she’s sitting on the cold ground, legs stretched out in front of her.
“I really need new shoes,” she mumbles tiredly.
She peels them off with a wince. Angry red blisters cover her heels and the sides of her feet. One of her socks has a hole worn straight through the heel. Aira presses the heels of her palms into her eyes and exhales shakily.
New shoes require money.
Money requires work.
And work requires staying in one place long enough for people to trust you.
None of which she had.
It’s been four years since she and her mother were forced from their home.
Mother...
The thought alone feels like pressing against a bruise. A heaviness settles deep in Aira’s chest as memories threaten to surface. Her throat tightens instantly. She squeezes her eyes shut and wipes at them before tears can fully form.
Stop. You’re fifteen years old. Stop crying.
The harshness of her own thoughts stings worse than the blisters on her feet. She made herself a promise after her mother died: don’t think about it. Don’t dwell on it. Don’t let yourself fall apart over something you can’t change.
But some nights are harder than others. Especially cold nights like this one.
Aira pulls her pack into her lap and rummages through it hopefully, searching for anything left to eat. Her fingers brush against cloth, herbs, and an old waterskin before finally finding—
Crumbs. She stares blankly into the empty pouch for a moment before letting out a humorless laugh.
“Great.”
Her stomach twists painfully in protest. She presses a hand against it and curls slightly inward. She hadn’t eaten since yesterday morning. Lately, hunger had become so common that sometimes she barely noticed it anymore.
Whether that was because she’d grown used to it or because part of her simply stopped caring, she wasn’t sure.
“I’ll forage tomorrow,” she whispers to herself.
Too exhausted to do anything else, Aira lays down on the cave floor and uses her pack as a pillow. The stone beneath her is hard and unforgiving, but sleep overtakes her almost immediately.
The forest awakens before she does.
Birdsong echoes softly through the trees while insects buzz lazily in the morning air. Dew clings to blades of grass and dampens the hems of Aira’s pants as she trudges through the undergrowth searching for food.
The crisp morning air feels good in her lungs. For once, there are no sounds of marching boots. No distant explosions. No shouting soldiers. Just nature.
Aira parts a cluster of leafy branches and immediately freezes. Goji berries. Dozens of them. Bright red berries hang heavily from several nearby bushes, practically glowing in the morning light. Relief washes through her so intensely she nearly laughs.
“Yes.”
She quickly plucks a handful and stuffs them into her mouth. Sweetness bursts across her tongue, followed by a sharp tang that makes her eyes flutter closed for a moment.
Spirits, that’s good.
She eats greedily at first, then slower once the painful edge of her hunger fades. Juice stains her fingertips red as she gathers more berries into her pack for later. Maybe things weren’t so bad today.
As she ties her bag shut, movement in the distance catches her eye. A fox-antelope grazes quietly near a patch of wildflowers.
Aira stills instantly.
Its slender body moves gracefully through the grass, ears twitching at every sound. Morning light catches along its curved horns and reddish-brown fur. And suddenly—
“Aira, honey, come look!”
The memory hits her so vividly it almost feels real.
Young Aira crouches beside her mother behind a bush, both of them peeking out into a meadow.
“They’re gentle creatures,” her mother continues. “They survive because they adapt to the world around them instead of fighting against it.”
Aira remembers wrinkling her nose in confusion. “What does that mean?”
Nira smiles warmly as the fox-antelope leap effortlessly through the tall grass.
“It means strength doesn’t always look like force,” she explains. “Sometimes strength is knowing when to bend instead of break. Like water flowing around stone.”
The memory fades as quickly as it came.
Aira lowers her eyes. Only now, years later, does she fully understand what her mother meant. For a long time after the banishment, survival became instinct. Keep moving. Don’t stay anywhere too long. Avoid soldiers. Avoid attention. Avoid attachments. Just survive.
But eventually even survival starts to feel hollow when there’s no one left to share your life with. Still... small moments kept pulling her forward.
An old man teaching his grandson Pai Sho beneath a tree.
A baker slipping her an extra bun with a wink when she clearly had no money.
A shopkeeper asking how her day was and actually waiting for the answer.
Tiny fragments of kindness. Proof that goodness still existed somewhere in this world.
Aira adjusts the bracelet around her wrist—the wooden beads smooth beneath her fingertips. Mei Lee’s bracelet. The symbol for family carved into the center bead has faded slightly with age, but Aira still traces it whenever she feels alone--which is often.
With a quiet sigh, she pulls her pack onto her shoulders and continues through the forest.
That night is colder.
The fire crackles weakly in front of her, orange embers spiraling upward into the dark. Aira sits close to the flames with her cloak wrapped tightly around herself, trying to trap whatever warmth she can.
The wind bites through the trees sharply enough to make her shiver. She wishes she’d found another cave.
A twig snaps somewhere nearby. Aira’s head jerks up instantly.
Her body goes rigid.
Another crunch.
Then voices.
“Hey! You there!”
Panic floods her veins.
Figures emerge between the trees carrying fire in their hands like living torches.
Firebenders.
Aira doesn’t think—she runs. She snatches her pack off the ground and bolts into the forest. Branches whip against her face as she tears through the undergrowth blindly. Her breaths come fast and uneven, terror clawing through her chest.
Not again. Please not again.
“Stop!”
Firelight flickers behind her through the trees. Aira leaps over a fallen branch—
—and her foot catches.
Pain explodes through her ankle as she crashes violently to the ground. Her forehead slams against stone.
The world goes black instantly.
Pain drags her back to consciousness.
A sharp throbbing pulses behind Aira’s eyes hard enough to make her groan aloud. She lifts a shaky hand to her head.
Spirits…
Her eyelids feel impossibly heavy. As she slowly forces them open, blurry light spills into her vision. The brightness makes the pounding in her skull worse. Aira grips the wall beside her and manages to sit upright.
She’s inside a small wooden hut. Confusion floods through her. Her sleeping bag has been laid neatly beneath her. Sunlight filters through cracks in the wooden walls, and directly outside the open doorway she sees thick branches and leaves—as though the hut itself has been built high within the trees.
Her thoughts stumble over themselves trying to remember.
Running. Fire Nation soldiers. Falling—
Pain pulses through her skull again.
Aira squeezes her eyes shut. Darkness feels easier. Safer. Before she can stop herself, exhaustion drags her under once more.
“How do we know we can trust her?”
“We don’t,” another voice replies. “But she was running from the Fire Nation.”
“That doesn’t mean she isn’t dangerous.”
Aira drifts slowly awake to the sound of quiet arguing outside the hut. Her head hurts less now, though her body still feels heavy and sore.
“…enemy of the Fire Nation is a friend to me.”
“…still think someone should guard the hut.”
“Fine.”
Aira’s eyes snap open. Panic hits instantly. She remembers now. The soldiers. The fall. She bolts upright too quickly and immediately cries out as sharp pain shoots through her ankle. She collapses sideways against the wall, clutching her leg.
Footsteps rush toward the doorway. Two figures burst inside.
Aira scrambles backward on instinct until her spine presses hard against the far wall.
One of the strangers is enormous—a towering man with broad shoulders and thick arms carrying a massive wooden club. The other is younger. Leaner. A teenage boy with shaggy brown hair and sharp features. A stalk of wheat hangs loosely from the corner of his mouth.
Despite herself, Aira notices he’s... kind of handsome. The realization immediately embarrasses her.
Focus.
Both boys stop when they see the panic on her face. The younger one slowly raises his hands. “It’s okay,” he says calmly. “We’re not going to hurt you.” His voice is steady and strangely reassuring. “The Fire Nation can’t reach you here,” he continues carefully. “You’re safe.”
Aira studies him warily. His brown eyes are soft—not cruel or calculating like the soldiers she’s learned to fear. Still, her muscles remain tense. “What happened?” she asks quickly. “How did I get here?”
The boy steps a little closer, though not enough to corner her. “We found you in the forest last night,” he explains. “You were being chased by Fire Nation soldiers. You hit your head pretty hard when you fell.”
“The soldiers almost got to you,” the larger man adds in a deep voice. “But we drove them off.”
Aira stares.
They saved me.
“You’ve been unconscious for over a day,” the younger boy says.
A full day?
Aira’s eyes widen slightly. No wonder her entire body feels weak. She lowers herself more carefully against the wall this time, wincing at the throbbing in her ankle.
“Easy,” the large man says. “You’re hurt.”
“You should rest,” the boy agrees. “You can stay here until you recover.”
Aira searches their faces cautiously. No uniforms. No Fire Nation markings. Just concern.
Slowly, some of the fear drains from her body. “I…” Her voice catches slightly. “Thank you. Really.”
The younger boy smiles a little at that. For some reason, the expression makes her chest feel oddly warm.
“So,” Aira says after a moment, “who are you people?”
The boy straightens proudly.
“I’m Jet,” he says. Then he gestures toward the larger man beside him. “And this is Pipsqueak.”
A century after the Air Nomads were wiped out, Aira has spent years hiding an impossible secret-she's an airbender.
After losing her mother and being forced to suppress her abilities to survive, Aira drifts through the world alone until she crosses paths with the Avatar and his friends on their journey to end the Hundred Year War. Suddenly, she's thrown into a life of danger, healing, and the possibility of belonging for the first time in years.
As Aang eagerly helps her reconnect with her airbending heritage, Aira grows closer to the people around her-especially Sokka, whose sarcasm and loyalty slowly break through her guarded heart. Between Fire Nation threats, lingering grief, and quiet moments beneath the stars, their bond blossoms into a soft slowburn romance.
But as the war closes in and the past continues to haunt her, Aira must decide whether she'll keep hiding who she is-or finally embrace the person she was meant to become.
Disclaimer:
This story follows the events of ATLA with my original character--Aira. I wrote this first chapter and posted it about one year ago but took it down shortly after because I wasn't really motivated to flesh out more of the story. However, the new Legend of Aang movie clips have renewed my love for this franchise and given me the motivation to write this story. Please be kind as this is my first time writing fan fiction, and I'm not practiced in creative writing... like at all. I'm writing this for my own enjoyment but I thought it wouldn't hurt to share this story with others.
Chapter 1 | Chapter Masterlist
As a young child, Aira’s mother, Nira, would tell her stories of the great Air Nation—a people raised to be carriers of peace, wisdom, and spirituality. According to her mother, the air nomads believed the world was alive in every sense of the word. The wind, the forests, the oceans, even the spirits themselves were all connected, woven together like strands in one endless tapestry.
“They never stayed in one place for long,” Mother would explain while preparing tea. “Air nomads believed the world had too much beauty to spend a lifetime standing still.”
Aira used to sit at her mother’s feet and listen intently to those stories. Nira spoke of the Air Temples with such warmth that it almost sounded like homesickness—as though she had seen them herself. She described towering temples hidden above the clouds, monks who could glide through the sky as lightly as leaves on the wind, and peaceful travelers who wandered from nation to nation sharing stories, music, and knowledge.
Even though the Fire Nation wiped out the air nomads a hundred years ago, Mother still spoke of them as if they were only just out of sight. As if one day they might drift back into the world on the breeze.
Nira practiced many of their traditions too. Every morning she lit incense beside their small shrine near the window. Every evening she meditated before bed. She taught Aira breathing exercises, spiritual reflection, and stories about the Spirit World—about spirits that protected rivers, forests, and balance itself.
“All life is sacred,” Mother says one afternoon, sunlight pouring through the windows of their tiny home. Dust dances lazily in the golden beams. “Humans, animals, plants—every living thing has a rightful place in this world.”
“What about scorpion bees?” eleven-year-old Aira asks immediately, scrunching her nose in disgust.
Mother’s shoulders sag dramatically as she drags a hand down her face.
“What?” Aira throws her hands up defensively. “They’re gross and mean!”
She still remembers stumbling into a scorpion bee nest while playing in the forest a few weeks ago. The creatures had swarmed her instantly. Her face and neck were covered in swollen red welts for days afterward.
Nira exhales a quiet laugh despite herself and crouches so they are eye level.
“I understand, darling,” she says gently. “But even scorpion bees deserve respect.”
Aira groans loudly. Mother smiles softly and taps the center of Aira’s forehead with one finger. “This world is one great living system. Every creature, every tree, every stream—it all depends on balance. If that balance is disrupted, the world falls into chaos.” Her expression turns thoughtful. “And you and I are part of that balance too.”
“Ourselves?” Aira tilts her head. “What do you mean?”
“We are living things, are we not?” Nira asks. “How can we care for the world around us if we do not care for ourselves first? Inner balance must come before outer balance.” She places a hand over Aira’s heart. “Kindness toward yourself is just as important as kindness toward others.”
Then Nira lowers herself gracefully onto the floor, crossing her legs with practiced ease. She pats the spot in front of her.
“Come meditate with me,” she says warmly. “Close your eyes. Let your mind become still.”
Aira glances toward the window. Judging by the position of the sun, it’s only midday. Usually meditation feels impossibly boring to her, but something about Mother’s voice today makes her listen.
She mirrors Nira’s posture awkwardly and closes her eyes. At first, all she notices is everything around her. The creaking wood beneath them. Birds chirping outside. Wind brushing softly against the walls of the house. But gradually, her mother’s slow breathing becomes the loudest thing in the room.
Inhale.
Exhale.
Inhale.
Exhale.
Aira matches the rhythm carefully. The tension slowly drains from her shoulders. Her thoughts begin to quiet one by one until her mind feels strangely light, almost empty.
Then she feels it.
A faint warmth blooms deep in her stomach.
Her brow furrows.
The sensation spreads slowly through her body like warm water flowing through hidden pathways beneath her skin. It moves through her chest, her arms, her fingertips. Tingling. Weightless. Alive.
The more she focuses on it, the stronger it becomes. Suddenly, her nose twitches.
“A-ah…”
The warmth rushes upward all at once.
“AH-CHOO!”
A violent gust of wind explodes from her body.
Aira is launched straight into the air.
There’s a loud crack as she blasts through the thin roof of their house, splintering wood and scattering dust everywhere. For one horrifying second she sees nothing but blue sky overhead before gravity yanks her back down.
She crashes through the roof again in a shower of debris and lands hard on the floor in front of her mother.
Silence.
Aira groans weakly from beneath a pile of broken wood.
“Aira!” Nira rushes to her side immediately, panic flooding her face. “Are you hurt?”
“I-I don’t think so…” Aira mutters dazedly as her mother helps her sit up.
Dust floats through the sunlight pouring from the brand new hole in the ceiling. Aira stares upward blankly. Then down at her own hands. Then back at the roof.
“What just happened?” she whispers. “Did I just… fly?”
Nira doesn’t answer right away.
She simply stares at her daughter in stunned disbelief, her eyes glassy with something between wonder and fear.
“I think…” Mother says faintly, “you just airbended.”
An hour later, the entire village knows. Word spread faster than wildfire.
By the time Nira finished checking Aira for injuries, townspeople were already crowding outside their home, whispering anxiously amongst themselves. Some peered through the broken roof in awe. Others looked terrified.
“The first airbender in a hundred years…”
“Could she be the Avatar?”
“No—she’s too old to just discover it now…”
“What if the Fire Nation hears about this?”
That last question changes everything.
“The Fire Nation will come here!” the shopkeeper exclaims fearfully. “If they learn there’s an airbender in this town, they’ll invade!”
Murmurs of agreement ripple through the crowd.
“She needs to leave.”
“For everyone’s safety.”
Aira’s stomach twists painfully.
Her hands curl into fists at her sides as shame crawls up her throat like poison. Just an hour ago she was excited. Special, even. Now everyone is looking at her like she’s dangerous.
“Now hold on!” Mei Lee suddenly steps in front of Aira and Nira, shielding them with her body. Her husband Kaito stands beside her immediately. “Nira and Aira are our friends!”
Mei Lee turns briefly toward Aira and offers her a reassuring smile.
It reminds Aira of warm soup on cold nights. Of laughter around fireplaces. Of egg custard tarts cooling on the windowsill while Kaito told exaggerated stories that always made Mother laugh. After Aira’s father died in the war years earlier, Mei Lee and Kaito became family in every way except blood.
Which only makes what happens next hurt even more.
Laozu, the village elder, slowly approaches the crowd. He is a gentle man. Quiet. Thoughtful. The kind of person who never raises his voice because he never has to. He places a hand on Mei Lee’s shoulder.
“Mei Lee,” he says softly, “I understand your compassion. But the Fire Nation has slaughtered entire villages for less than this.” His eyes shift sadly toward Aira. “If word spreads about an airbender, our people will be put in danger.”
A heavy silence settles over the crowd. Then Laozu speaks the words that split Aira’s life in two.
“I think it would be best if Nira and Aira continued their journey elsewhere.”
By sunset, they are gone. Aira stuffs her belongings into her pack with shaking hands, rage burning hot behind her eyes.
“This is our home!” she shouts. “How can they just throw us out?!”
Nira remains painfully calm as she gathers supplies.
“We cannot blame them for being afraid,” she says quietly.
“But they’re wrong!”
“Perhaps,” Mother whispers. “But fear makes people cruel.”
Aira’s chest aches as she steps outside for what may be the last time. The house she grew up in already feels unfamiliar now. Like it belongs to someone else.
At the edge of town, Mei Lee breaks into tears the moment she sees them. The four of them collapse into a tight embrace.
“I hate this,” Mei Lee cries into Nira’s shoulder. “I hate all of this.”
She presses a travel bag into Nira’s hands—medicinal herbs, dried food, blankets. Then she turns to Aira and places a bracelet made of smooth wooden beads into her palm. The center bead is carved with the symbol for family.
“I was saving it for your birthday,” Mei Lee says shakily. “But I want you to have it now.”
Aira clutches the bracelet tightly enough that the edges dig into her skin. Together, she and Nira leave behind the only home they’ve ever known. And neither of them look back.
That night, they camp deep within the forest. The trees tower high overhead, their branches swaying gently in the wind. Nearby, a stream trickles softly over smooth stones.
Usually Mother loves the wilderness. Usually she hums while building fires. Usually she tells stories before bed. Tonight she says almost nothing.
The silence feels wrong. Heavy. Aira lies awake staring into the flames, guilt curling tighter and tighter in her chest. This is my fault. If she hadn’t airbended, they would still be home.
Would the Fire Nation really hunt her down? Would they kill her too?
Her breathing suddenly catches. The world begins spinning. Her chest tightens painfully as panic crashes over her like a wave.
“Aira?” Mother is beside her instantly. “Honey, breathe.”
Aira gasps desperately for air.
Nira grips her shoulders gently and exaggerates each inhale and exhale. “Follow me,” she whispers. “Slowly.”
Gradually, Aira matches her rhythm.
Inhale.
Exhale.
The ringing in her ears slowly fades.
Nira lays beside her afterward, running trembling fingers through Aira’s hair. And for the first time since they left town, Mother begins to cry. “I’m so sorry, darling,” she whispers brokenly. “I’m so, so sorry.”
Aira stares at her in confusion. Mother smiles through her tears and cups Aira’s cheek. “I love you more than anything in this world. And I will do everything I can to protect you.”
Then her expression hardens with sudden resolve.
“Which is why I need you to promise me something.” Her voice shakes. “Something I know you won’t understand.”
Would anyone read a slow burn Sokka x OC fic that follows the events of ATLA?
I wrote it for myself but now I’m nine chapters and 26.9k words in—and only halfway through season one LOL. I’m wondering if I should post it but not sure if anyone would be interested.
This is literally my first time doing any sort of creative writing that isn’t school related so I’m a little shy about it lol.